1706 - BF HOTEL - Specs - Architectural - Part 2

BF HOTEL
Makkah, Saudi Arabia
PROJECT # 1706
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
ARCHITECTURAL/ FINISHING WORKS
Part 2
TABLE OF CONTENTS
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
DOORS AND WINDOWS SECTION 11150 – PARKING CONTROL EQUIPMENT
SECTION 08810 – GLASS SECTION 11172 – WASTE COMPACTORS
SECTION 08911 – GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN SECTION 11460 – UNIT KITCHENS

WALLS
SECTION 11480 – GYMNASIUM EQUIPMENTS
FINISHES
SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
SECTION 09220 – PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER
SECTION 13100 – LIGHTNING PROTECTION
SECTION 09250 – GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
SECTION 09300 – TILES CONVEYING SYSTEM

SECTION 09310 – CERAMIC TILES
SECTION 14210 – ELECTRIC TRACTION
ELEVATORS
SECTION 09500 – GYPSUM CEILING TILES
SECTION 14560 – CHUTES
SECTION 09638 – STONE FLOORING
SECTION 09680 – CARPET
SECTION 09900 – PAINTS AND COATINGS
SPECIALTIES
SECTION 10155 – TOILET COMPARTMENTS
SECTION 10260 – HEAVY DUTY RUBBER CORNER

AND WALL GUARD
SECTION 10801 – SPECIALTIES
EQUIPMENT
SECTION 11014 – FAÇADE MAINTENANCE

EQUIPMENT
SECTION 11060 – THEATER AND STAGE

EQUIPMENTS
SECTION 11110 – COMMERCIAL LAUNDRY

EQUIPMENT
PROJECT: 1706 – BF HOTEL
LOCATION: Makkah, Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
SUBJECT: SECTION 08810 - GLASS
SECTION 08810
GLASS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes
1. Glass at Aluminum windows
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Section 08520 - Aluminum Windows.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ANSI Z97.1 – American National Standard for Glazing Materials Used in Buildings: Safety
Performance Specifications and Methods of Test.
B. ASTM C 162 – Standard Terminology of Glass and Glass Products.
C. ASTM C 864 – Standard Specification for Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal Gaskets,
Setting Blocks and Spacers.
D. ASTM C 1036 – Standard Specification for Flat Glass.
E. ASTM C 1048 – Standard Specification for Heat-Treated Flat Glass.
F. ASTM C 1172 – Standard Specification for Laminated Architectural Flat Glass.
G. ASTM C 1193 – Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants.
H. ASTM E 283 – Standard Test Method for Determining the rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior
Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen.
I. ASTM E 330 – Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain
Walls and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.
MHA – TECH. SPECIFICATION – 1706 – 04//02/2015 SECTION 08810 – GLASS 1 / 14

J. ASTM E 2188 – Standard Test Method for Insulating Glass Unit Performance.
K. ASTM E 2189 – Standard Test Method for Testing Resistance to Fogging in Insulating Glass
Units.
L. ASTM E 2190 – Standard Specification for Insulating Glass Unit Performance and Evaluation.
M. ASTM E 1300 – Standard Practice for Determining the Minimum Thickness and Type of Glass
Required to Resist a Specified Load.
N. GANA (GM) – FGMA Glazing Manual; Glass Association of North America.
O. GANA (GM) – FGMA Sealant Manual; Glass Association of North America.
P. GANA (LGDG) – Laminated Glass Design Guide; Glass Association of North America.
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. Manufacturers of Glass Products: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both,
as defined in referenced glazing publications.
B. Glass Thicknesses: Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters according to

ASTM C 1036.
C. Interspace: Space between lites of an insulating-glass unit that contains dehydrated air or a
specified gas.
D. Deterioration of Coated Glass: Defects developed from normal uses that are attributed to the
manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for
maintaining and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects
include peeling, cracking, and other indications of deterioration in metallic coating.
E. Deterioration of Insulating Glass: Failure of hermetic seal under normal use that is attributed to
the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for
maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions.
Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of
glass.
F. Deterioration of Laminated Glass: Defects developed from normal uses that are attributed to
the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for
maintaining and cleaning laminated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions.
Defects include edge separation, delamination materially obstructing vision through glass, and
blemishes exceeding those allowed by referenced laminated-glass standard.
1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Design Requirements:
1. Size glass to withstand dead loads and positive and negative live loads acting normal to
plane of glass.

2. Size glass to withstand dead loads and positive and negative live loads acting normal to
plane of glass to a design pressure in accordance with ASTM 1300.
3. Limit glass deflection to 1/200 or flexure limit of glass with full recovery of glazing
materials, whichever is less.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provision of Section 01300.
B. Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:

1. Preparation instructions and recommendations.
2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
3. Installation methods.
C. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, two (2) complete sets of color samples
representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns.
D. Verification Samples:
1. Flat Glass Materials: Two 4" x 4' (102mm by 102mm) samples of each glass type
specified.
2. Sealed Insulating Glass Units: Two 12" x 12" (305mm x 305mm) samples representative
of unit construction.
3. Specifier for Spandrel Glass: Indicated match to Architect's color selection.
E. Certificates: Product certificates signed by the manufacturer certifying material compliance with
specified performance characteristics and criteria and physical requirements.
F. Warranty documents Specified herein.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualification: Flat Glass Material – Minimum five (5) years documented
experience producing glass products specified in this section.
B. Fabricator, Sealed Insulating Glass Units: Minimum five (5) years documented experience
producing sealed insulating glass units specified in this section.
C. Installer Qualifications: Minimum five (5) years documented installing products specified in this
section and approved by fabricator.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions and as needed to

prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct
exposure to sun, or other causes.
B. For insulating-glass units that will be exposed to substantial altitude changes, comply with
insulating-glass manufacturer's written recommendations for venting and sealing to avoid
hermetic seal ruptures.

1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate
temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when
glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.
1. Do not install liquid glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions
are outside limits permitted by glazing sealant manufacturer or below 40 deg F (4.4
deg C).
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Coated-Glass Products: Manufacturer's standard form,

made out to Owner and signed by coated-glass manufacturer agreeing to replace coated-glass
units that deteriorate as defined in "Definitions" Article, f.o.b. the nearest shipping point to
Project site, within specified warranty period indicated below.
1. Warranty Period: Ten (10) years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Laminated Glass: Manufacturer's standard form, made out
to Owner and signed by laminated-glass manufacturer agreeing to replace laminated-glass
units that deteriorate as defined in "Definitions" Article, f.o.b. the nearest shipping point to
Project site, within specified warranty period indicated below.
1. Warranty Period: Five (5) years from date of Substantial Completion.
C. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Insulating Glass: Manufacturer's standard form, made out
to Owner and signed by insulating-glass manufacturer agreeing to replace insulating-glass units
that deteriorate as defined in "Definitions" Article, f.o.b. the nearest shipping point to Project
site, within specified warranty period indicated below.
1. Warranty Period: Ten (10) years from date of Substantial Completion.
1.11 EXTRA MATERIAL
A. Supply two (2) of each size and type of insulating glass units.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified.

2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products

specified.
3. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product specified.
4. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
manufacturers specified.
5. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
6. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for each glazing product is based on the product
named. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or a
comparable product by one of the other manufacturers specified.
B. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. PILKINGTON NORTH AMERICA INC.
2. LACOBEL
3. INTRACO (Glass supplier)
4. Guardian
5. Or approved equal.
C. Substitutions: Not permitted.
D. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 01600.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Clear Uncoated Float Glass:

1. Acceptable Product:
a. Pilkington North America Inc.
b. Lacobel
c. Or approved equal.
2. Description: Annealed clear float glass meeting requirements of ASTM C 1036, Type 1,
Class 1, Quality q3.
3. Minimum Glass Thickness: As indicated on Drawing.
4. Performance Characteristics:
a. Visible Light Transmittance: As indicated on Drawing.
b. Visible Light Reflectance: As indicated on Drawing.
c. Total Solar Energy Transmittance: As indicated on Drawing.
d. Total Solar Energy Reflectance: As indicated on Drawing.
e. UV Transmittance: As indicated on Drawing.
f. Summer U-Value: As indicated on Drawing.
g. Winter U-Value: As indicated on Drawing.
h. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: As indicated on Drawing.
i. Shading Coefficient: As indicated on Drawing.
B. Tinted Uncoated Float Glass:

b. INTRACO
c. Guardian
d. Lacobel
e. Or approved equal.

2. Description: Annealed tinted float glass meeting requirements of ASTM C 1036, Type 1,
Class 1, Quality q3.
C. Reflective Coated Float Glass

b. INTRACO
c. Guardian
d. Lacobel
2. Description: Annealed clear/tinted coated float glass meeting requirements of ASTM C
1036, Type 1, Class 1, Quality q3; with pyrolytic coating meeting the requirements of AST
C 1376 " Specification for Pyrolytic and Vacuum Deposition Coatings on Glass".
3. Nominal Glass Thickness: 1/4" (6mm).
4. Performance Characteristics; coating on Surface:
D. Low-Emissivity Coated Float Glass:

b. INTRACO
c. Guardian
d. Lacobel
2. Description: Annealed clear coated float glass meeting requirements of ASTM C 1036,
Type 1, Class 1, Quality q3; with pyrolytic coating meeting the requirements of AST C
1376 " Specification for Pyrolytic and Vacuum Deposition Coatings on Glass".


E. Solar Control Low-Emissivity Coated Float Glass:

b. INTRACO
c. Guardian
d. Lacobel
2. Description: Annealed clear coated float glass meeting requirements of ASTM C 1036,
Type 1, Class 1, Quality q3; with pyrolytic coating meeting the requirements of AST C
1376 " Specification for Pyrolytic and Vacuum Deposition Coatings on Glass".
F. Transparent Mirror:
b. INTRACO
c. Guardian
d. Lacobel
2. Description: ASTM C 1036, Type 1, Class3, Quality q3; with pyrolitic coating.
3. Nominal Glass Thickness: 1/4" (6mm).
a. Visible Light Transmittance: 12%
b. Visible Light Reflectance: 60%
G. Anti-Reflective Glass:
b. INTRACO
c. Guardian
d. Lacobel
2. Description: Laminated Glass with OptiView coating surfaces #1 and #4
a. Visible Light Reflectance: 2%

H. Heat-Retardant Glass:
b. INTRACO
c. Guardian
d. Lacobel
2. Description: Clear glass layers, meeting requirements of ASTM C 1036, Type 1, Class 1,
Quality q3, interleaved with layers of transparent intumescent material, laminated into
monolithic heat-retardant panel.
3. Fire Rating: Listed 2 hour rating in accordance with Warnock Hersey International.
4. Safety Rating: Listed safety rating in accordance with Warnock Hersey International.
5. Nominal Thickness: As required for specified fire rating.
I. Setting Blocks: ASTM C 864, neoprene, 80 to 90 Shore A durometer hardness; length 4"
(100mm), width of glazing rabbet space less 1/16" (1.5mm), height required for glazing method,
pane weight, and pane area.
J. Spacer Shims: ASTM C 864, neoprene, 50 to 60 Shore A durometer hardness; length 3"
(75mm), one half height of glazing stop, thickness required for application, one face self-
adhesive.
K. Glazing Tape; Butyl compound tape with integral resilient tube spacer, 10 to 15 Shore A
durometer hardness, black color, coiled on release paper; width required for specified
installation.
L. Glazing Tape: Closed cell polyvinyl chloride foam, maximum water absorption by volume 2
percent, designed for 25 percent compression percent for air barrier and vapor retarder seal,
black color, coiled on release paper over adhesive on two sides; widths required for specified
installation.
M. Glazing Splines: ASTM C 864, resilient polyvinyl chloride, extruded shape to fit glazing channel
retaining slot; black color.
N. Glazing Gaskets: ASTM C 864, resilient polyvinyl chloride, extruded shape to fit glazing channel
retaining slot; black color.
O. Glazing Clips: Manufacturer's standard type.
P. Sealants: Specified in Section 07900.
Q. Silicone Polyester Enamel: Type recommended by flat glass materials manufacturer; color
selected by Architect.
R. Smoke removal Unit Targets: Adhesive targets for application to glass, identifying glass units
designed for removal for smoke control
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Acceptable Fabricators:
1. Pilkington North America Inc.
2. INTRACO

3. Guardian
4. Lacobel
5. Or approved equal.
B. Heat-Strengthened Glass:
1. Cut float glass material to indicated sizes and provide cut-outs and holes, if indicated,
before heat strengthening.
2. Heat strengthen float glass materials in accordance with ASTM C 1048, kind HS.
C. Tempered Glass:
2. Fully temper float glass materials in accordance with ASTM 1048, Kind FT.
D. Laminated Glass:
2. Heat strengthens float glass materials in accordance with ASTM C 1048, kind HS.
3. Laminate plastic interlayer between glass panes in accordance with ASTM 1172.
4. Laminated glass to conform to GANA (LCDG) and requirements of ANSI Z97.1.
E. Sealed Insulating Glass Units:

1. Fabricate units in accordance with ASTM E 2190 Standard Specification for Insulating
Glass Unit Performance and Evaluation with components and performance
characteristics specified in SCHEDULES Article of this section.
2. Insulating Glass Components:
a. Outer Pane:
1) Glass Type: As indicated on Drawing.
2) Glass Color: As indicated on Drawing.
3) Glass Thickness: As indicated on Drawing.
4) Heat Treating: Heat strengthened.
5) Heat Treating: Fully tempered.
6) Coating Surface: As indicated on Drawing.
b. Air Space: As indicated on Drawing, hermetically sealed, dehydrated air space.
c. Air Space: As indicated on Drawing, hermetically sealed, argon gas filled,
dehydrated air space.
d. Inner Pane:
1) Glass Type: As indicated on Drawing.
2) Glass Color: As indicated on Drawing.
3) Glass Thickness: As indicated on Drawing.
4) Heat Treating: Heat strengthened.
5) Heat Treating: Fully tempered.
6) Coating Surface: As indicated on Drawing.
e. Performance Characteristics:
1) Visible Light Transmittance: As indicated on Drawing.
2) Visible Light Reflectance: As indicated on Drawing.
3) Total Solar Energy Transmittance: As indicated on Drawing.
4) Total Solar Energy Reflectance: As indicated on Drawing.
5) UV Transmittance: As indicated on Drawing.
6) Summer U-Value: As indicated on Drawing.
7) Winter U-Value: As indicated on Drawing.
8) Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: As indicated on Drawing.
9) Shading Coefficient: As indicated on Drawing.

F. Monolithic Spandrel Glass Units:

2. Tempered float glass materials in accordance with ASTM C 1048, Kind FT.
3. Apply ceramic fused frit to indicated glass surface.
4. Apply silicone polyester enamel pacifier coating to indicate glass surface.
G. Sealed Insulating Spandrel Glass Units:

2. Tempered float glass materials in accordance with ASTM C 1048, Kind FT.
3. Fabricate units in accordance with specified requirements for sealed insulating glass
units.
4. Apply ceramic fused frit to indicated glass surface.
5. Apply silicone polyester enamel pacifier coating to indicate glass surface.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that openings for glazing are correct size and within tolerance.
B. Verify that glazing channels and recess are clean and free of obstruction, that weeps are clear,
and that channels and recesses are ready for glazing.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing.
Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates.
B. Clean contact surfaces to receive sealant with solvent; wipe dry.
C. Seal porous glazing channels and recesses with primer or sealer compatible with substrate.
D. Prime surfaces to receive sealant in accordance with sealant manufacturer's instructions.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install coated monolithic glass with coated surface to exterior (Surface 1).
C. Install coated monolithic glass with coated surface to interior (Surface 2).
D. Install sealants in accordance with Section 07900.
E. Install sealants in accordance with ASTM C 804 for solvent release sealants.
MHA – TECH. SPECIFICATION – 1706 – 04//02/2015 SECTION 08810 – GLASS 10 /

14
F. Install sealants in accordance with sealant manufacturer's instructions.
G. Exterior Dry Method (Tape and Gasket Spline):

1. Apply glazing tape or spline to glass; butt-joint tape edges; seal joints with butyl sealant.
2. Place setting blocks with edge blocks maximum 6" from glass edges and intermediate
blocks at 1/4 points of glass panel length.
3. Set glass unit on setting blocks; apply pressure against fixed stop for full contact.
4. Install removable stops without displacing glazing tape or spline; apply pressure for full
continuous contact.
5. Trim sight-exposed tape flush with stop.
H. Exterior Wet/dry Method (formed tape and Sealant):

1. Apply glazing tape to glass; butt-joint tape edges; seal joints with butyl sealant.
2. Apply glazing tape to permanent stops, 1/4" below sight line; butt-joint tape edges; seal
joints with butyl sealant.
3. Apply heel bead of butyl sealant along intersection of permanent stop with frame; ensure
full perimeter seal between glass and frame for continuity of air and vapor seal.
6. Install removable stops without displacing glazing tape; insert spacer strips between
glazing and applied stops; terminate spacer strips 1/4" below sight line; apply pressure
for full continuous contact.
7. Fill gap glazing and stop with sealant to depth equal to bite of frame on glazing and to
3/8' below sight line.
8. Apply cap bead of sealant along void between stop and glazing to uniform line flush sight
line; tool sealant surface smooth.
I. Exterior Wet Method (Sealant and Sealant);

1. Place sealant at 1/4 points; install glazing unit.
2. Install removable stops; center glass unit in space by inserting spacer shims both sides at
interval of 24"; set spacer shims 1/4" below sight line.
3/8' below sight line.
4. Apply sealant to uniform line flush with sight line. Tool sealant surface smooth.
J. Exterior butt Glazed Method (Sealant Only):

1. Brace glass in position for duration of glazing process; mask edges of glass at adjoining
glass edges and between glass edges and framing members.
2. Secure small diameter non-adhering foamed rod on back side of joint.
3. Apply sealant to open side of joint in continuous operation; completely fill joint without
displacing foam rod; tool sealant surface smooth to concave profile.
4. Allow sealant to cure, then remove foam backer rod.
5. Apply sealant to opposite side; tool sealant to concave profile.
6. Remove masking tape.
K. Interior Dry Method (Tape and Tape):

1. Apply glazing tape to permanent stops, allowing tape edge to project 1/16" above stop;
butt-joint tape edges; seal joints with butyl sealant.
4. Apply glazing tape on free perimeter of glazing as described above.

14
L. Interior Wet/dry Method (Tape and Sealant):

1. Apply glazing tape to glass; butt-joint tape edges; seal joints with butyl sealant.
4. Install removable stops without displacing glazing tape; insert spacer strips between
glazing and applied stops; terminate spacer strips 1/4" below sight line; apply pressure
for full continuous contact.
uniform line flush with sight line; tool sealant surface smooth.
M. Interior Wet Method (Compound and Compound):

1. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points; install glazing unit.
2. Install applied stops; center glass unit in space by inserting spacer shims both sides at
intervals of 24"; set spacer shims 1/4" below sight line.
3. Locate and secure glazing pane using glazers' clip.
4. Fill gaps between glazing and stops with glazing compound to flush with sight line; tool
surface to straight line.
N. Installation of glazing in wood borrowed-lite partitions is specified in Section 06200.
O. Installation of glazing in steel doors and borrowed-lite partitions is specified in Section 08110.
P. Installation of glazing in flush wood doors is specified in section 08211.
Q. Installation of glazing in aluminum entrances and storefronts is specified in Section 08410.
R. Installation of glazing in metal-framed skylights is specified in Section 08630.
S. Installation of glazing in aluminum curtain wall system is specified in Section 08910.
T. Installation of glazing in sloped glazing assembly is specified in section 08910.
U. Installation of glazing in structural glass curtain walls is specified in Section 08970.
V. Installation of glazing in demountable gypsum board partitions is specified in Section 10616.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed
streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove
nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces.
B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction
operations, including weld splatter. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do
come into contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended by glass
manufacturer.

14
C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at
frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum,
alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.
3.5 SCHEDULES
A. Exterior Windows: CH – Clear heat strengthened glass.
B. Exterior Entrances: CT – Clear tempered glass.
C. Interior Vision Panels: CF – Clear Float glass.
D. Interior Non-Fire Rated Metal Doors: CT – Clear tempered glass.
E. Interior Fire rated Metal Doors and Windows: CW – Clear wire glass.
F. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond
of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.
G. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass.
3.6 LOCK-STRIP GASKET GLAZING
A. Comply with ASTM C 716 and gasket manufacturer's written instructions. Provide
supplementary wet seal and weep system, unless otherwise indicated.
A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed
streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove
nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces.
B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction
operations, including weld splatter. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do
come into contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended by glass
manufacturer.
C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at
frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum,
alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.
D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged from
natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period.

14
E. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before
date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as
recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 08810

14
SUBJECT: SECTION 08911- GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS
SECTION 08911
GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes conventionally glazed aluminum curtain walls installed unit-and-mullion assemblies.
1.3 ALLOWANCES
A. Provide pre-construction or field quality-control testing as part of testing and inspecting allowance.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General Performance: Comply with performance requirements specified, as determined by

preconstruction testing of manufacturer's standard glazed aluminum curtain walls representing those
indicated for this Project without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation or other
defects in construction.
1. Glazed aluminum curtain walls shall withstand movements of supporting structure indicated on
Drawings including, but not limited to, story drift, twist, column shortening, long-term creep, and
deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads.
2. Failure also includes the following:
a. Thermal stresses transferring to building structure.
b. Glass breakage.
c. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements.
d. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components.
e. Failure of operating units.
B. Delegated Design: Design glazed aluminum curtain walls, including comprehensive engineering
analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria
indicated.
C. Structural Loads:
1. Wind Loads: As per manufacturer standard to meet performance requirements.
a. Basic Wind Speed: As per manufacturer design wind speed to meet performance
requirements.
b. Exposure Category: A
2. Blast Loads: As per manufacturer blast loading analysis to meet performance requirements.
MHA – TECH. SPECIFICATION – 1706 – 04/02/2015 SECTION 08911 – GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS 1/8
D. Structural-Test Performance: Test according to ASTM E 330 as follows:
E. Deflection of Framing Members: At design wind pressure, as follows:
1. Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to edge of glass in a direction perpendicular to glass
plane not exceeding L/175 of the glass edge length for each individual glazinglite or an amount
that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing lites to 19 mm, whichever is less.
F. Seismic Performance: Glazed aluminum curtain walls shall withstand the effects of earthquake
motions determined according to SEI/ASCE 7.
G. Story Drift: Accommodate design displacement of adjacent stories indicated.

1. Test Performance: Meeting criteria for passing based on building occupancy type when tested
according to AAMA 501.4 at design displacement and 1.5 times the design displacement.
H. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: No evidence of water penetration through fixed glazing and
framing areas when tested according to ASTM E 331 at a minimum static-air-pressure differential of
20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than 300 Pa.
I. Water Penetration under Dynamic Pressure: No evidence of water penetration through fixed glazing
and framing areas when tested according to AAMA 501.1 at dynamic pressure equal to 20 percent of
positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than 300 Pa.
1. Maximum Water Leakage: No uncontrolled water penetrating assemblies or water appearing

on assemblies' normally exposed interior surfaces from sources other than condensation.
Water leakage does not include water controlled by flashing and gutters that is drained to
exterior.
J. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change
(range) in ambient and surface temperatures:
1. Temperature Change (Range): 67 deg C, ambient; 100 deg C, material surfaces.

2. Test Performance: No buckling; stress on glass; sealant failure; excess stress on framing,
anchors, and fasteners; or reduction of performance when tested according to AAMA 501.5.
K. Energy Performance: Glazed aluminum curtain walls shall have certified and labeled energy
performance ratings in accordance with NFRC.
1. Condensation Resistance: Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have an NFRC- certified
condensation resistance rating of no less than 25 as determined according to NFRC 500.
L. Sound Transmission: Provide glazed aluminum curtain walls with fixed glazing and framing areas
having the following sound-transmission characteristics:
1. Outdoor-Indoor Transmission Class: Minimum 33 when tested for laboratory sound

transmission loss according to ASTM E 90 and determined by ASTM E 1332.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions,
dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: For glazed aluminum curtain walls. Include plans, elevations, sections, full-size
details, and attachments to other work.
1. Include details of provisions for assembly expansion and contraction and for draining moisture
occurring within the assembly to the exterior.
2. Include full-size isometric details of each vertical-to-horizontal intersection of glazed aluminum
curtain walls, showing the following:
a. Joinery, including concealed welds.

b. Anchorage.
c. Expansion provisions.
d. Glazing.
e. Flashing and drainage.
3. Include laboratory mockup Shop Drawings, prepared by a qualified preconstruction testing

agency, showing details of laboratory mockup.
a. Re-submit Shop Drawings with changes made to glazed aluminum curtain walls to
successfully complete preconstruction testing.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.
D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, in manufacturer's standard sizes.
E. Fabrication Sample: Of each vertical-to-horizontal intersection of assemblies, made from 700-mm

lengths of full-size components and showing details of the following:
1. Joinery, including concealed welds.

2. Anchorage.
3. Expansion provisions.
4. Glazing.
5. Flashing and drainage.
F. Delegated-Design Submittal: For glazed aluminum curtain walls indicated to comply with performance
requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified
professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
G. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For glazed aluminum curtain walls, accessories, and
components, from manufacturer.
1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of
assembled components or on calculation.
H. Welding certificates.
I. Energy Performance Certificates: For glazed aluminum curtain walls, accessories, and components,
from manufacturer.
1. Basis for Certification: NFRC-certified energy performance values for each glazed aluminum
curtain wall.
J. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified

preconstruction testing agency, for glazed aluminum curtain walls, indicating compliance with
performance requirements.
K. Field quality-control reports.
L. Maintenance Data: For glazed aluminum curtain walls to include in maintenance manuals.
M. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.
A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for
installation of units required for this Project.
B. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for

aesthetic effects and performance characteristics of assemblies. Aesthetic effects are indicated by
dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to
sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction.
1. Do not revise intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's
approval. If revisions are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for
review.
C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

2. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum."
D. Energy Performance Standards: Comply with NFRC for minimum standards of energy performance,
materials, components, accessories, and fabrication. Comply with more stringent requirements if
indicated.
1. Provide NFRC-certified glazed aluminum curtain walls with an attached label.

2
E. Mockups: Build mockups to a minimum of Ten (10) square meters (m ) to verify selections made
under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication
and installation.
1. Build mockup of typical wall area as shown on Drawings and as directed by Architect.
2. Field testing shall be performed on mockups according to requirements in "Field Quality
Control" Article.
3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents
contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.
4. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of
Substantial Completion.
F. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of structural supports for glazed aluminum curtain walls
by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Special Assembly Warranty: Standard form in which manufacturer and Installer agrees to repair or
replace components of glazed aluminum curtain walls that do not comply with requirements or that fail
in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection.

b. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements.
c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishesand other materials beyond normal weathering.
d. Water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas.
e. Failure of operating components.
2. Warranty Period: Ten(10) years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special Finish Warranty: Standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finishes or replace
aluminum that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty
period.
1. Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:
a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244.
b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214.
c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.
2. Warranty Period: Five (5) years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products

that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. GUARDIAN for Glass

2. INTRACO for Glass
3. Alumatec
4. Nafco
5. Or approved equal
B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide or comparable product by

one of the following:
1. Alumatec
2. Alumaco
3. Nafco
4. Or approved equal
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated.
1. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209M.

2. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221M.
3. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429.
4. Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/B 308M.
5. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: AWS A5.10/A5.10M.
2.3 FRAMING
A. Framing Members: Manufacturer's standard extruded- or formed-aluminum framing members of

thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads.
1. Construction: As per manufacturer standard performance requirements.

2. Glazing System: Retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides or as required and directed
by Architect.
3. Glazing Plane: As indicated on the drawings
B. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with non-staining,

nonferrous shims for aligning system components.
C. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, non-staining, non-bleeding

fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials.
D. Anchors: Three-way adjustable anchors with minimum adjustment of 1 inch (25.4 mm) that
accommodate fabrication and installation tolerances in material and finish compatible with adjoining
materials and recommended by manufacturer.
1. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot-dip galvanized cast-iron, malleable-iron, or steel inserts
complying with ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M requirements.
E. Concealed Flashing: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, non-staining, non-bleeding flashing

compatible with adjacent materials.
F. Framing Sealants: Manufacturer's standard sealants.
2.4 GLAZING (from INTRACO or GUARDIAN)
A. Glazing: Comply with Division 8 Section "Glazing."
B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard sealed-corner pressure-glazing system of black, resilient

elastomeric glazing gaskets, setting blocks, and shims or spacers.
C. Glazing Sealants: As recommended by manufacturer.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing.
B. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration of finish.
Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by de-scaling or grinding.
C. Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics:
1. Profiles that is sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations.

2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered.
3. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members.
4. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to maintain
required glazing edge clearances.
5. Provisions for safety railings mounted on interior face of mullions or between mullions at interior.
6. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest extent
possible.
D. Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics:
1. Internal guttering system or other means to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring
within framing members, and moisture migrating within glazed aluminum curtain wall to exterior.
2. Pressure-equalized system or double barrier design with primary air and vapor barrier at interior
side of glazed aluminum curtain wall and secondary seal wept and vented to exterior.
E. Curtain-Wall Framing: Fabricate components for assembly as indicated on the drawings and shall
comply with the manufacturer performance requirements.
2.6 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. All curtain wall aluminum to be powder coated using Durasol, hyper durable based on flouropolymer
PVF3 copolymer technology. The raw materials used in the manufacturing of the powder coating
should provide uniform flow and finish, excellent weathering and corrosion resistance and to be able
to meet AAMA 2605 standard.
B. Color: As selected by the architect from full range from full range of industry color.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and
other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

2. Do not install damaged components.
3. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion.
4. Rigidly secure non movement joints.
5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic
deterioration and to prevent impeding movement of moving joints.
6. Weld components in concealed locations to minimize distortion or discoloration of finish.
Protect glazing surfaces from welding.
7. Seal joints watertight unless otherwise indicated.
B. Metal Protection:
1. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting
contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape or installing nonconductive spacers
as recommended by manufacturer for this purpose.
2. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact
surfaces with bituminous paint.
C. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing members, and
moisture migrating within glazed aluminum curtain wall to exterior.
D. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades.
E. Install operable units level and plumb, securely anchored, and without distortion. Adjust weather-
stripping contact and hardware movement to produce proper operation.
F. Install glazing as specified in Division 8 Section "Glazing."
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Services: Testing and inspecting of representative areas of glazed aluminum curtain walls
shall take place as installation proceeds to determine compliance of installed assemblies with
specified requirements.
1. Air Infiltration: Areas shall be tested for air leakage of 1.5 times the rate specified for laboratory
testing in "Performance Requirements" Article, but not more than 0.50 cfm/sq. ft. (2.25 L/s per
sq. m), of fixed wall area when tested according to ASTM E 783 at a minimum static-air-
pressure differential of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft. (75 Pa).
a. Test Area: One bay wide, but not less than 30 feet (9.1 m), by one story of glazed
aluminum curtain wall.
b. Perform a minimum of three tests in areas as directed by Architect.
c. Perform tests in each test area as directed by Architect. Perform at least three tests,
prior to 10 percent completion.
2. Water Spray Test: Before installation of interior finishes has begun, areas designated by
Architect shall be tested according to AAMA 501.2 and shall not evidence water penetration.
a. Test Area: A minimum area of 75 feet (23 m) by one story of glazed aluminum curtain
wall.
B. Glazed aluminum curtain walls will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
C. Prepare test and inspection reports.
SUBJECT: SECTION 09220- PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER
SECTION 09220
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Nonstructural steel framing and furring.

1. Division 7 Section "Building Insulation" for thermal insulations and vapor retarders included in
portland cement plaster assemblies.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Show locations and installation of control and expansion joints including plans,
elevations, sections, details of components, and attachments to other work.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of factory-prepared finish coat indicated.
D. Samples for Verification: For each type of factory-prepared finish coat indicated; (305 by 305 mm),
and prepared on rigid backing.
A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For Portland cement plaster assemblies with fire-resistance

ratings, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to
ASTM E 119 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
B. Mockups: Before plastering, install mockups of at least (9 sq. m) in surface area to demonstrate
aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1. Install mockups for each type of finish indicated.

2. For interior plasterwork, simulate finished lighting conditions for review of mockups.
MHA – TECH. SPECIFICATION – 1706 – 04/02/2015 SECTION 09220 – PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 1 / 10
3. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial
Completion.
C. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in

Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination."
A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather,
direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes.
A. Comply with ASTM C 926 requirements.
B. Interior Plasterwork: Maintain room temperatures at greater than (4.4 deg C) for at least 48 hours
before plaster application, and continuously during and after application.
1. Avoid conditions that result in plaster drying out during curing period. Distribute heat evenly;
prevent concentrated or uneven heat on plaster.
2. Ventilate building spaces as required to remove water in excess of that required for hydrating
plaster in a manner that prevents drafts of air from contacting surfaces during plaster application
and until plaster is dry.
C. Exterior Plasterwork:
1. Apply and cure plaster to prevent plaster drying out during curing period. Use procedures
required by climatic conditions, including moist curing, providing coverings, and providing
barriers to deflect sunlight and wind.
2. Apply plaster when ambient temperature is greater than (4.4 deg C).
3. Protect plaster coats from freezing for not less than 48 hours after set of plaster coat has
occurred.
D. Factory-Prepared Finishes: Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for environmental

conditions for applying finishes.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product
selection:

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified.
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified.
3. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers
specified.

2.2 NONSTRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING MEMBERS, GENERAL
A. Manufacturers:
1. As per Architect’s approval.
B. Components, General: Comply with ASTM C 1063. For steel sheet components not included in
ASTM C 1063, comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Cold-Rolled Channels: Base metal thickness of (1.37 mm) with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60, hot-dip
galvanized zinc coating.
D. Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, not less than (1.21-mm) diameter,
unless otherwise indicated.
2.3 STEEL FRAMING FOR PARTITIONS
A. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645.
1. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60, hot-dip galvanized zinc coating.
2. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: (0.45 mm).
3. Depth: (63.5 mm).
B. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated.
1. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60, hot-dip galvanized zinc coating.
2. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: (0.45 mm).
C. Channel Bridging: Cold-rolled channels, in depth indicated.
1. Clip Angle: (38.1 by 38.1 mm), (1.73-mm-) thick, galvanized steel.
D. Vertical Furring:
1. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645.
a. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60, hot-dip galvanized zinc coating..
b. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: (0.45 mm).
c. Depth: (38.1 mm).
2. Furring Channels: Cold-rolled channels, (19.1 mm).
a. Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated-edge type fabricated from steel sheet with
minimum bare steel thickness of (0.79 mm).
2.4 METAL LATH
A. Expanded-Metal Lath: ASTM C 847 with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60, hot-dip galvanized zinc coating.
1. Manufacturers:
a. As per Architect approval.
2. Diamond-Mesh Lath: Flat.
a. Weight: (1.4 kg/sq. m).
3. Flat Rib Lath: Rib depth of not more than (3.1 mm).
4. (9.5-mm) Rib Lath:
B. Wire-Fabric Lath:
1. Manufacturers:
2. Welded-Wire Lath: ASTM C 933; self-furring.
3. Woven-Wire Lath: ASTM C 1032; self-furring, with stiffener wire backing.
C. Paper Backing: FS UU-B-790, Type I Grade B, Style 1a vapor-retardant paper.
2.5 ACCESSORIES
A. General: Comply with ASTM C 1063 and coordinate depth of trim and accessories with thicknesses
and number of plaster coats required.
B. Zinc and Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Accessories:
1. Manufacturers:
a. As per Architect’s approval.
2. Foundation Weep Screed: Fabricated from hot-dip galvanized steel sheet,

ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 zinc coating.
3. Cornerite: Fabricated from metal lath with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60, hot-dip galvanized zinc
coating.
4. External-Corner Reinforcement: Fabricated from metal lath with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60, hot-
dip galvanized zinc coating.
5. Corner beads: Fabricated from zinc-coated (galvanized) steel.
a. Small nose corner bead with expanded flanges; use unless otherwise indicated.
b. Small nose corner bead with perforated flanges; use on curved corners.
c. Small nose corner bead with expanded flanges reinforced by perforated stiffening rib; use
on columns and for finishing masonry corners.
d. Bull nose corner bead, radius (19.1 mm) minimum, with expanded flanges; use at
locations indicated on Drawings.
6. Casing Beads: Fabricated from zinc-coated (galvanized) steel; square-edged style; with
expanded flanges.
7. Control Joints: Fabricated from zinc-coated (galvanized) steel; one-piece-type, folded pair of
unperforated screeds in M-shaped configuration; with perforated flanges and removable
protective tape on plaster face of control joint.
8. Expansion Joints: Fabricated from zinc-coated (galvanized) steel; folded pair of unperforated
screeds in M-shaped configuration; with expanded flanges.
9. Two-Piece Expansion Joints: Fabricated from zinc-coated (galvanized) steel; formed to
produce slip-joint and square-edged reveal that is adjustable from (6.34-to-16-mm) wide; with
perforated flanges.
C. Plastic Trim: Fabricated from high-impact PVC.
1. Manufacturers:
2. Corner beads: With perforated flanges.
a. Small nose corner bead; use unless otherwise indicated.

b. Small nose corner bead recommended by manufacturer for use where durable corner is
required; use on columns and for finishing unit masonry corners.
c. Bull nose corner bead, radius (19.1 mm) minimum; use at locations indicated on
Drawings.
3. Casing Beads: With perforated flanges in depth required to suit plaster bases indicated and
flange length required to suit applications indicated.
a. Square-edge style; use unless otherwise indicated.

b. Bull-nose style, radius (19.1 mm) minimum; use at locations indicated on Drawings.
4. Control Joints: One-piece-type, folded pair of unperforated screeds in M-shaped configuration;

with perforated flanges and removable protective tape on plaster face of control joint.
5. Expansion Joints: Two-piece type, formed to produce slip-joint and square-edged (13-mm-)
wide reveal; with perforated concealed flanges.
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Water for Mixing: Potable and free of substances capable of affecting plaster set or of damaging
plaster, lath, or accessories.
B. Fiber for Base Coat: Alkaline-resistant glass or polypropylene fibers, (13 mm) long, free of
contaminants, manufactured for use in Portland cement plaster.
C. Bonding Compound: ASTM C 932.
D. Steel Drill Screws: For metal-to-metal fastening, ASTM C 1002 or ASTM C 954, as required by
thickness of metal being fastened; with pan head that is suitable for application; in lengths required to
achieve penetration through joined materials of not fewer than three exposed threads.
E. Fasteners for Attaching Metal Lath to Substrates: Complying with ASTM C 1063.
F. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing), produced by
combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool.
1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of assembly.
G. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls:
1. Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt), unperforated.
2. Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener penetration
without foam displacement, (3.1 mm) thick, in width to suit steel stud size.
H. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Non sag, paintable, non staining, latex sealant
complying with ASTM C 834 that effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter
joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies
according to ASTM E 90.
1. Products:
a. As per Architect approval
I. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: Nondrying, non hardening, non skinning, non staining,
gunnable, synthetic-rubber sealant recommended for sealing interior concealed joints to reduce
airborne sound transmission.
1. Products:
2.7 PLASTER MATERIALS
A. Portland cement: ASTM C 150, Type II.
1. Color for Finish Coats: As per Architect approval.
B. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91, Type N.
1. Color for Finish Coats: As per Architect approval.
C. Colorants for Job-Mixed Finish-Coats: Colorfast mineral pigments that produce finish plaster color to
match Architect's sample.
D. Lime: ASTM C 206, Type S; or ASTM C 207, Type S.
E. Sand Aggregate: ASTM C 897.
1. Color for Job-Mixed Finish Coats: In color matching Architect's sample.
2.8 PLASTER MIXES
A. General: Comply with ASTM C 926 for applications indicated.
1. Fiber Content: Add fiber to base-coat mixes after ingredients have mixed at least two minutes.
Comply with fiber manufacturer's written instructions for fiber quantities in mixes, but do not
exceed (16 kg of fiber/cu. m) of cementitious materials. Reduce aggregate quantities
accordingly to maintain workability.
B. Base-Coat Mixes for Use over Metal Lath: Scratch and brown coats for three-coat plasterwork as
follows:
1. Portland Cement Mixes:
a. Scratch Coat: For cementitious material, mix 1 part Portland cement and 3/4 to 1-1/2
parts lime. Use 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material (sum of
separate volumes of each component material).
b. Brown Coat: For cementitious material, mix 1 part Portland cement and 3/4 to 1-1/2 parts
lime. Use 3 to 5 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material (sum of separate
volumes of each component material).
2. Masonry Cement Mixes:
a. Scratch Coat: 1 part masonry cement and 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate.

b. Brown Coat: 1 part masonry cement and 3 to 5 parts aggregate.
3. Portland and Masonry Cement Mixes:
a. Scratch Coat: For cementitious material, mix 1 part Portland cement and 1 part masonry
cement. Use 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material (sum of
separate volumes of each component material).
b. Brown Coat: For cementitious material, mix 1 part Portland cement and 1 part masonry
cement. Use 3 to 5 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material (sum of separate
C. Base-Coat Mixes for Use over Concrete Unit Masonry: Single base coats for two-coat plasterwork as
follows:
1. Portland cement Mix: For cementitious material, mix 1 part Portland cement and 3/4 to 1-1/2
parts lime. Use 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material (sum of separate
2. Masonry Cement Mix: Use 1 part masonry cement and 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate.
3. Plastic Cement Mix: Use 1 part plastic cement and 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate.
D. Job-Mixed Finish-Coat Mixes:
1. Portland Cement Mix: For cementitious materials, mix 1 part Portland cement and 3/4 to 1-1/2
parts lime. Use 1-1/2 to 3 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material (sum of separate
2. Masonry Cement Mix: 1 part masonry cement and 1-1/2 to 3 parts aggregate.
3. Portland and Masonry Cement Mix: For cementitious materials, mix 1 part Portland cement and
1 part masonry cement. Use 1-1/2 to 3 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material (sum
of separate volumes of each component material).
4. Plastic Cement Mix: 1 part plastic cement and 1-1/2 to 3 parts aggregate.
E. Factory-Prepared Finish-Coat Mixes: For ready-mixed finish-coat plasters, comply with

manufacturer's written instructions.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames, cast-
in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting
performance.
1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Protect adjacent work from soiling, spattering, moisture deterioration, and other harmful effects caused
by plastering.
B. Prepare solid-plaster bases that are smooth or that do not have the suction capability required to bond
with plaster according to ASTM C 926.
C. Coordination with Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials:
1. Before sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, attach offset anchor plates or ceiling runners
(tracks) to surfaces indicated to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials. Where offset anchor
plates are required, provide continuous plates fastened to building structure not more than (610
mm) o.c.
2. After sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, remove them only to extent necessary for
installation of plaster assemblies and without reducing the fire-resistive material thickness to less
than that required to obtain fire-resistance rating indicated. Protect remaining fire-resistive
materials from damage.
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Install components according to requirements for design

designations from listing organization and publication indicated on Drawings.
B. Sound Attenuation Blankets: Where required, install blankets before installing lath unless blankets are
readily installed after lath has been installed on one side.
C. Acoustical Sealant: Where required, seal joints between edges of plasterwork and abutting
construction with acoustical sealant.
3.4 INSTALLING NONSTRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL
A. General: Comply with requirements in ASTM C 1063 for applications indicated.
1. Comply with ASTM C 754 for installation of items not addressed in ASTM C 1063.
B. Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing at terminations in plaster assemblies to support
fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar
construction.
C. Isolate steel framing from building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural
movement.
1. Isolate ceiling assemblies where they abut or are penetrated by building structure.
2. Isolate partition framing and wall furring where it abuts structure, except at floor. At head of
assemblies, install slip-type joints that avoid axial loading and that support assembly laterally.
D. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with steel framing or furring members. Frame both
sides of joints independently.
E. Soffits: Unless otherwise detailed on Drawings, install furred or suspended soffits to comply with
requirements for ceiling installation; install framed soffits to comply with requirements for partition
installation.
3.5 INSTALLING STEEL PARTITION FRAMING
A. Install runners (tracks) at floors, ceilings, and structural walls and columns where plaster assemblies
abut other construction.
B. Installation Tolerance: Install each steel framing member so fastening surfaces vary in plane not more
than (6.4 mm in 3 m).
C. Extend partition framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings,
except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing over
frames for doors and openings and frame around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling.
D. Install steel studs so flanges point in the same direction.
E. Frame door openings with two studs installed at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of floor or roof structure
above.
F. Support Spacing:
1. Install steel studs at (406 mm) o.c., unless otherwise indicated.

2. Install vertical furring at (406 mm) o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
3.6 INSTALLING METAL LATH
A. Expanded-Metal Lath: Install according to ASTM C 1063.
1. Partition Framing and Vertical Furring: Install flat diamond-mesh lath.
3.7 INSTALLING ACCESSORIES
A. Install according to ASTM C 1063 and at locations indicated on Drawings.
B. Reinforcement for External Corners:
1. Install lath-type external-corner reinforcement at exterior locations.

2. Install cornerbead at interior locations.
3. Control Joints: Install control joints at locations indicated on Drawings.
3.8 PLASTER APPLICATION
A. General: Comply with ASTM C 926.
1. Do not deviate more than plus or minus (6.4 mm in 3 m) from a true plane in finished plaster
surfaces, as measured by a (3-m) straightedge placed on surface.
2. Grout hollow-metal frames, bases, and similar work occurring in plastered areas, with base-coat
plaster material, before lathing where necessary. Except where full grouting is indicated or
required for fire-resistance rating, grout at least (152 mm) at each jamb anchor.
3. Finish plaster flush with metal frames and other built-in metal items or accessories that act as a
plaster ground, unless otherwise indicated. Where casing bead does not terminate plaster at
metal frame, cut base coat free from metal frame before plaster sets and groove finish coat at
junctures with metal.
4. Provide plaster surfaces that are ready to receive field-applied finishes indicated.
B. Bonding Compound: Apply on unit masonry plaster bases.
C. Plaster Finish Coats: Apply to provide finish to match Architect's sample.
D. Concealed Interior Plasterwork:
1. Where plaster application will be concealed behind built-in cabinets, similar furnishings, and
equipment, apply finish coat.
2. Where plaster application will be concealed above suspended ceilings and in similar locations,
finish coat may be omitted.
3. Where plaster application will be used as a base for adhesive application of tile and similar
finishes, finish coat may be omitted.
3.9 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Cut, patch, replace, and repair plaster as necessary to accommodate other work and to restore cracks,
dents, and imperfections. Repair or replace work to eliminate blisters, buckles, crazing and check
cracking, dry outs, efflorescence, sweat outs, and similar defects and where bond to substrate has
failed.
A. Remove temporary protection and enclosure of other work. Promptly remove plaster from doorframes,
windows, and other surfaces not indicated to be plastered. Repair floors, walls, and other surfaces
stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during plastering.
SUBJECT: SECTION 09250- GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
SECTION 09250
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Gypsum board for ceiling
1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood framing and furring that supports gypsum board.
2. Division 7 Section "Building Insulation" for insulation and vapor retarders installed in assemblies
that incorporate gypsum board.
3. Division 9 Section "Non-Load-Bearing Steel Framing" for non-structural framing and
suspension systems that support gypsum board.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
B. Samples: For the following products:
1. Trim Accessories: Full-size Sample in (300-mm-) long length for each trim accessory indicated.
2. Textured Finishes: Manufacturer's standard size for each textured finish indicated and on
same backing indicated for Work.
A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and

construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an
independent testing agency.
B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to
those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413
by an independent testing agency.
MHA – TECH. SPECIFICATION – 1706 – 04/02/2015 SECTION 09250 – GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 1/8
C. Mockups: Before beginning gypsum board installation, install mockups of at least (9 sq. m) in surface
area to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1. Install mockups for the following:
a. Each level of gypsum board finish indicated for use in exposed locations.
b. Each texture finish indicated.
2. Apply or install final decoration indicated, including painting and wall coverings, on exposed
surfaces for review of mockups.
3. Simulate finished lighting conditions for review of mockups.
1.5 STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather,
condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other causes. Stack panels flat to prevent
sagging.
A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's
written recommendations, whichever are more stringent.
B. Do not install interior products until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned.
C. Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold
damaged.
1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,
discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy
surface contamination and discoloration.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. NATIONAL GYPSUM CO.

b. KNAUF
c. SAINT GOBAIN
d. AL WATANIA GYPSUM
e. Or approved equal
2.2 PANELS, GENERAL
A. Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that
correspond with support system indicated.
2.3 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
A. General: Complying with ASTM C 36/C 36M or ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, as applicable to type of
gypsum board indicated and whichever is more stringent.

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
following:
a. As per Architects approval.
B. Regular Type:
1. Thickness: (12.7 mm).

2. Long Edges: Tapered
C. Type X:

2. Long Edges: Tapered.
D. Ceiling Type: Manufactured to have more sag resistance than regular-type gypsum board.

E. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Type: With moisture- and mold-resistant core and surfaces.
1. Core: (15.9 mm), Type X

2.4 TILE BACKING PANELS
A. Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: ASTM C 630/C 630M or ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.

following:
3. Core: As indicated on Drawings.
2.5 TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.
1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, plastic, or paper-faced

galvanized steel sheet.
2. Shapes:
a. Corner bead.
b. Bull nose bead.
c. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.
d. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.
e. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound.
f. Expansion (control) joint.
g. Curved-Edge Corner bead: With notched or flexible flanges.
B. Exterior Trim: ASTM C 1047.
1. Material: Hot-dip galvanized steel sheet

2. Shapes:
a. Corner bead.
b. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.
c. Expansion (Control) Joint: One-piece, rolled zinc with V-shaped slot and removable strip
covering slot opening.
C. Aluminum Trim: Extruded accessories of profiles and dimensions indicated.

following:
3. Aluminum: Alloy and temper with not less than the strength and durability properties of
(ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063-T5.
4. Finish: Corrosion-resistant primer compatible with joint compound and finish materials
specified.
2.6 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS
A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.
B. Joint Tape:
1. Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper.

2. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer.
C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with
other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.
1. Pre filling: At open joints and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound.
2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim
flanges, use setting-type taping compound.
a. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories.
3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound.
4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound.
2.7 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and
manufacturer's written recommendations.
B. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum
panels to continuous substrate.
1. Use adhesives that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to
40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from (0.84 to
2.84 mm) thick.
2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by panel
manufacturer.
D. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing) produced by
combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool.
1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of assembly.
E. Acoustical Sealant: As specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
F. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation."
G. Vapor Retarder: As specified in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames and
framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance.
B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold
damaged.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL
A. Comply with ASTM C 840.
B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid
abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not
less than one framing member.
C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not
more than (1.5 mm) of open space between panels. Do not force into place.
D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports
or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut
edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than
control joints at corners of framed openings.
E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels.
F. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.),
except in chases braced internally.
1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings,
coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than (0.7 sq. m) in area.
2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits.
3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs and
decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow (6.4- to 9.5-mm-)
wide joints to install sealant.
G. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments,

except floors. Provide (6.4- to 12.7-mm-) wide spaces at these locations, and trim edges with edge
trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces
with acoustical sealant.
H. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open
(unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.
I. Wood Framing: Install gypsum panels over wood framing, with floating internal corner construction.
Do not attach gypsum panels across the flat grain of wide-dimension lumber, including floor joists and
headers. Float gypsum panels over these members, or provide control joints to counteract wood
shrinkage.
J. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and
penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of
partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's
written recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or
through assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings.
3.3 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations:
1. Regular Type: As indicated on Drawings.

2. Ceiling Type: As indicated on Drawings.
3. Ceiling Type Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Type: As indicated on Drawings but generally wet
areas.
B. Single-Layer Application:
1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest extent
possible and at right angles to framing, unless otherwise indicated.
2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing), unless otherwise

indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints.
a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of
panels.
b. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally, unless otherwise indicated
or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly.
3. On Z-furring members, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) with no end joints.
Locate edge joints over furring members.
4. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.
C. Laminating to Substrate: Where gypsum panels are indicated as directly adhered to a substrate
(other than studs, joists, furring members, or base layer of gypsum board), comply with gypsum board
manufacturer's written recommendations and temporarily brace or fasten gypsum panels until
fastening adhesive has set.
3.4 APPLYING TILE BACKING PANELS
A. Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: Install at showers, tubs, and where indicated. Install with
(6.4-mm) gap where panels abut other construction or penetrations.
B. Areas Not Subject to Wetting: Install regular-type gypsum wallboard panels to produce a flat surface
except at showers, tubs, and other locations indicated to receive water-resistant panels.
C. Where tile backing panels abut other types of panels in same plane, shim surfaces to produce a
uniform plane across panel surfaces.
3.5 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners
used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Control Joints: Install control joints at locations indicated on Drawings.
C. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations:
1. Corner bead: Use at outside corners, unless otherwise indicated.

2. L-Bead: Use where indicated..
3. U-Bead: Use where indicated.
4. Curved-Edge Corner bead: Use at curved openings.
D. Aluminum Trim: Install in locations indicated on Drawings.
3.6 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD
A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener
heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration.
Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.
B. Pre fill open joints and damaged surface areas.
C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended for tape.
3.7 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and
other causes during remainder of the construction period.
B. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.
1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,
discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy
surface contamination and discoloration.
SUBJECT: SECTION 09300- TILES
SECTION 09300
TILES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Tile and Accessories:

1. Glazed Porcelain.
2. Wall and Counter Glazed.
3. Mosaics Floor and Wall.
4. Trim and Accessories.
5. Setting Materials.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 03505 - Self-Leveling Underlayment.
B. Section 07920 - Joint Sealant.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):

1. ANSI A108.1A - Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile in the Wet-Set Method with
Portland Cement Mortar.
2. ANSI A108.1B - Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile on a Cured Portland Cement
Mortar Setting Bed with Dry-Set or Latex Portland Cement Mortar.
3. ANSI A108.1C - Specifications for Contractors Option: Installation of Ceramic Tile in the
Wet-Set Method with Portland Cement Mortar -or- Installation of Ceramic Tile on a Cured
Portland Cement Mortar Setting Bed with Dry-Set or Latex Portland Cement Mortar.
4. ANSI A108.4 - Specifications for Ceramic Tile Installed with Organic Adhesives or
Water-Cleanable Tile Setting Epoxy Adhesive.
5. ANSI A108.5 - Specifications for Ceramic Tile Installed with Dry-Set Portland Cement
Mortar or Latex-Portland Cement Mortar.
6. ANSI A108.6 - Specifications for Ceramic Tile Installed with Chemical-Resistant,
Water-Cleanable Tile-Setting and -Grouting Epoxy.
7. ANSI A108.8 - Specifications for Ceramic Tile Installed with Chemical-Resistant Furan
Mortar and Grout.
8. ANSI A108.9 - Specifications for Ceramic Tile Installed with Modified Epoxy Emulsion
Mortar/Grout.
9. ANSI A108.10 - Specifications for Installation of Grout in Tilework.
10. ANSI A118.1 - Standard Specification for Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar.
11. ANSI A118.3 - Chemical-Resistant, Water-Cleanable, Tile-Setting and -Grouting Epoxy
and Water-Cleanable Tile-Setting Epoxy Adhesive.
12. ANSI A118.4 - Latex-Portland Cement Mortar.
13. ANSI A118.5 - Chemical-Resistant Furan Mortar and Grout.
14. ANSI A118.6 - Standard Ceramic Tile Grouts.
15. ANSI A118.7 - Polymer Modified Cement Grouts
16. ANSI A118.8 - Modified Epoxy Emulsion Mortar/Grout.
17. ANSI A118.9 - Test Methods and Specifications for Cementitious Backer Units
18. ANSI A118.10 - Load bearing, Bonded, Waterproof Membranes for Thinset Ceramic Tile
MHA-TECH. SPECIFICATIONS- 1706- 04/02/2015 SECTION 09300 - TILES 1/

10
and Dimensional Stone.

19. ANSI A118.11 - Exterior Grade Plywood (EGP) Latex-Portland Cement Mortar.
20. ANSI A136.1 - Organic Adhesives for Installation of Ceramic Tile.
21. ANSI A137.1 - Specifications for Ceramic Tile.
B. ASTM International (ASTM):

1. ASTM C 50 - Standard Practice for Sampling, Sample Preparation, Packaging, and
Marking of Lime and Limestone Products.
2. ASTM C 144 - Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar.
3. ASTM C 207 - Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes.
4. ASTM C 241 - Standard Test Method For Abrasion Resistance of Stone Subjected to Foot
Traffic.
5. ASTM C 503 - Standard Specification for Marble Dimension Stone.
6. ASTM C 615 - Standard Specification for Granite Dimension Stone.
7. ASTM C 629 - Standard Specification for Slate Dimension Stone.
8. ASTM C 847 - Standard Specification for Metal Lath.
9. ASTM C 1028 - Standard Test method for Determining the Static Coefficient of Friction or
Ceramic Tile and Other like Surfaces by the Horizontal Dynamometer Pull meter Method.
10. ASTM D 4397 - Standard Specification for Polyethylene Sheeting for Construction,
Industrial, and Agricultural Applications.
C. Tile Council of North America (TCNA): TCA Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation, 2007.
A. Static Coefficient of Friction: Tile on walkway surfaces shall be provided with the following values
as determined by testing in conformance with ASTM C 1028.
1. Level Surfaces: Minimum of 0.6 (Wet).
2. Step Treads: Minimum of 0.6 (Wet).
3. Ramp Surfaces: Minimum of 0.8 (Wet).
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300.
B. [ Product Data ]: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate tile layout, patterns, color arrangement, perimeter conditions, and
junctions with dissimilar materials, control and expansion joints, thresholds, ceramic accessories,
and setting details.
D. Selection Samples: Color charts illustrating full range of colors and patterns.
E. Selection Samples: Samples of actual tiles for selection.
F. Samples: Mount tile and apply grout on two plywood panels, illustrating pattern, color variations,
and grout joint size variations.
G. Manufacturer's Certificate:
1. Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
2. For each shipment, type and composition of tile provide a Master Grade Certificate signed
by the manufacturer and the installer certifying that products meet or exceed the specified
requirements of ANSI A137.1.
H. Maintenance Data: Include recommended cleaning methods, cleaning materials, stain removal
methods, and polishes and waxes.

10
A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with
minimum two years experience.
B. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain each type and color of tile from a single source. Obtain
each type and color of mortar, adhesive and grout from the same source.
A. Deliver and store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.
B. Protect adhesives and liquid additives from freezing or overheating in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
C. Store tile and setting materials on elevated platforms, under cover and in a dry location and
protect from contamination, dampness, freezing or overheating.
1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Do not install adhesives in an unventilated environment.
B. Maintain ambient and substrate temperature of 50 degrees F (10 degrees C) during tiling and for
a minimum of 7 days after completion.
1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Provide for Owner's use a minimum of 2 percent of the primary sizes and colors of tile specified,
boxed and clearly labeled.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
a. SAUDI CERAMICS
b. DAL Tiles
c. LEA CERAMICS
d. Or approved equal
B. Substitutions:
C. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 01600.
2.2 TILE
A. General: Provide tile that complies with ANSI A137.1 for types, compositions and other
characteristics indicated. Provide tile in the locations and of the types colors and pattern
indicated on the Drawings and identified in the Schedule and the end of this Section. Tile shall
also be provided in accordance with the following:
1. Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within the ranges selected under
Submittal of samples, blend tile in the factory and package so tile taken from one package
shows the same range of colors as those taken from other packages.
2. Mounting: For factory mounted tile, provide back or edge mounted tile assemblies as
standard with the manufacturer, unless otherwise specified.

10
3. Factory Applied Temporary Protective Coatings: Where indicated under tile type, protect
exposed surfaces of tile against adherence of mortar and grout by pre-coating with a
continuous film of petroleum paraffin wax applied hot. Do not coat unexposed tile surfaces.
B. Glazed Porcelain Tile:
1. Product: Colour Scheme.
2. Moisture Absorption: Less than 0.5 percent.
3. Size and Shape: 12 inches square, nominal.
4. Surface Finish: Semi-Gloss.

5. Surface Finish: Matt.
6. Colors: To be selected from manufacturer's standard range.
7. Colors: As scheduled.
8. Trim Units: Matching bullnose, bullnose corner, cove/inside finger cove, radius cap, sink
rail, sink rail incorner/outcorner, cove base, outside cove corner shapes in sizes
coordinated with field tile shapes.
C. Wall and Counter Glazed Tile:
1. Product: Polaris.
2. Moisture Absorption: Less than 20 percent.
3. Size and Shape: 8 inches square, nominal.
4. Surface Finish: Polished.
7. Trim Units: Cement Bullnose, Cove Base, Cove Base Corner, Fabric Bullnose, Groover
Bullnose, Jolly shapes in sizes coordinated with field tile shapes.
D.1 Mosaics Floor and Wall Tile:
1. Product: Continental Slate.
3. Size and Shape: 12 inches square, nominal
4. Surface Finish: Plain.
7. Pattern: As indicated on the Drawings.

10
8. Pattern: As scheduled.
9. Trim Units: Matching bullnose, cove/inside finger cove, radius cap, sink rail, sink rail
incorner/outcorner, cement bullnose, cove base, fabric bullnose, grooved bullnose, jolly
shapes in sizes coordinated with field tile.
D.2 Mosaics Floor and Wall Tile:
10. Product: Keystones.
12. Size and Shape: 30 X 60 cm sheets, nominal , PVC - dot mounting
13. Surface Finish: Plain.
16. Pattern: As indicated on the Drawings.
17. Pattern: As scheduled.
18. Trim Units: Matching bullnose, cove/inside finger cove, radius cap, sink rail, sink rail
incorner/outcorner, cement bullnose, cove base, fabric bullnose, grooved bullnose, jolly
shapes in sizes coordinated with field tile.
2.3 TRIM AND ACCESSORlES
A. Ceramic Accessories: Glazed finish, same color and finish as adjacent field tile; same
manufacturer as tile.
1. Soap Dish: With wash cloth holder, clam shell design, surface mounted or recessed; cast
strength sufficient to resist lateral pull force of 75 lbs (34 Kg).
2. Toilet Tissue Holder: Surface mounted or recessed, for single roll, with spring loaded
holder.
3. Towel Bars: Standard design, surface mounted with extensions for casting into small wall
openings; cast strength sufficient to resist lateral pull force of 30 lbs (14 Kg).
4. Corner Shelf.
B. Non-Ceramic Trim: Satin natural anodized extruded aluminum, stainless steel, brass, etc, style
and dimensions to suit application, for setting using tile mortar or adhesive; use in the following
locations:
1. Open edges of floor tile.
2. Transition between floor finishes of different heights.
3. Thresholds at door openings.
4. Expansion and control joints, floor and wall.
C. Stone Thresholds: Provide stone thresholds uniform in color and finish and fabricated as follows:
1. Material:
a. Marble, complying with ÅSTM C 503 for exterior use and with a minimum abrasive
hardness of 10 when tested in accordance with ÅSTM C 241.
b. Granite complying with ÅSTM C 615.
c. Slate complying with ASTM C 629, abrasion resistant, non-fading for interior use
with a honed finish.
2. Color/Finish: As selected from the manufacturers’ standard range.

10
3. Size:
a. Fabricate 2 inches (50 mm) wide by full width of wall or frame opening; 1/2 inch (12
mm) thick; beveled one long edge with radiused corners on top side; without holes,
cracks, or open seams.
b. Fabricated in the sizes and profiles indicated.
4. Provide to provide transition between tile surface and adjoining finishes and at the
following locations:
a. At doorways where tile terminates.
b. At open edges of floor tile where adjacent finish is a different height.
2.4 SETTING MATERIALS
A. Organic Adhesive: ANSI A136.1, thinset bond type; use Type I in areas subject to prolonged
moisture exposure.
B. Epoxy Adhesive: ANSI A118.3, thinset bond type.
C. Mortar Bed Materials:

1. Portland cement: ÅSTM C150, type 1, gray or white.
2. Hydrated Lime: ÅSTM C207, Type S.
3. Sand: ÅSTM C144, fine.
4. Latex additive: As approved.
5. Water: Clean and potable.
D. Mortar Bond Coat Materials:

1. Dry-Set Portland Cement type: ANSI A118.1.
2. Latex-Portland Cement type: ANSI A118.4.
3. Epoxy: ANSI A118.3, 100 percent solids.
E. Standard Grout: Cement grout, sanded or un-sanded, as specified in ANSI A118.6; color as
selected.
F. Polymer modified cement grout, sanded or un-sanded, as specified in ANSI A118.7; color as
selected.
G. Epoxy Grout: ANSI A118.8, 100 percent solids epoxy grout; color as selected.
H. Silicone Sealant: Silicone sealant, moisture and mildew resistant type, white; use for shower
floors and shower walls.
I. Cleavage Membrane:
1. No. 15 (6.9 kg) asphalt saturated felt, ASTM D226, Type 1.
2. Polyethylene film, ÅSTM D4397, 4.0 mil thickness.
J. Waterproofing Membrane at Floors: Membrane in accordance with ANSI A118.10 and as follows:
1. Chlorinated Polyethylene Sheet with polyester fabric reinforcing.
2. Fabric Reinforced, Fluid-Applied elastomeric membrane.
3. Un-Reinforced, Fluid-Applied elastomeric membrane.
4. Polyethylene Sheet Product.
5. Fabric-Reinforced, Modified-Bituminous Sheet Product.
6. Urethane Waterproofing and Tile-Setting Adhesive Product.
K. Membrane at Walls: No. 15 (6.9 kg) asphalt saturated felt, ASTM D226, Type 1.
L. Membrane at Walls: 4 mil (0.1 mm) thick polyethylene film, ÅSTM D4397.
M. Membrane at Walls: Reinforced asphalt paper.
N. Reinforcing Mesh: 2 by 2 inch (50 by 50 mm) size weave of 16/16 wire size; welded fabric,
galvanized.

10
O. Metal Lath: ASTM C847, Flat expanded diamond mesh, not less than 2.5 lbs/SY, galvanized
finish.
P. Cementitious Backer Board: ANSI A118.9; High density, cementitious, glass fiber reinforced with
2 inch (50 mm) wide coated glass fiber tape for joints and corners:
1. Thickness: 1/4 inch (6 mm).
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that wall surfaces are free of substances which would impair bonding of setting materials,
smooth and flat within tolerances specified in ANSI A137.1, and are ready to receive tile.
B. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are dust-free, and free of substances which would impair bonding
of setting materials to sub-floor surfaces, and are smooth and flat within tolerances specified in
ANSI A137.1.
C. Verify that concrete sub-floor surfaces are ready for tile installation by testing for moisture
emission rate and alkalinity; obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended
by tile manufacturer and setting materials manufacturer.
D. Verify that required floor-mounted utilities are in correct
location.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Protect surrounding work from damage.
B. Remove any curing compounds or other contaminates.
C. Vacuum clean surfaces and damp clean.
D. Seal substrate surface cracks with filler. Level existing substrate surfaces to acceptable flatness
tolerances.
E. Install cementitious backer board in accordance with ANSI A108.11 and board manufacturer's
instructions. Tape joints and corners, cover with skim coat of dry-set mortar to a feather edge.
F. Prepare substrate surfaces for adhesive installation in accordance with adhesive manufacturer's

10
instructions.
3.3 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A. Install tile and grout in accordance with applicable requirements of ANSI A108.1 through
A108.13, manufacturer's instructions, and TCA Handbook recommendations.
B. Lay tile to pattern indicated. Arrange pattern so that a full tile or joint is centered on each wall and
that no tile less than 1/2 width is used. Do not interrupt tile pattern through openings.
C. Cut and fit tile to penetrations through tile, leaving sealant joint space. Form corners and bases
neatly. Align floor joints.
D. Place tile joints uniform in width, subject to variance in tolerance allowed in tile size. Make joints
watertight, without voids, cracks, excess mortar, or excess grout.
E. Form internal angles square and external angles bullnosed.
F. Install ceramic accessories rigidly in prepared openings.
G. Install non-ceramic trim in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
H. Install thresholds where indicated.
I. Sound tile after setting. Replace hollow sounding units.
J. Keep expansion joints free of adhesive or grout. Apply sealant to joints.
K. Allow tile to set for a minimum of 48 hours prior to grouting.
L. Grout tile joints. Use standard grout unless otherwise indicated.
M. Apply sealant to junction of tile and dissimilar materials and junction of dissimilar planes.
3.4 INSTALLATION - FLOORS - THIN-SET METHODS
A. Over exterior concrete substrates, install in accordance with TCA Handbook Method F102, with
standard grout.
B. Over interior concrete substrates, install in accordance with TCA Handbook Method F113,
dry-set or latex-portland cement bond coat, with standard grout, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Where waterproofing membrane is indicated, install in accordance with TCA Handbook
Method F122, with latex-portland cement grout.
2. Where epoxy bond coat and grout are indicated, install in accordance with TCA Handbook
Method F131.
C. Over wood substrates, install in accordance with TCA Handbook Method F142, with standard
grout, unless otherwise indicated.
Method F143.
3.5 INSTALLATION - FLOORS - MORTAR BED METHODS
A. Over exterior concrete substrates, install in accordance with TCA F101, bonded, with standard
grout.
B. Over interior concrete substrates, install in accordance with TCA Handbook Method F111, with
cleavage membrane, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Where waterproofing membrane is indicated, with standard grout or no mention of grout
type, install in accordance with TCA Handbook Method F121.

10
Method F132, bonded.

3. Where epoxy or furan grout is indicated, but not epoxy or furan bond coat, install in
accordance with TCA Handbook Method F114, with cleavage membrane.
C. Over wood substrates, install in accordance with TCA Handbook method F141, with standard
grout, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Cleavage Membrane: Lap edges and ends.
E. Waterproofing Membrane: Install as specified in ANSI A108.13.
F. Mortar Bed Thickness: 1-1/4 to 2 inch (32 to 51 mm) maximum, unless otherwise indicated.
3.6 INSTALLATION - SHOWERS AND BATHTUB WALLS
A. At tiled shower receptors install in accordance with TCA Handbook Method B415, mortar bed
floor, and W244, thin-set over cementitious backer unit walls.
B. At bathtub walls install in accordance with TCA Handbook Method B412, over cementitious
backer units with waterproofing membrane.
C. Grout with standard grout as specified above.
D. Seal joints between tile work and other work with sealant specified in Section 07900.
3.7 INSTALLATION - WALL TILE
A. Over cementitious backer units on studs, install in accordance with TCA Handbook Method
W244, using membrane at toilet rooms.
B. Over cementitious backer units install in accordance with TCA Handbook Method W223, organic
adhesive.
C. Over gypsum wallboard on wood or metal studs install in accordance with TCA Handbook
Method W243, thin-set with dry-set or latex-portland cement bond coat, unless otherwise
indicated.
1. Where mortar bed is indicated, install in accordance with TCA Handbook Method W222,
one coat method.
2. Where waterproofing membrane is indicated other than at showers and bathtub walls,
install in accordance with TCA Handbook Method W222, one coat method.
D. Over interior concrete and masonry install in accordance with TCA Handbook Method W202,
thin-set with dry-set or latex-portland cement bond coat.
E. Over wood studs without backer install in accordance with TCA Handbook Method W231, mortar
bed, with membrane where indicated.
F. Over metal studs without backer install in accordance with TCA Handbook Method W241, mortar
bed, with membrane where indicated.
3.8 CLEANING
A. Clean tile and grout surfaces.
3.9 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A. Do not permit traffic over finished floor surface for 72 hours after installation.
B. Cover floors with kraft paper and protect from dirt and residue from other trades.
C. Where floor will be exposed for prolonged periods cover with plywood or other similar type

10
walkways
3.10 SCHEDULE
A. Floor Tile:
1. Tile Type: ____
2. Tile Base: ____.
3. Installation Method: TCA ____.
4. Bond Coat Mortar Type: ANSI ____.
5. Grout Type/Color: ____.
B. Wall Tile:
1. Tile Type: ____
2. Installation Method: TCA ____.
3. Bond Coat Mortar Type: ANSI ____.
4. Grout Type/Color: ____.
END OF SECTION
MHA-TECH. SPECIFICATIONS- 1706- 04/02/2015 SECTION 09300 - TILES 10 /

10
SUBJECT: SECTION 09310- CERAMIC TILES
SECTION 09310
CERAMIC TILES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Quarry tile.
2. Glazed wall tile.
3. Stone thresholds installed as part of tile installations.
4. Cementitious backer units installed as part of tile installations.
5. Metal edge strips installed as part of tile installations.
1. Division 7 Section "Self-Adhering Sheet Waterproofing, Elastomeric Sheet Waterproofing,

Thermoplastic Sheet Waterproofing, Cold Fluid-Applied Waterproofing, Hot Fluid-Applied
Waterproofing" for waterproofing under thickset mortar beds.
2. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealing of expansion, contraction, control, and
isolation joints in tile surfaces.
3. Division 9 Section "Portland Cement Plaster" for portland cement scratch coat over metal
lath on wall surfaces.
4. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for cementitous backer units.
5. Division 9 Section "Stone Paving and Flooring" for stone thresholds.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Module Size: Actual tile size (minor facial dimension as measured per ASTM C 499) plus joint
width indicated.
B. Facial Dimension: Actual tile size (minor facial dimension as measured per ASTM C 499).
C. Facial Dimension: Nominal tile size as defined in ANSI A137.1.
A. Static Coefficient of Friction: For tile installed on walkway surfaces, provide products with the
following values as determined by testing identical products per ASTM C 1028:
MHA – TECH. SPECIFICATION – 1706 – 04/02/2015 SECTION 09310 – CERAMIC TILE 1 / 11

1. Level Surfaces: Minimum 0.6.

2. Step Treads: Minimum 0.6.
3. Ramp Surfaces: Minimum 0.8.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
B. Shop Drawings: Show locations of each type of tile and tile pattern. Show widths, details, and
locations of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile substrates and finished tile
surfaces.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of tile and grout indicated. Include Samples of
accessories involving color selection.
D. Samples for Verification:
1. Full-size units of each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required.
2. Assembled samples with grouted joints for each type and composition of tile and for each
color and finish required, at least (300 mm) square and mounted on rigid panel. Use grout
of type and in color or colors approved for completed work.
3. Full-size units of each type of trim and accessory for each color and finish required.
4. Stone thresholds in (150-mm) lengths.
5. Metal edge strips in (150-mm) lengths.
E. Master Grade Certificates: For each shipment, type, and composition of tile, signed by tile
manufacturer and Installer.
F. Product Certificates: For each type of product, signed by product manufacturer.
G. Qualification Data: For Installer.
H. Material Test Reports: For each tile-setting and -grouting product.
A. Source Limitations for Tile: Obtain all tiles of same type and color or finish from one source or
producer.
1. Obtain tile from same production run and of consistent quality in appearance and physical
properties for each contiguous area.
B. Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality for
each mortar, adhesive, and grout component from a single manufacturer and each aggregate
from one source or producer.
C. Source Limitations for Other Products: Obtain each of the following products specified in this
Section through one source from a single manufacturer for each product:
1. Stone thresholds.
2. Waterproofing.
3. Joint sealants.
4. Cementitious backer units.
5. Metal edge strips.

D. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample Submittals and to demonstrate
aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution.
1. Build mockup of each type of floor tile installation.

2. Build mockup of each type of wall tile installation.
E. Pre installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination."
A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact
until time of use. Comply with requirement in ANSI A137.1 for labeling sealed tile packages.
B. Store tile and cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location.
C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and
contamination avoided.
D. Store liquid latexes and emulsion adhesives in unopened containers and protected from freezing.
E. Handle tile that has temporary protective coating on exposed surfaces to prevent coated
surfaces from contacting backs or edges of other units. If coating does contact bonding surfaces
of tile, remove coating from bonding surfaces before setting tile.
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is complete and
ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated in referenced
standards and manufacturer's written instructions.
1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 3 percent of amount
installed, for each type, composition, color, pattern, and size indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS/ BRANDS
a. SAUDI CERAMICS
b. DAL Tiles
c. LEA CERAMICS

1. Ceramic tiles 300mm x 300mm (Glazed and Unglazed)
2. Thickness of flooring Tile shall be 8 mm thick minimum
3. Thickness for wall tiles shall be 6 mm thick minimum
2.2 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for
product selection:

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the products specified.
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified.
3. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
5. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for each tile type is based on the product named.
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or a
comparable product by one of the other manufacturers specified.
2.3 PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide tile that complies with ANSI A137.1, "Specifications for
Ceramic Tile," for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated.
1. Provide tile complying with Standard grade requirements, unless otherwise indicated.
2. For facial dimensions of tile, comply with requirements relating to tile sizes specified in
Part 1 "Definitions" Article.
B. ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with ANSI standards
referenced in "Setting and Grouting Materials" Article.
C. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: Where manufacturer's standard products are indicated for tile,
grout, and other products requiring selection of colors, surface textures, patterns, and other
appearance characteristics, provide specific products or materials complying with the following
requirements:
1. As indicated by manufacturer's designations.
D. Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges selected during Sample
submittals, blend tile in factory and package so tile units taken from one package show same
range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples.
E. Mounting: For factory-mounted tile, provide back- or edge-mounted tile assemblies as standard
with manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Where tile is indicated for installation in wet areas, do not use back- or edge-mounted tile
assemblies unless tile manufacturer specifies in writing that this type of mounting is
suitable for installation indicated and has a record of successful in-service performance.

F. Factory-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: Where indicated under tile type, protect exposed
surfaces of tile against adherence of mortar and grout by pre-coating with continuous film of
petroleum paraffin wax, applied hot. Do not coat unexposed tile surfaces.
2.4 THRESHOLDS
A. General: Fabricate to sizes and profiles indicated or required to provide transition between
adjacent floor finishes.
1. Bevel edges at 1:2 slopes, aligning lower edge of bevel with adjacent floor finish. Limit
height of bevel to (12.7 mm) or less, and finish bevel to match face of threshold.
B. Granite Thresholds: ASTM C 615, with polished finish.

1. Description: Match Architect's sample.
2. Description: Provide the following:
a. Nero Absolute
2.5 SETTING AND GROUTING MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement Mortar (Thickset) Installation Materials: ANSI A108.1A and as specified below:
1. Cleavage Membrane: Asphalt felt, ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15); or polyethylene
sheeting, ASTM D 4397, (0.1 mm) thick.
2. Reinforcing Wire Fabric: Galvanized, welded wire fabric, (50.8 by 50.8 mm) by (1.57-mm)
diameter; comply with ASTM A 185 and ASTM A 82 except for minimum wire size.
3. Expanded Metal Lath: Diamond-mesh lath complying with ASTM C 847.
a. Base Metal and Finish for Interior Applications: Uncoated or zinc-coated

(galvanized) steel sheet, with uncoated steel sheet painted after fabrication into
lath.
b. Base Metal and Finish for Exterior Applications: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel
sheet.
c. Configuration over Studs and Furring: Flat.
d. Configuration over Solid Surfaces: Self-furring.
e. Weight: (1.4 kg/sq. m).
4. Latex Additive: Manufacturer's standard water emulsion, serving as replacement for part
or all of gaging water, of type specifically recommended by latex-additive manufacturer for
use with field-mixed Portland cement and aggregate mortar bed.
B. Dry-Set Portland cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI A118.1.
1. For wall applications, provide non sagging mortar that complies with Paragraph C-4.6.1 in
addition to the other requirements in ANSI A118.1.
C. Chemical-Resistant, Water-Cleanable, Tile-Setting and -Grouting Epoxy: ANSI A118.3, with a

VOC content of 65 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA
Method 24).
1. Provide product capable of withstanding continuous and intermittent exposure to

temperatures of up to (60 deg C) and (100 deg C), respectively, and certified by
manufacturer for intended use.

D. Sand-Portland Cement Grout: ANSI A108.10, composed of white or gray cement and white or
colored aggregate as required to produce color indicated.
2.6 ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard chemically curing, elastomeric sealants of base

polymer and characteristics indicated that comply with applicable requirements in Division 7
Section "Joint Sealants."
1. Use sealants that have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to
40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
B. Colors: Provide colors of exposed sealants to match colors of grout in tile adjoining sealed
joints, unless otherwise indicated.
C. One-Part, Mildew-Resistant Silicone Sealant: ASTM C 920; Type S; Grade NS; Class 25;
Uses NT, G, A, and, as applicable to nonporous joint substrates indicated, O; formulated with
fungicide, intended for sealing interior ceramic tile joints and other nonporous substrates that are
subject to in-service exposures of high humidity and extreme temperatures.
1. Products:
D. Chemical-Resistant Sealants: For chemical-resistant floors, provide chemical-resistant

elastomeric sealant of type recommended and produced by chemical-resistant mortar and grout
manufacturer for type of application indicated, with proven service record and compatibility with
tile and other setting materials, and with chemical resistance equivalent to mortar/grout. Include
primer and backer rod recommended by manufacturer.
2.7 CEMENTITIOUS BACKER UNITS
A. Provide cementitious backer units complying with ANSI A118.9 in maximum lengths available to
minimize end-to-end butt joints.
1. Thickness: Manufacturer's standard thickness, but not less than (6.4 mm).
2. Width: Manufacturer's standard width, but not less than (813 mm).
B. Products:
1. As per Architect’s approval.
2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Trowelable Underlayment and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, Portland cement-based

formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials for installations
indicated.
B. Metal Edge Strips: Angle or L-shape, height to match tile and setting-bed thickness, metallic or
combination of metal and PVC or neoprene base, designed specifically for flooring applications,
stainless steel; ASTM A 666, 300 Series exposed-edge material.

C. Temporary Protective Coating: Either product indicated below that is formulated to protect
exposed surfaces of tile against adherence of mortar and grout; compatible with tile, mortar, and
grout products; and easily removable after grouting is completed without damaging grout or tile.
1. Petroleum paraffin wax, fully refined and odorless, containing at least 0.5 percent oil with a
melting point of (49 to 60 deg C) per ASTM D 87.
2. Grout release in form of manufacturer's standard proprietary liquid coating that is specially
formulated and recommended for use as temporary protective coating for tile.
D. Tile Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming tile and
grout surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by tile and grout
manufacturers.
E. Grout Sealer: Manufacturer's standard product for sealing grout joints that does not change
color or appearance of grout.
2.9 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT
A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout
manufacturers' written instructions.
B. Add materials, water, and additives in accurate proportions.
C. Obtain and use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and
other procedures to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance
characteristics for installations indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for
compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting
performance of installed tile.
1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm; dry; clean; free of oil, waxy films, and curing
compounds; and within flatness tolerances required by referenced ANSI A108 Series of
tile installation standards for installations indicated.
2. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical
units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been completed before
installing tile.
3. Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint locations; if not
coordinated, adjust joint locations in consultation with Architect.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Remove coatings, including curing compounds and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil,
or silicone, that are incompatible with tile-setting materials.

B. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges selected during Sample submittals,
verify that tile has been factory blended and packaged so tile units taken from one package show
same range of colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples. If not
factory blended, either return to manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing.
C. Field-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: Where indicated under tile type or needed to
prevent grout from staining or adhering to exposed tile surfaces, pre coat them with continuous
film of temporary protective coating, taking care not to coat unexposed tile surfaces.
A. ANSI Tile Installation Standards: Comply with parts of ANSI A108 Series "Specifications for
Installation of Ceramic Tile" that apply to types of setting and grouting materials and to methods
indicated in ceramic tile installation schedules.
B. TCA Installation Guidelines: TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation." Comply with TCA
installation methods indicated in ceramic tile installation schedules.
C. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete
covering without interruptions, unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at
obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.
D. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring
visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight
aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so
plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.
E. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern, unless otherwise indicated. Align joints when adjoining
tiles on floor, base, walls, and trim are same size. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both
directions in each space or on each wall area. Adjust to minimize tile cutting. Provide uniform
joint widths, unless otherwise indicated.
1. For tile mounted in sheets, make joints between tile sheets same width as joints within tile
sheets so joints between sheets are not apparent in finished work.
F. Lay out tile wainscots to next full tile beyond dimensions indicated.
G. Expansion Joints: Locate expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control,
contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated during installation of setting materials, mortar
beds, and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles.
1. Locate joints in tile surfaces directly above joints in concrete substrates.

2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint
Sealants."
H. Grout tile to comply with requirements of the following tile installation standards:
1. For ceramic tile grouts (sand-ortland cement; dry-set, commercial Portland cement; and
latex-portland cement grouts), comply with ANSI A108.10.
2. For chemical-resistant epoxy grouts, comply with ANSI A108.6.
I. At showers, tubs, and where indicated, install cementitious backer units and treat joints to
comply with ANSI A108.11 and manufacturer's written instructions for type of application
indicated.

3.4 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION
A. General: Install tile to comply with requirements in the Floor Tile Installation Schedule, including
those referencing TCA installation methods and ANSI A108 Series of tile installation standards.
1. For installations indicated below, follow procedures in ANSI A108 Series tile installation
standards for providing 95 percent mortar coverage.
a. Exterior tile floors.

b. Tile floors in wet areas.
c. Tile floors in laundries.
d. Tile floors composed of tiles (200 by 200 mm) or larger.
e. Tile floors composed of rib-backed tiles.
B. Joint Widths: Install tile on floors with the following joint widths:
1. Ceramic Tile: (1.6 mm).
C. Stone Thresholds: Install stone thresholds at locations indicated; set in same type of setting bed
as abutting field tile, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Set thresholds in latex-portland cement mortar for locations where mortar bed would
otherwise be exposed above adjacent non tile floor finish.
D. Metal Edge Strips: Install at locations indicated or where exposed edge of tile flooring meets
carpet, wood, or other flooring that finishes flush with top of tile.
E. Grout Sealer: Apply grout sealer to grout joints according to grout-sealer manufacturer's written
instructions. As soon as grout sealer has penetrated grout joints, remove excess sealer and
sealer that has gotten on tile faces by wiping with soft cloth.
3.5 WALL TILE INSTALLATION
A. Install types of tile designated for wall installations to comply with requirements in the Wall Tile
Installation Schedule, including those referencing TCA installation methods and ANSI setting-bed
standards.
B. Install metal lath and scratch coat for walls to comply with ANSI A108.1A, Section 4.1.
C. Joint Widths: Install tile on walls with the following joint widths:
1. Glazed Wall Tile: (1.6 mm).
3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTING
A. Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are
free of foreign matter.
1. Remove latex-portland cement grout residue from tile as soon as possible.

2. Clean grout smears and hazes from tile according to tile and grout manufacturer's written
instructions, but no sooner than 10 days after installation. Use only cleaners
recommended by tile and grout manufacturers and only after determining that cleaners are
safe to use by testing on samples of tile and other surfaces to be cleaned. Protect metal
surfaces and plumbing fixtures from effects of cleaning. Flush surfaces with clean water
before and after cleaning.

3. Remove temporary protective coating by method recommended by coating manufacturer

that is acceptable to tile and grout manufacturer. Trap and remove coating to prevent it
from clogging drains.
B. When recommended by tile manufacturer, apply coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed
tile walls and floors. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during
construction period to prevent staining, damage, and wear.
C. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least seven days after grouting is completed.
D. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral cleaner from tile surfaces.
3.7 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE
A. Tile Installation; FTI-01: Interior floor installation on concrete; cement mortar bed (thickset)
bonded to concrete; TCA F112 and ANSI A108.1A.
1. Tile Type: Glazed and Unglazed ceramic

2. Thin-Set Mortar: Dry-set portland cement mortar.
3. Grout: Sand-portland cement grout.
B. Tile Installation; FTI-02: Chemical-resistant interior floor installation on concrete; chemical-

resistant, water-cleanable, tile-setting and -grouting epoxy on cured cement mortar bed bonded
to concrete subfloor; epoxy grout; TCA F132 and ANSI A108.6.
1. Tile Type: Glazed and Unglazed ceramic Grout: Chemical-resistant, water-cleanable, tile-
setting and -grouting epoxy.
3.8 WALL TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE
A. Tile Installation; WTI-01: Interior wall installation over clean, sound, dimensionally stable
masonry or concrete; cement mortar bed (thickset) bonded to substrate; TCA W211 and
ANSI A108.1A.
1. Tile Type: Glazed and Unglazed ceramic
2. Subparagraph below is optional with ANSI A108.1A and ANSI A108.1C; if retaining either
standard, select one mortar type or delete subparagraph if unmodified portland cement is
acceptable. Also delete if ANSI A108.1B is selected.
3. Bond Coat Mortar for Wet-Set Method: Dry-set portland cement mortar.
4. Thin-Set Mortar: Dry-set portland cement mortar.
5. Grout: Sand-portland cement grout.
6. If retaining paragraph below, select one of three ANSI standards. ANSI A108.1A is wet-
set method, ANSI A108.1B is cured-bed method, and ANSI A108.1C allows Contractor
choice of using either method.


SUBJECT: SECTION 09500 – GYPSUM TILES CEILING AND GRID
SECTION 09500
GYPSUM TILES CEILING AND GRID (600x600 mm)
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Gypsum tile ceilings including suspension system and associated components as scheduled.
A. Section 092116 - Gypsum tile ceilings
1.3 REFERENCES
A. The gypsum ceiling tiles: Shall be manufactured from high grade non-combustible gypsum board
produced according to DIN 18180 and BS 1230 and tested to BS 476 parts 4, 6, 7 and 8 for fire.
Resistant to 90% RH and short term exposure for higher humidity.
B. Grid system for gypsum: ASTM C 635 - Standard Specification.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:

2. Storage, handling and maintenance instructions and recommendations.
C. Shop Drawings: submit shop drawings for reflected ceiling plans and coordinating penetrations
and ceiling mounted items. Show the following details:
1. Details and reflected ceiling plans for the metal ceiling system.
2. Clearly illustrate all components of the metal ceiling system suspension and components.
3. System assembly details and connections to building components.
4. Location of light fixtures, diffusers, speakers and other finish items.
5. Framing and support details for work supported by ceiling suspension system.
6. List of materials, dimensions, hanger fastenings and special details.
D. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, two complete sets of color chips
representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns.
E. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, two samples, minimum size 12 inches
(305 mm) square, representing actual product, color and patterns.
A. Manufacturer Qualifications:
1. Provide metal ceiling components produced by a single manufacturer with resources
adequate to deliver a product of consistent quality in terms of appearance and physical
properties for all project scopes and scales without risk of delay or interruption.
2. Provide suspension system components produced by a single manufacturer to provide
compatible components for a complete curved metal panel ceiling system installation.
MHA-TECH. SPECIFICATIONS- 1706- 04/02/2015 SECTION 09500 – GYPSUM TILES CEILING AND GRID 1/4
B. Installer Qualifications:
1. Installation work to be performed by a firm whose personnel have no less than three (3)
years of successful experience on projects of similar size, requirements and complexity.
C. Regulatory Requirements:
1. EN 13501–1 Fire classification of construction products and building element – Part 1:
Classification using test data from reaction to fire tests.
EN ISO 1716 – Reaction to fire tests for building products - Determination of the heat of
combustion.
EN 13823 Reaction to fire tests for building products – Building products excluding
floorings exposed to the thermal attack by a single burning item.
2. The system to be installed shall be certified to comply with structural, wind uplift and
seismic requirements of governing codes currently in effect and with these specifications
requirements.
3. When required for the application, install required bracing for seismic restraint in
accordance with ASTM E 580 and local building code.
D. Mock-Up: After approval of shop drawings, provide a mock up of the specified ceiling to
demonstrate aesthetic effect and set quality standard for fabrication and installation.
1. Finish areas designated by Architect. Mock-up shall be installed in an area where it can
become part of the final installation.
2. Do not proceed with remaining work until workmanship, color and sheen are approved by
Architect.
3. Refinish mock-up area as required to produce acceptable work.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation clearly labeled
with the following information: project number, item number and quantity, manufacturer's name
and address, client name and address and site address.
B. Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-based materials,
in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Store components in a fully enclosed dry space where they will be protected against damage
from moisture, direct sunlight, surface contamination and other construction activities.
D. Comply with prescribed stacking instructions to prevent damage to the components.
E. Handle components in a manner to prevent damage to the surfaces and edges and prevent
distortion and other physical damage.
A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity and ventilation) within limits

recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental
conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.
B. Begin system installation only after spaces are enclosed and weather-tight and after all wet work
and overhead work has been completed.
C. Prior to starting installation, allow materials to reach ambient room temperature and humidity
intended to be maintained for occupancy.
D. Coordinate with other work supported by or penetrating through the ceiling.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
a. SMC
b. KNAUF
c. SAINT GOBAIN
2.2 GENERAL CEILING:
1.Gypsum tile ceiling:

a. 12.5x600x600mm glass fibre reinforced high acoustic square 3x3mm c/c 8.33mm
perforation, type M1 white painted gypsum ceiling tiles. The tiles are with regular
edges and to be installed semi-recessed and fully accessible. The acoustic tiles are
furnished with a grey absorbent felt backing with an airflow resistant of 300Ns/m3
(DIN 53887.)
b. Suspension system description, component, and accessories:
1) Main Tee Runner: Height 38mm; Width 24, or 15 mm; Length 3600mm;
Material galvanized steel with stove enamel aluminum capping.
2) Cross Tee Runner: Height 38mm; Width 24, or 15 mm; Length 1200mm, &
600mm; Material galvanized steel with stove enamel aluminum capping.
3) Wall Angle Runner: Height 24mm; Width 24mm; Length 3600mm; Thickness
0.5mm; Material painted steel.
4) Adjustment clip with rod hanger: Length 1000mm; Material stove enamel.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.
B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory

preparation before proceeding.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.
B. Verify and confirm ceiling layouts by actual field measurements to balance borders and minimize
out-of square conditions. Coordinate all work that penetrates the ceiling.
C. Ceiling systems shall be centered and balanced spacing, unless indicated otherwise.
D. Cutouts for lights, speakers, sprinklers or other items shall be factory cut. Cutouts, when done
on-site, shall be done by the ceiling installer.
3.3 INSTALLATION
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Adjust ceiling components to provide a consistent finish and appearance in conformity with pre-
established tolerances and requirements. Panels showing signs of damage, either in finish or in
form shall be replaced. Exposed surfaces shall be cleaned of any dirt, grease, fingerprints and
marks and other imperfections with cleaning materials recommended by the manufacturer.
B. Protect installed products until completion of project.
C. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
SUBJECT: SECTION 09638- STONE FLOORING
SECTION 09638
STONE FLOORING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes the following applications of dimension stone:
1. Interior flooring.
2. Exterior flooring
3. Thresholds.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealing control and expansion joints in stonework
with elastomeric sealant.
2. Division 9 Section "Interior Stone Facing" for stone base.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1. For each variety of stone. Include data on physical properties required by referenced
ASTM standards.
2. For stone accessories and other manufactured products.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
C. Samples for Verification:
1. For each stone type indicated, in sets of Samples not less than (300 mm) square. Include
two or more Samples in each set and show the full range of variations in appearance
characteristics expected in completed Work. Samples will establish the standard by which
stone will be judged.
2. For each color of grout required.
D. Qualification Data: For qualified fabricator.
MHA – TECH. SPECIFICATION – 1706 – 04/02/2015 SECTION 09638 – STONE FLOORING 1/9
E. Maintenance Data: For stone flooring to include in maintenance manuals. Include Product Data
for stone-care products used or recommended by Installer and names, addresses, and
telephone numbers of local sources for products.
A. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified fabricator that custom fabricates stone.
B. Installer Qualifications: Stone fabricator.
C. Source Limitations for Stone: Obtain each variety of stone, from a single quarry with resources
to provide materials of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties.
1. For stone types that include same list of varieties and sources, provide same variety from
same source for each.
2. Make quarried blocks available for examination by Architect for appearance
characteristics.
3. Make stone slabs available for Architect to examine for appearance characteristics.
a. Architect will select aesthetically acceptable slabs and will indicate aesthetically
unacceptable portions of slabs.
b. Segregate slabs selected for use on Project and mark backs indicating approval.
c. Mark and photograph aesthetically unacceptable portions of slabs as directed by
Architect.
D. Source Limitations for Other Materials: Obtain each type of cementitious material, grout,
admixture, stone accessory, and other material from single source.
E. Mockups: Build mockups to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for
materials and execution.
1. Build mockup of typical interior floor area about (2400 mm) square.
2. Build mockup of typical exterior pavement area about (2400 mm) square.
3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract
Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations
in writing.
A. Lift stone with wide-belt slings; do not use wire rope or ropes that might cause staining. Move
stone, if required, using dollies with cushioned wood supports.
B. Store stone on pallets with non-staining separators and non-staining, waterproof covers.
Ventilate under covers to prevent condensation.
C. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not
use cementitious materials that have become damp.
A. Cold-Weather Requirements for Interior Stone Flooring:
1. Do not set stone when air or material temperature is below (10 deg C).
2. Maintain temperature at (10 deg C) or above in installation areas during installation and for
7 days after completion unless higher temperatures are required by fabricator's or
supplier's instructions.
B. Cold-Weather Requirements for Exterior Stone Paving: Do not use frozen materials or materials
mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit
masonry damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction
requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
C. Hot-Weather Requirements for Exterior Stone Paving: Comply with hot-weather construction
requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 and with the following:
1. Maintain temperature of materials below (38 deg C).

2. Do not apply mortar to substrates with temperatures of (38 deg C) and above.
3. When the ambient temperature exceeds (32 deg C), fog spray installed stone paving until
damp at least 3 times a day until paving is 3 days old.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
a. ORBIT-NESMA
b. Al Hoty-Stanger
c. Al Fayha for Marble and Granite
2.2 STONE
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide stone of varieties and from sources
complying with Division 4 Section "Dimension Stone Cladding."
1. GRANITE STONE (Common Areas Flooring Tiles) Cut to Size
i. Cut: Fleuri cut.
i. Cut stone from one block or contiguous, matched blocks in which natural markings
occur.
ii. Finish: Polished.
i. Match Architect's samples for color, finish, and other stone characteristics relating to
aesthetic effects.
2. MARBLE STONE (Common Areas Flooring Tiles) Cut to Size
i. Cut: Fleuri cut.
i. Cut stone from one block or contiguous, matched blocks in which natural markings
occur.
ii. Finish: Polished.
i. Match Architect's samples for color, finish, and other stone characteristics relating to
aesthetic effects.
2.3 MORTAR MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II.
B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.
C. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement complying with ASTM C 150,
Type I or III, and hydrated lime complying with ASTM C 207, Type S.
D. Colored Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement complying with
ASTM C 150, Type I or III; hydrated lime complying with ASTM C 207, Type S; and mortar
pigments consisting of natural and synthetic iron oxides. Pigments contain no carbon black,
have a record of satisfactory performance in mortar, and do not exceed 10 percent of portland
cement by weight. Provide mix formulated to produce color indicated or, if not indicated, as
selected from manufacturer's standard colors.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
a. As per Architect’s approval
E. Aggregate: ASTM C 144; except for pointing mortar, use aggregate graded with 100 percent
passing (1.18-mm) sieve.
1. White Aggregates: Natural white sand or ground white stone.

2. Colored Aggregates: Natural-colored sand or ground marble, granite, or other durable
stone; of color necessary to produce required mortar color.
F. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides, compounded for use in mortar mixes. Use
pigments with a record of satisfactory performance in mortar and containing no carbon black.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
G. Latex Additive: Manufacturer's standard water emulsion, serving as replacement for part or all of
gagging water, of type specifically recommended by latex-additive manufacturer for use with
field-mixed portland cement mortar bed, and not containing a retarder.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
H. Thin-Set Mortar:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products the following:
2. Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A118.1.

3. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A118.4, consisting of the following:
a. Prepackaged Dry-Mortar Mix: Factory-prepared mixture of portland cement; dry, re-

dispersible, ethylene vinyl acetate additive; and other ingredients to which only
water needs to be added at Project site.
b. Mixture of Dry-Mortar Mix and Latex Additive: Mixture of prepackaged dry-mortar
mix and liquid-latex additive.
I. Water: Potable.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Water-Cleanable Epoxy Adhesive: ANSI A118.3, with a VOC content of 65 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products the following:
B. Temporary Spacers: Resilient plastic, non-staining to stone, sized to suit joint thickness.
C. Cleavage Membrane: Polyethylene sheeting, ASTM D 4397, (0.1 mm) thick.
D. Reinforcing Wire: Galvanized, welded, (1.57-mm-) diameter wire; (50-by-50-mm) mesh; comply
with ASTM A 185 and ASTM A 82 except for minimum wire size.
E. Cork Joint Filler: Preformed strips complying with ASTM D 1752, Type II.
F. Cleaner: Stone cleaner specifically formulated for stone types, finishes, and applications
indicated, as recommended by stone producer. Do not use cleaning compounds containing
acids, caustics, harsh fillers, or abrasives.
2.5 MORTAR MIXES
A. Mortar: Comply with referenced standards and with manufacturers' written instructions for mix
proportions, mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other
procedures needed to produce mortar of uniform quality and with optimum performance
characteristics.
1. Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders,

water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise
indicated. Do not use calcium chloride.
2. Combine mortar materials and thoroughly mix in a mechanical batch mixer unless
otherwise indicated. Discard mortar when it has reached initial set.
3. Mixing Pointing Mortar: Thoroughly mix cementitious and aggregate materials together
before adding any water. Add only enough water to produce a damp, unworkable mix that
will retain its form when pressed into a ball. Maintain mortar in this dampened condition
for one to two hours. Add remaining water in small portions until mortar reaches desired
consistency. Use mortar within 30 minutes of final mixing; do not re-temper or use
partially hardened material.
B. Portland Cement-Lime Setting Mortar: ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification, Type N for interior
applications and Type S for exterior applications. Use amount of water to produce a stiff mixture
with a moist surface when bed is ready to receive stone.
C. Latex-Modified Portland Cement Setting Mortar: Proportion and mix portland cement, aggregate,
and latex additive to comply with latex-additive manufacturer's written instructions and to
produce a stiff mixture with a moist surface when bed is ready to receive stone.
D. Mortar-Bed Bond Coat: Mix neat cement and latex additive to a creamy consistency.
E. Latex-Modified Portland Cement Bond Coat: Proportion and mix portland cement, aggregate,
and latex additive to comply with latex-additive manufacturer's written instructions.
F. Cement-Paste Bond Coat: Mix either neat cement or cement and sand with water to a
consistency similar to that of thick cream.
G. Pointing Mortar: Comply with requirements indicated above for setting mortar, including type and
the following:
1. Pigmented Pointing Mortar: Select and proportion pigments with other ingredients to
produce color required. Do not exceed pigment-to-cement ratio of 1:10, by weight.
2. Packaged Portland Cement-Lime Mix Mortar: Use portland cement-lime mix of selected
color.
3. Colored-Aggregate Pointing Mortar: Produce color required by combining colored
aggregates with portland cement of selected color.
2.6 STONE FABRICATION
A. Select stone for intended use to prevent fabricated units from containing cracks, seams, and
starts that could impair structural integrity or function.
1. Repairs that are characteristic of the varieties specified are acceptable provided they do
not impair structural integrity or function and are not aesthetically unpleasing, as judged by
Architect.
B. Fabricate stone to comply with requirements indicated and with the following references:
1. For granite, comply with recommendations in NBGQA's "Specifications for Architectural

Granite."
C. Cut stone to produce pieces of thickness, size, and shape indicated, including details on
Drawings and Shop Drawings.
1. Pattern: As indicated for the Basement 1 Lobby.
2. Stone Edges: Square cut with top corner slightly eased to prevent snipping, finish as per
face.
3. Joint Width: Closed.
D. Pattern Arrangement: Fabricate and arrange stone units with veining and other natural markings
to comply with the following requirements:
1. Arrange units with veining as indicated on Drawings.
2. Number stone units and note numbers on Shop Drawings to designate installed location of
each unit.
E. Fabricate stone thresholds in sizes and profiles as indicated or required to provide transition
between adjacent floor finishes.
1. Bevel edges of thresholds at 1:2 slope, aligning lower edge of bevel with adjacent floor
finish. Limit height of bevel to (13 mm) or less, and finish bevel to match face of threshold.
F. Fabricate stone stair treads in sizes and profiles indicated.
G. Carefully inspect finished stone units at fabrication plant for compliance with requirements for
appearance, material, and fabrication. Replace defective units. Clean sawed backs of stones to
remove rust stains and iron particles.
1. Grade and select stone for overall uniform appearance when assembled in place.
2. Natural variations in appearance are acceptable if installed stone units match range of
colors and other appearance characteristics represented in approved Samples.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine surfaces indicated to receive stone, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements and other conditions affecting performance.
B. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to
performance of stone flooring.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Vacuum clean concrete substrates to remove dirt, dust, debris, and loose particles.
B. Remove substances from concrete substrates that could impair mortar bond, including curing
and sealing compounds, form oil, and laitance.
C. Clean dirty or stained stone surfaces by removing soil, stains, and foreign materials before
setting. Clean stone by thoroughly scrubbing with fiber brushes and then drenching with clear
water. Use only mild cleaning compounds that contain no caustic or harsh materials or
abrasives.
A. Do necessary field cutting as stone is set. Cut lines straight and true and finish field-cut edges to
match shop-cut edges.
1. Use power saws with diamond blades to cut stone
B. Set stone to comply with Drawings and Shop Drawings
C. Scribe and field-cut stone as necessary to fit at obstructions. Produce neat joints of size
specified or indicated.
D. Expansion- and Control-Joint Installation: Locate and install according to Drawings and Shop
Drawings.
3.4 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
A. Variation in Line: For positions shown in plan for edges of paving, flooring, ramps, steps,
changes in color or finish, and continuous joint lines, do not exceed (3 mm in 2400 mm), (6 mm
in 6 m), or (10 mm) maximum.
B. Variation in Joint Width: Do not vary joint thickness more than (1.5 mm) or 1/4 of nominal joint
width, whichever is less.
C. Variation in Surface Plane: Do not exceed (3 mm in 3 m), (6 mm in 6 m), or (10 mm) maximum
from level or slope indicated.
D. Variation in Plane between Adjacent Units (Lipping): Do not exceed (0.8-mm) difference
between planes of adjacent units.
3.5 INSTALLATION OF STONE DIRECTLY OVER CONCRETE
A. Saturate concrete with clean water several hours before placing setting bed. Remove surface
water about one hour before placing setting bed.
B. Apply mortar-bed bond coat to damp concrete and broom to provide an even coating that
completely covers the concrete. Do not exceed (1.5-mm) thickness. Limit area of mortar-bed
bond coat to avoid its drying out before placing setting bed.
1. Place reinforcing wire mesh over concrete, lapped at joints by at least one full mesh and
supported so mesh becomes embedded in middle of setting bed. Hold edges back from
vertical surfaces about (13 mm).
C. Apply mortar bed immediately after applying mortar-bed bond coat. Spread, tamp, and screed to
uniform thickness at elevations required for setting stone to finished elevations indicated.
D. Mix and place only that amount of mortar bed that can be covered with stone before initial set.
Cut back, bevel edge, and discard material that has reached initial set before stone can be
placed.
E. Place stone before initial set of mortar occurs. Immediately before placing stone on setting bed,
apply uniform (1.5-mm-) thick bond coat to bed or to back of each stone unit.
F. Tamp and beat stone with a wooden block or rubber mallet to obtain full contact with setting bed
and to bring finished surfaces within indicated tolerances. Set each unit in a single operation
before initial set of mortar; do not return to areas already set and disturb stone for purposes of
realigning finished surfaces or adjusting joints.
3.6 STONE THRESHOLD INSTALLATION
A. At locations adjacent to stone flooring, install stone thresholds in same type of setting bed as
abutting stone flooring unless otherwise indicated.
1. Set thresholds in thin-set, latex-portland cement mortar to comply with ANSI A108.5 at
locations where mortar bed would otherwise be exposed above other adjacent paving and
flooring.
B. At locations not adjacent to stone flooring, install stone thresholds in thin-set, latex-portland
cement mortar to comply with ANSI A108.5
3.7 STONE STAIR TREAD AND RISER INSTALLATION
A. Install stone stair treads and risers to comply with "Installation of Stone Directly over Concrete"
Article.
B. Install stone stair treads and risers in thin-set, latex-portland cement mortar to comply with
ANSI A108.5.
3.8 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Remove and replace stonework of the following description:
1. Broken, chipped, stained, or otherwise damaged stone. Stone may be repaired if methods
and results are approved by Architect.
2. Defective joints.
3. Stone paving, flooring, and joints not matching approved Samples and mockups.
4. Stonework not complying with other requirements indicated.
B. Replace in a manner that result in stonework matching approved Samples and mockups,
complying with other requirements, and showing no evidence of replacement.
C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean stonework as work progresses. Remove mortar fins and smears
before tooling joints.
D. Clean stonework after setting and grouting are complete. Use procedures recommended by
stone fabricator for types of application.
E. Apply sealer to cleaned stonework according to sealer manufacturer's written instructions.
3.9 PROTECTION
A. Prohibit traffic from installed stone for a minimum of 72 hours.
B. Protect installed stonework during construction with nonstaining kraft paper. Where adjoining
areas require construction work access, cover stonework with a minimum of (20-mm) untreated
plywood over non-staining kraft paper.
SUBJECT: SECTION 09680 - CARPET
SECTION 09680
CARPET
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Tufted carpet.
2. Carpet cushion.
1. Division 1 Section "LEED Requirements" for additional LEED requirements.

2. Division 1 Section "Selective Demolition" for removing existing floor coverings.
3. Division 9 Section "Resilient Floor Tile and Resilient Wall Base and Accessories" for
resilient wall base and accessories installed with carpet.
4. Division 9 Section "Carpet Tile."
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following, including installation recommendations for each type of
substrate:
1. Carpet: For each type indicated. Include manufacturer's written data on physical
characteristics, durability, and fade resistance.
2. Carpet Cushion: For each type indicated. Include manufacturer's written data on
physical characteristics and durability.
B. Shop Drawings: Show the following:
1. Columns, doorways, enclose walls or partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations where
cutouts are required in carpet.
2. Existing flooring materials to be removed.
3. Existing flooring materials to remain.
4. Carpet type, color, and dye lot.
5. Locations where dye lot changes occur.
6. Seam locations, types, and methods.
7. Type of subfloor.
8. Type of installation.
9. Pattern type, repeat size, location, direction, and starting point.
10. Pile direction.
11. Type, color, and location of insets and borders.
12. Type, color, and location of edge, transition, and other accessory strips.
13. Transition details to other flooring materials.
14. Type of carpet cushion.
MHA – TECH. SPECIFICATION – 1706 – 04/02/2015 SECTION 09680 – CARPET 1/9

C. Samples: For each of the following products and for each color and texture required. Label
each Sample with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and designation
indicated on Drawings and in schedules.
1. Carpet: 12-inch- (300-mm-) square Sample.

2. Exposed Edge, Transition, and other Accessory Stripping: 12-inch- (300-mm-) long
Samples.
3. Carpet Cushion: 6-inch- (150-mm-) square Sample.
4. Carpet Seam: 6-inch (150-mm) Sample.
5. Mitered Carpet Border Seam: 12-inch- (300-mm-) square Sample. Show carpet
pattern alignment.
D. LEED Submittals:
1. Credit EQ 4.3: Manufacturers' product data for carpet and carpet cushion, carpet and
installation adhesive or carpet, carpet cushion, and installation adhesive], including
printed statement of VOC content.
E. Product Schedule: For carpet and carpet cushion. Use same designations indicated on
Drawings.
F. Qualification Data: For Installer.
G. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a

qualified testing agency.
H. Maintenance Data: For carpet to include in maintenance manuals. Include the following:
1. Methods for maintaining carpet, including cleaning and stain-removal products and
procedures and manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule.
2. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to
carpet and carpet cushion.
I. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is certified by the Floor Covering

Installation Board or who can demonstrate compliance with its certification program
requirements.
B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide products with the critical radiant flux

classification indicated in Part 2, as determined by testing identical products per
ASTM E 648 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction.
C. Mockups: Before installing carpet, build mockups to verify selections made under sample
submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and
execution.
D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements

in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination."

E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements

in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and
procedures related to carpet installation including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Review delivery, storage, and handling procedures.

2. Review ambient conditions and ventilation procedures.
A. Comply with CRI 104, Section 5, "Storage and Handling."
A. Comply with CRI 104, Section 7.2, "Site Conditions; Temperature and Humidity" and
Section 7.12, "Ventilation."
B. Environmental Limitations: Do not install carpet and carpet cushion until wet work in spaces
is complete and dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the
levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.
C. Do not install carpet and carpet cushion over concrete slabs until slabs have cured, are
sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive, and have pH range recommended by carpet
manufacturer.
D. Where demountable partitions or other items are indicated for installation on top of carpet,
install carpet before installing these items.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty for Carpet: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to
repair or replace components of carpet installation that fail in materials or workmanship
within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet due to unusual traffic,
failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse.
2. Failures include, but are not limited to, more than 10 percent loss of face fiber, edge
raveling, snags, runs, loss of tuft bind strength, excess static discharge, and
delamination.
3. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special Warranty for Carpet Cushion: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer
agrees to repair or replace components of carpet cushion installation that fail in materials or
workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty includes consequent removal and replacement of carpet and accessories.

2. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet cushion due to unusual
traffic, failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse.
3. Failure includes, but is not limited to, permanent indentation or compression.
4. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below, before installation begins, that match products
installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with
labels describing contents.

1. Carpet: Full-width rolls equal to 5 percent of amount installed for each type indicated,
but not less than 10 sq. yd. (8.3 sq. m).
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:
a. MILLIKEN
b. MADA Carpets
c. BRINTONS Carpets
2.2 TUFTED CARPET
A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1. Fine Carpets
a. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

b. Pattern: Match Architect's samples.
c. Source: Brintons Fine Carpets
C. Fiber Content: 80% wool and 20% nylon.
D. Fiber Type: As indicated on Drawing.
E. Pile Characteristic: Level-loop, Cut, Cut-and-loop, Multilevel-loop, Level tip shear, Random
shear, Frieze or Sculptured pile.
F. Yarn Twist: (TPCM).
G. Yarn Count: As indicated on Drawing.
H. Density: As indicated on Drawing.
I. Pile Thickness: per ASTM D 6859.
J. Stitches: As indicated on Drawing.
K. Gage: As indicated on Drawing.
L. Face Weight: As indicated on Drawing.
M. Total Weight: As indicated on Drawing.
N. Primary Backing: Manufacturer's standard material.
O. Secondary Backing: Manufacturer's standard material.

P. Backcoating: Manufacturer's standard material.
Q. Backing System: As indicated on Drawing.
R. Width: 12 feet (3.7 m), 6 feet (1.8 m), 13.5 feet (4.1 m) or 15 feet (4.6 m)
S. Applied Soil-Resistance Treatment: Manufacturer's standard material.
T. Antimicrobial Treatment: Manufacturer's standard material.
U. Performance Characteristics: As follows:
1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm or 0.22 W/sq. cm.
2. Dry Breaking Strength: Not less than 100 lbf (445 N) per ASTM D 2646.
3. Tuft Bind: Not less than 3 lbf (13 N), 5 lbf (22 N), 6.2 lbf (28 N), 8 lbf (36 N) or 10 lbf
(45 N) per ASTM D 1335.
4. Delamination: Not less than 2.5 lbf/in. (12 N/mm), 3.5 lbf/in. (15 N/mm) or 4 lbf/in.
(18 N/mm) per ASTM D 3936.
5. Resistance to Insects: Comply with AATCC 24.
6. Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC): As indicated on Drawing.
7. Colorfastness to Crocking: Not less than 4, wet and dry, per AATCC 165.
8. Colorfastness to Light: Not less than 4 after 40 or 60 AFU (AATCC fading units) per
AATCC 16, Option E.
9. Antimicrobial Activity: Not less than 2-mm halo of inhibition for gram-positive
bacteria; not less than 1-mm halo of inhibition for gram-negative bacteria; no fungal
growth; per AATCC 174.
10. Electrostatic Propensity: Less than 3.5 or 2 kV per AATCC 134.
11. VOC Limits: Provide carpet that complies with the following limits for VOC content
when tested according to ASTM D 5116:
a. Total VOCs: 0.5 mg/sq. m x h.

b. 4-PC (4-Phenylcyclohexene): 0.05 mg/sq. m x h.
c. Formaldehyde: 0.05 mg/sq. m x h.
d. Styrene: 0.4 mg/sq. m x h.
2.3 WOVEN CARPET

1. Fine Carpets
a. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

b. Pattern: Match Architect's samples.
c. Source: Brintons Fine Carpets
C. Fiber Content: 80% wool and 20% nylon.
D. Face Construction: Axminster, Wilton or Velvet.
E. Pile Characteristic: Level-loop, Cut or Cut-and-loop pile.
F. Yarn Twist: (TPCM).
G. Yarn Count: As indicated on Drawing.

H. Density: As indicated on Drawing.
I. Pile Thickness: As indicated on Drawing.
J. Rows: As indicated on Drawing.
K. Pitch: As indicated on Drawing.
L. Face Weight: As indicated on Drawing.
M. Total Weight: As indicated on Drawing.
N. Backing: Manufacturers standard.
O. Applied Soil-Resistance Treatment: Manufacturer's standard material.
P. Performance Characteristics: As follows:
2. Dry Breaking Strength: Not less than 100 lbf (445 N) per ASTM D 2646.
3. Resistance to Insects: Comply with AATCC 24.
5. Colorfastness to Crocking: Not less than 4, wet and dry, per AATCC 165.
6. Colorfastness to Light: Not less than 4 after 40 or 60 AFU (AATCC fading units) per
AATCC 16, Option E.
7. Electrostatic Propensity: Less than 3.5 or 2 kV per AATCC 134.
8. VOC Limits: Provide carpet that complies with the following limits for VOC content

b. 4-PC (4-Phenylcyclohexene): 0.05 mg/sq. m x h.
c. Formaldehyde: 0.05 mg/sq. m x h.
d. Styrene: 0.4 mg/sq. m x h.
2.4 CARPET CUSHION

1. Brintons Fine Carpets
2. MILLIKEN
3. MADA
C. Traffic Classification: CCC Class I, moderate; II, heavy or III, extra-heavy traffic.
D. Fiber Cushion: Rubberized hair, mothproofed and sterilized; Rubberized jute, mothproofed
and sterilized; Synthetic or Resinated, recycled textile.
1. Weight: As indicated on Drawing.

2. Thickness: As indicated on Drawing, plus 5 percent maximum.
3. Density: As indicated on Drawing.
E. Rubber Cushion: Flat, Rippled waffle, Textured flat or Reinforced.

1. Weight: As indicated on Drawing.

2. Thickness: As indicated on Drawing. plus 5 percent maximum.
3. Compression Resistance: As indicated on Drawing, at 25 or 65 percent per
ASTM D 3676.
F. Polyurethane-Foam Cushion: Grafted prime, Densified, Bonded or Mechanically frothed.
1. Compression Force Deflection at 65 Percent: As indicated on Drawing.

2. Thickness: As indicated on Drawing.
G. Performance Characteristics: As follows:
3. VOC Limits: Provide carpet cushion that complies with the following limits for VOC
content when tested according to ASTM D 5116:

b. BHT (Butylated Hydroxytoluene): 0.30 mg/sq. m x h.
c. 4-PC (4-Phenylcyclohexene): 0.05 mg/sq. m x h.
d. Formaldehyde: 0.05 mg/sq. m x h.
2.5 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES
A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based

formulation provided or recommended by carpet cushion manufacturer.
B. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining type to suit products and subfloor

conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet and is
recommended or provided by carpet and carpet cushion manufacturers.
1. VOC Limits: Provide adhesives that comply with the following limits for VOC content

b. Formaldehyde: 0.05 mg/sq. m x h.
c. 2-Ethyl-1-Hexanol: 3.00 mg/sq. m x h.
C. Tackless Carpet Stripping: Water-resistant plywood, in strips as required to match cushion

thickness and that comply with CRI 104, Section 12.2.
D. Seam Adhesive: Hot-melt adhesive tape or similar product recommended by carpet

manufacturer for sealing and taping seams and butting cut edges at backing to form secure
seams and to prevent pile loss at seams.
E. Metal Edge Strips: Extruded aluminum with mill finish of width shown, of height required to
protect exposed edge of carpet, and of maximum lengths to minimize running joints.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and

other conditions affecting carpet performance. Examine carpet for type, color, pattern, and
potential defects.
B. Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710 and the following:
1. Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other
materials that may interfere with adhesive bond. Determine adhesion and dryness
characteristics by performing bond and moisture tests recommended by
carpet cushion manufacturer.
2. Subfloor finishes comply with requirements specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-
Place Concrete" for slabs receiving carpet.
3. Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits.
C. For wood subfloors, verify the following:
1. Underlayment over subfloor complies with requirements specified in Division 6

Section "Rough Carpentry."
2. Underlayment surface is free of irregularities and substances that may interfere with
adhesive bond or show through surface.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 7.3, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation," and with
carpet manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates.
B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written

instructions, to fill cracks, holes, depressions, and protrusions in substrates. Fill or level
cracks, holes and depressions 1/8 inch (3 mm) wide or wider, and protrusions more than
1/32 inch (0.8 mm), unless more stringent requirements are required by manufacturer's
written instructions.
C. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible
with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use
mechanical methods recommended in writing by carpet cushion manufacturer.
D. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with CRI 104 and carpet and carpet cushion manufacturers' written installation
instructions for the following:
1. Direct-Glue-Down Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 9, "Direct Glue-Down

Installation."
2. Double-Glue-Down Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 10, "Double Glue-
Down Installation."
3. Carpet with Attached-Cushion Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 11,
"Attached-Cushion Installations."
4. Preapplied Adhesive Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 11.4, "Pre-Applied
Adhesive Systems (Peel and Stick)."
5. Hook-and-Loop Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 11.5, "Hook and Loop
Technology."
6. Stretch-in Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 12, "Stretch-in Installation."
7. Stair Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 13, "Carpet on Stairs" for stretch-in
or glue-down installation.

B. Comply with carpet manufacturer's written recommendations and Shop Drawings for seam
locations and direction of carpet; maintain uniformity of carpet direction and lay of pile. At
doorways, center seams under the door in closed position.
1. Bevel adjoining border edges at seams with hand shears or Level adjoining border
edges.
C. Do not bridge building expansion joints with carpet.
D. Cut and fit carpet to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture
including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges
as recommended by carpet manufacturer.
E. Extend carpet into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions,
removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings.
F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future
cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent,
nonstaining marking device.
G. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders to comply with CRI 104, Section 15, "Patterned
Carpet Installations" and with carpet manufacturer's written recommendations.
H. Comply with carpet cushion manufacturer's written recommendations.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTING
A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet:
1. Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner
recommended by carpet manufacturer.
2. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet surface.
3. Vacuum carpet using commercial machine with face-beater element.
B. Protect installed carpet to comply with CRI 104, Section 16, "Protection of Indoor
Installations."
C. Protect carpet against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment
and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated
or recommended in writing by carpet manufacturer and carpet cushion and adhesive
manufacturers.

SUBJECT: SECTION 09900 – PAINTS AND COATINGS
SECTION 09900
PAINTS AND COATINGS

(MPI Architectural Painting Manual)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 Description:
1. Section Includes: All labor, materials, tools and other equipment, services and supervision
required to complete all exterior and interior painting and decorating work as indicated on Finish
Schedules and to the full extent of the drawings and specifications.
2. Works under this contract shall also include, but not necessarily be limited to:
a. High pressure washing and abrasive blasting in accordance with the requirements of
Section [insert appropriate specification section number].
b. Surface preparation of substrates as required for acceptance of painting, including
cleaning, small crack repair, patching, caulking, and making good surfaces and areas to
the limits defined under MPI preparation requirements.
c. Surface preparation and prime painting surfaces for wall coverings prior to installation in
accordance with MPI and wall covering manufacturer’s requirements.
d. Specific pre-treatments noted herein or specified in the MPI Architectural Painting
Specification Manual.
e. Priming (except where pre-primed with an approved primer under other Sections of work)
and painting of structural steel, miscellaneous metal, and ornamental metal and primed
steel equipment.
f. Priming and back-priming of wood materials as noted herein or specified in the MPI
Architectural Painting Specification Manual.
g. Painting of all semi concealed areas (e.g. inside of light troughs and valances, behind
grilles, and projecting edges above and below sight lines).
h. Painting of roof vent flashings in accordance with the requirements of Section 07600.
i. Stencil painting (e.g. locker numbers in tenant storage rooms).
j. Zone and traffic marking (e.g. parking lines and numbers, direction arrows, small car,
barrier free accessible and visitor parking bay designations, speed bump and pedestrian
walkway demarcation, overhead height restrictions, etc. on exterior (asphalt and/or
concrete) and interior (asphalt and/or concrete) surfaces except where such work is part
of asphalt or concrete paving specification work.
k. Painting and finishing of all exposed to view elevator equipment and components (i.e.
doors and door frames) unless pre-finished.
l. Painting of exposed to view mechanical (heating, ventilating and plumbing) services and
equipment, e.g., ducts, sprinkler piping, etc., and electrical work to extent noted on Finish
Schedule unless pre-finished.
m. Re-painting of existing surfaces and finishes when adjacent to new painting work where
applicable including surface preparation, prime and finish coats in accordance with MPI
Repainting requirements.
n. Provision of safe and adequate ventilation as required over and above temporary
ventilation supplied by others, where toxic and/or volatile / flammable materials are being
used.
3. Refer to drawings and schedules (e.g., Finish Schedule) for type, location and extent of finishes
required and includes all touch-ups and field painting necessary to complete work shown,
scheduled or specified.
4. This Section along with the drawings forms part of the Contract documents and are to be read,
interpreted and coordinated with all other parts, including.
MHA – TECH. SPECIFICATION – 1706 – 04/02/2015 SECTION 09900 – PAINTS AND COATINGS 1 / 29
5. Division 0, Section 00700 - General Conditions and Section 00800 - Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 - General Requirements form an integral part of this Section of Work. Painting
contractor shall refer to these and all other related parts.
1.2 Related Sections:
1. Unless otherwise noted, the following work or conditions are not included under this Section of
work:
NOTES:
1. Delete, revise or add to example selections listed below as required. Also list here any specific exclusion normally
assumed to be part of the painting work. Coordinate items with other Sections of Work in the Project Manual.
2. Work included in other sections may be indicated by listing appropriate sections as below:
Section 01500 - Temporary Facilities and Controls (temporary heat, lighting, scaffolds, etc.)
Section 01575 - Environmental Controls and Procedures (waste management and disposal)
Section 02740 - Asphalt Paving (traffic lines and markings)
Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete (special finishes)
Section 04200 - Masonry (sealers over concrete or clay units)
Section 05120 - Structural Steel (shop primers and pre-finishing if applicable)
Section 05210 - Steel Joists (shop primers)
Section 05300 - Metal Decking (shop coatings)
Section 05500 - Miscellaneous Metal Fabrications (shop primers and pre-finishing if applicable)
Section 05510 - Custom Metalwork (shop primers and pre-finishing if applicable)
Section 06200 - Finish Carpentry (priming and finishing)
Section 06400 - Architectural Woodwork (priming and finishing)
Section 08210 - Wood Doors and Frames (pre-finishing)
Section 09720 - Wall Coverings
Section 09915 - Exterior Repainting
Section 09920 - Interior Repainting
Section 09970 - Electrostatic Painting
Section (03655) (09995) - Abrasive Blasting
Division 15 - Mechanical (painting, stenciling, banding of mechanical systems)
Division 16 - Electrical (painting, stenciling, banding of electrical systems)
3. Alternately, work included in other sections may be indicated by general statements as below:
a. Temporary heat and light, scaffolding and platforms, housekeeping services when
provided as specified under Section 01500.
b. Condition of substrates, correction of defects and deficiencies in substrates which may
adversely affect painting work, except for minimal work performed by this trade and
preparation of surfaces to receive paint and finishes under this section of work.
c. Abrasive blasting, shop cleaning, and shop priming including site touch-ups, and shop
painting when applicable, of structural steel, metal joists and decking, miscellaneous
metal, ornamental metal and steel equipment as specified under Sections [inserts
appropriate section numbers].
d. Removal of shop coatings, cleaning of surfaces and re-applying damaged and/or non-
conforming shop coats of paint, other than minimal spot touch-up.
e. Shop priming (and shop or pre-painting when applicable) of metal and wood doors,
frames and windows including fittings as specified under Section [insert appropriate
section number].
f. Painting of copper, aluminum, stainless steel, nickel, bronze or brass surfaces, unless
otherwise specified herein.
g. Painting of materials and equipment off-site, e.g. pre-finishing millwork, etc.
h. Zone and traffic markings, e.g., parking bay lines and numbers, small car, barrier free
accessible and visitor parking bay designations, speed bumps, overhead height
restrictions, pedestrian walkway demarcation, etc. on interior (e.g. concrete) and exterior
(e.g. asphalt and/or concrete) surfaces as specified under Section.

i. Game line markings as specified under Section [insert appropriate section number].
j. Paint identification of equipment and services and hazards to safety.
k. Tenant improvement painting except for prime coat.
l. Applied finishes (e.g. wall fabrics) including surface preparation as specified under
Section [insert appropriate section number].
m. Re-painting of existing surfaces and finishes including surface preparation, prime and
finish coats in accordance with MPI Repainting Manual requirements (as specified under
Section [insert appropriate section number]).
n. Painting of mechanical (heating, ventilating and plumbing services and equipment) and
electrical work including color coding, stenciling and banding.
1.3 Pricing:
1. Provide Unit Prices for the following items and indicate same on appropriate Bid Form page.
a. For painting of gypsum board (wall) surfaces including surface preparation using
Premium Grade INT 9.2A, Latex with G3 (eggshell) finish, based on cost per square
[meter] [foot].
2. Provide Separate Prices for the following items and indicate same on appropriate Bid Form page.
a. For surface preparation and prime coat for specified wall fabric.
3. Provide Alternative Prices for the following items and indicate same on appropriate Bid Form
page.
a. For painting of wall surfaces including surface preparation, prime and finish coats in lieu
of wall fabric preparation and installation.
b. For painting of all wood doors and wood frames where applicable in lieu of pre-finishing
doors and frames in accordance with the requirements of Section [insert appropriate
section number].
1.4 References:
1. The latest edition of the following reference standards shall govern all painting work:
a. Architectural Painting Specification Manual by the Master Painters Institute (MPI),

including Identifiers, Evaluation, Systems, Preparation and Approved Product List.
(Hereafter referred to as the MPI Painting Manual) as issued by the local MPI Accredited
Quality Assurance Association having jurisdiction.
b. Test Method for Measuring Total Volatile Organic Compound Content of Consumer
Products, Method 24 (for Surface Coatings) of the Environmental Protection Agency
(EPA).
c. National Fire Code of Canada.
1.5 Quality Assurance:
1. This Contractor shall have a minimum of five (5) years proven satisfactory experience and shall
show proof before commencement of work that he will maintain a qualified crew of painters
throughout the duration of the work. When requested, Contractor shall provide a list of the last
three comparable jobs including, name and location, specifying authority / project manager, start /
completion dates and value of the painting work.
2. Only qualified journeypersons, as defined by local jurisdiction shall be engaged in painting and
decorating work. Apprentices may be employed provided they work under the direct supervision
of a qualified journeyperson in accordance with trade regulations.
3. All materials, preparation and workmanship shall conform to requirements of the latest edition of
the Architectural Painting Specification Manual by the Master Painters Institute (MPI) (hereafter
referred to as the MPI Painting Manual) as issued by the local MPI Accredited Quality Assurance
Association having jurisdiction.
4. All paint manufacturers and products used shall be as listed under the Approved Product List
section of the MPI Painting Manual.
5. All painting and decorating work shall be inspected by a Paint Inspection Agency (inspector)
acceptable to the specifying authority and the local MPI Accredited Quality Assurance
Association. The painting contractor shall notify the Paint Inspection Agency a minimum of one
week prior to commencement of work and provide a copy of the project painting specification,
plans and elevation drawings (including pertinent details) as well as a Finish Schedule.
6. All surfaces requiring painting shall be inspected by the Paint Inspection Agency who shall
notify the Consultant and General Contractor in writing of any defects or problems, prior to
commencing painting work, or after the prime coat shows defects in the substrate.
7. Where “special” painting, coating or decorating system applications (i.e. non-MPI listed products
or systems) are to be used, the paint or coating manufacturer shall provide as part of this work,
certification of all surfaces and conditions for specific paint or coating system application as well
as on site supervision, inspection and approval of their paint or coating system application as
required at no additional cost to the Owner.
8. The painting contractor shall receive written confirmation of the specific surface preparation
procedures and primers used for all fabricated steel items from the fabricator / supplier to
ascertain appropriate and manufacturer compatible finish coat materials to be used before
painting any such work.
1.6 Regulatory Requirements:
1. Conform to the latest edition of Industrial Health and Safety Regulations issued by applicable
authorities having jurisdiction in regard to site safety (ladders, scaffolding, ventilation, etc.).
2. Conform to requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction in regard to the storage, mixing,
application and disposal of all paint and related waste materials. Refer to Waste Management
and Disposal.
3. Notify the Paint Inspection Agency on award of contract and make application for assignment of
an Inspector using appropriate forms supplied by the Agency as well as provide a copy of the
project painting specification, drawings, color schedule and list of proposed materials for review
purposes prior to commencement of work.
4. Fully cooperates at all times with the requirements of the Paint Inspection Agency in the
performance of their duties, including providing access and assistance as required to complete
inspection work.
1.7 Samples and Mock-Ups:
1. When requested by the Consultant or Paint Inspection Agency, provide duplicate minimum 300
mm (12”) square samples of surfaces or acceptable facsimiles requested painted with specified
paint or coating in colors, gloss / sheen and textures required to MPI Painting Manual standards
for review and approval. When approved, samples shall become acceptable standard of quality
for appropriate on-site surface with one of each sample retained on-site.
2. When requested by the Consultant or Paint Inspection Agency, prepare and paint designated
surface, area, room or item (in each color scheme) to requirements specified herein, with
specified paint or coating showing selected colors, gloss / sheen, textures and workmanship to
MPI Painting Manual standards for review and approval. When approved, surface, area, room
and/or items shall become acceptable standard of finish quality and workmanship for similar on-
site work.
1.8 Submittals:
1. All submittals shall be in accordance with the requirements of Section 01300 - Submittals.
2. Submit consent of surety with Bid Submission as proof of ability to supply a 100% two (2) year
Maintenance Bond, if an MPI Accredited Quality Assurance Association’s guarantee option is not
used.
3. If requested, submit a list of all painting materials to the Consultant and the Paint Inspection
Agency for review prior to ordering materials. If requested, provide an invoice list of all paint
materials ordered for project work to Paint Inspection Agency indicating manufacturer, types and
quantities for verification and compliance with specification and design requirements.
4. Submit two sets of Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) prior to commencement of work for
review and for posting at job site as required.
5. If requested, submit work schedule for various stages of work when painting occupied areas for
the Consultant’s review and Owner’s approval.
6. At project completion provide an itemized list complete with manufacturer, paint type and color
coding for all colors used for Owner’s later use in maintenance.
7. At project completion provide properly packaged maintenance materials as noted herein and
obtain a signed receipt.
1.9 Product Delivery, Storage and Handling:
1. Deliver all painting materials in sealed, original labeled containers bearing manufacturer’s name,
brand name, type of paint or coating and color designation, standard compliance, materials
content as well as mixing and/or reducing and application requirements.
2. Store all paint materials in original labeled containers in a secure (lockable), dry, heated and well
ventilated single designated area meeting the minimum requirements of both paint manufacturer
and authorities having jurisdiction and at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 F (7 C). Only
the material had been used on this project are to be stored on site.
3. Where toxic and/or volatile / explosive / flammable materials are being used, provide adequate
fireproof storage lockers and take all necessary precautions and post adequate warnings (e.g. no
smoking) as required.
4. Take all necessary precautionary and safety measures to prevent fire hazards and spontaneous
combustion and to protect the environment from hazard spills. Materials that constitute a fire
hazard (paints, solvents, drop clothes, etc.) shall be stored in suitable closed and rated
containers and removed from the site on a daily basis.
5. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, in regard to the use, handling,
storage and disposal of hazardous materials.
1.10 Scheduling:
NOTE: Delete, revise or add to the example selections below to suit project requirements.
1. Schedule painting operations to prevent disruption of and by other trades.
2. Schedule painting operations in occupied facilities to prevent disruption of occupants in and about
the building. Painting shall be carried out [after facility working hours] [during silent hours] [on
weekends] in accordance with Owner’s operating requirements. Schedule work such that painted
surfaces will have dried before occupants are affected. Obtain written authorization from
Consultant / Owner for changes in work schedule.
1.11 Project / Site Requirements:
1. UNLESS specifically pre-approved by the specifying body, Paint Inspection Agency and the
applied product manufacturer, perform no painting or decorating work when the ambient air and
substrate temperatures are below 50 F (10 C) for both interior and exterior work.
2. Perform no exterior painting work unless environmental conditions are within MPI and paint
manufacturer’s requirements or until adequate weather protection is provided. Where required,
suitable weatherproof covering and sufficient heating facilities shall be in place to maintain
minimum ambient air and substrate temperatures for 24 hours before, during and after paint
application.
3. Perform no interior painting or decorating work unless adequate continuous ventilation and
sufficient heating facilities are in place to maintain ambient air and substrate temperatures above
minimum requirements for 24 hours before, during and after paint application. Provide
supplemental ventilating and heating equipment if ventilation and heating from existing system is
inadequate to meet minimum requirements.
4. Perform no painting or decorating work when the relative humidity is above 85% or when the dew
point is less than 5 F (3 C) variance between the air / surface temperature.
5. Perform no painting or decorating work when the maximum moisture content of the substrate
exceeds:
a. 15% for wood.

b. 12 % for plaster and gypsum board.
6. Conduct all moisture tests using a properly calibrated electronic Moisture Meter, except test
concrete floors for moisture using a simple cover patch test.
7. Test concrete, masonry and plaster surfaces for alkalinity as required.
Note: Concrete and masonry surfaces must be installed at least 28 days prior to painting and decorating work and
must be visually dry on both sides.
8. Apply paint only to dry, clean, properly cured and adequately prepared surfaces in areas where
dust is no longer generated by construction activities such that airborne particles will not affect
the quality of finished surfaces.
9. Perform no painting or decorating work unless a minimum lighting level of 323 Lux (30 foot
candles) is provided on surfaces to be painted or decorated. Adequate lighting facilities shall be
provided by the General Contractor.
1.12 Maintenance Materials:
1. At project completion provide [4 liters (1 gallon) of each type and color of paint from same
production run (batch mix) used in unopened cans] [full unopened cans of surplus paint], properly
labeled and identified for Owner’s later use in maintenance. Store where directed.
1.13 Waste Management and Disposal:
1. Paint, stain and wood preservative finishes and related materials (thinners, solvents, etc.) are
regarded as hazardous products and are subject to regulations for disposal. Obtain information
on these controls from applicable [Provincial] [State] [Local] government departments having
jurisdiction.
2. All waste materials shall be separated and recycled. Where paint recycling is available, collect
waste paint by type and provide for delivery to recycling or collection facility. Materials that
cannot be reused must be treated as hazardous waste and disposed of in an appropriate

manner.
3. Place materials defined as hazardous or toxic waste, including used sealant and adhesive tubes
and containers, in containers or areas designated for hazardous waste.
4. To reduce the amount of contaminants entering waterways, sanitary/storm drain systems or into
the ground the following procedures shall be strictly adhered to:
a. Retain cleaning water for water based materials to allow sediments to be filtered out. In
no case shall equipment be cleaned using free draining water.
b. Retain cleaners, thinners, solvents and excess paint and place in designated containers
and ensure proper disposal.
c. Return solvent and oil soaked rags used during painting operations for contaminant
recovery, proper disposal, or appropriate cleaning and laundering.
d. Dispose of contaminants in an approved legal manner in accordance with hazardous
waste regulations.
e. Empty paint cans are to be dry prior to disposal or recycling (where available).
f. Close and seal tightly partly used cans of materials including sealant and adhesive
containers and store protected in well ventilated fire-safe area at moderate temperature.
5. Set aside and protect surplus and uncontaminated finish materials not required by the Owner and
deliver or arrange collection for verifiable re-use or re-manufacturing.
1.14 Guarantee:
1. Furnish either the local MPI Accredited Quality Assurance Association’s two (2) year guarantee,
or, alternatively, a 100% two (2) year Maintenance Bond - both in accordance with MPI Painting
Manual requirements. The Maintenance Bond shall warrant that all painting work has been
performed in accordance with MPI Painting Manual requirements.
2. All painting and decorating work shall be in accordance with MPI Painting Manual requirements
and shall be inspected by the local MPI Accredited Quality Assurance Association’s Paint
Inspection Agency (inspector), whether using either the MPI Accredited Quality Assurance
Association’s guarantee, or the Maintenance Bond option. The cost for such inspections, and for
either the local MPI Accredited Quality Assurance Association’s Guarantee, or the Maintenance
Bond, shall be included in the Base Bid Price.
3. Painting and decorating Subcontractors choosing the Maintenance Bond option shall provide
maintenance bond consent from a reputable surety company licensed to do business in Canada.
Cash or certified checks are not acceptable in lieu of surety consent.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 Materials:
1. Only materials (primers, paints, coatings, varnishes, stains, lacquers, fillers, etc.) listed in the
latest edition of the MPI Approved Product List (APL) are acceptable for use on this project. All
such material shall be from a single manufacturer for each system used.
2. Other materials such as linseed oil, shellac, thinners, solvents, etc. shall be the highest quality
product of an MPI listed manufacturer and shall be compatible with paint materials being used as
required.
3. All materials used shall be lead and mercury free and shall have low VOC content where
possible.
4. Where required, use only materials having a minimum MPI “Environmentally Friendly” [E1] [E2]
[E3] rating based on VOC (EPA Method 24) content levels.
5. Where indoor air quality (odour) is an issue, use only MPI listed materials having a minimum [E2]
[E3] rating.
6. [Where required to meet LEED (Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design) program
requirements, use only MPI listed materials having an “L” rating designation.]
NOTES – ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES:
1. The use of water borne versus oil based paints and coatings require careful evaluation. The
release of VOC’s and solvent vapours during painting and cleanup, particularly in confined areas and
where such vapours may prove offensive to individuals in an occupied facility are a consideration, as
well as the oft forgotten residue flushed down the drain during water-borne paint cleanup. Any
evaluation must be carefully and dispassionately considered based on actual VOC content of the
product used and that released over the life cycle term, on actual site conditions and on long-term
durability and life cycle costing requirements.
2. In assessing the requirements for selection of environmentally friendly water borne or oil based
paint product, total VOC content and life cycle / durability must be considered. Refer to MPI Approved
Products listing for the VOC content level of paint products and to the MPI website (www.paintinfo.com)
for current information.
3. Specifying authorities should also be aware that the current range of ecologo paint products is very
limited and should not be used as selection criteria.
4. From an environmental impact point of view, tints are likely the component with the greatest
environmental impact and health risks. For this reason, pastel shades may be more preferable to use
then more heavily saturated colours.
7. All paint materials shall have good flowing and brushing properties and shall dry or cure free of
blemishes, sags, air entrapment, etc. Refer to 3.7, Field Quality Control / Standard of
Acceptance requirements.
8. Where required, paints and coatings shall meet flame spread and smoke developed ratings
designated by local Code requirements and/or authorities having jurisdiction.
9. Glass Reflective Beads (for pavement marking): of type suitable for application to a wet paint
surface for light reflectance. Apply beads at a minimum rate of 0.5 kg/l (5 lbs/g) to an MPI listed
white and/or yellow latex or alkyd zone / traffic marking paint.
10. Slip Resistant Additive (SRA): rubber aggregate, clean/washed silica sand or ground walnut
chips (interior dry areas only) for use with or as a component part of paint (usually floor / porch /
stair enamel) on horizontal surfaces as required to provide slip resistance. Where site applied,
material to either mixed into paint (and mixed constantly to keep material in suspension) or
broadcast into first or prime coat as required.
2.2 Equipment:
1. Painting and Decorating Equipment: to best trade standards for type of product and application.
2. Spray Painting Equipment: of ample capacity, suited to the type and consistency of paint or
coating being applied and kept clean and in good working order at all times.
2.3 Mixing and Tinting:
1. Unless otherwise specified herein or pre-approved, all paint shall be ready-mixed and pre-tinted.
Re-mix all paint in containers prior to and during application to ensure break-up of lumps,
complete dispersion of settled pigment, and color and gloss uniformity.
2. Paste, powder or catalyzed paint mixes shall be mixed in strict accordance with manufacturer's
written instructions.
3. Where thinner is used, addition shall not exceed paint manufacturer's recommendations. Do not
use kerosene or any such organic solvents to thin water-based paints.
4. If required, thin paint for spraying according in strict accordance with paint manufacturer's
instructions. If directions are not on container, obtain instructions in writing from manufacturer
and provide copy of instructions to Consultant.
2.4 Finish and Colors:
1. Unless otherwise specified herein, all painting work shall be in accordance with MPI [Custom]
[Premium] Grade finish requirements.
2. Colors shall be as selected by the Consultant from a manufacturer’s full range of colors. [Refer to
Finish Schedule for identification and location of colors.] [A Finish Schedule will be furnished after
award of the Contract.]
NOTES:
1. Note that Finish Schedule should include all exterior and interior painted items (e.g. siding, doors, frames, trim, base,
sills, walls, decks, railings, etc.) and the gloss level. The paint manufacturer and color code number should also be
provided if selected by the Designer.
2. In addition, where more than one color is used on walls within an area this shall also be scheduled.
Generally and unless otherwise specified herein or noted on Finish Schedules the quantity
of colors and finishes shall be based on the following criteria:
NOTES:
1. Delete, revise or add to the following example selections below to suit project requirements.
2. Revise number of colors and schemes to suit project requirements and ensure these items are noted on the Exterior
and Interior Finish Schedules.
3. Exterior colors will be based on [three (3)] base colors and [two (2)] accent colors with a
maximum of [one (1)] deep or bright color. No more than [six (6)] colors will be selected for the
entire project. Note that this does not include pre-finished items by others, e.g. flashings,
aluminum or vinyl windows, aluminum doors, etc.
4. Interior colors will be based on [five (5)] base colors and [three (3)] accent colors with a maximum
of [one (1)] deep or bright color. No more than [eight (8)] colors will be selected for the entire
project and no more than [three (3)] colors will be selected in each area. Note that this does not
include pre-finished items by others, e.g. aluminum or vinyl windows, aluminum doors and
handrails, etc.
5. Interior colors and/or patterns shall be consistent [throughout each unit] with [two (2)] [three (3)]
separate schemes prepared.
6. Unless otherwise noted or scheduled, walls shall be painted the same color within a given area.
7. Ceilings (except those having a spray textured coating) shall be painted [white] [the same color
as walls].
8. Corridors shall be painted [the same color on all floors] [different colors on alternate floors] with
[two (2)] separate [two (2)] color schemes prepared for doors and trim.
9. Designated rooms / spaces shall be painted using different colors or more than one color than
typical rooms in accordance with Finish Schedule requirements with a minimum of [two (2)] colors
required.
10. Except as noted herein or indicated on the Finish Schedule, interior walls and ceiling surfaces
shall be painted in accordance with the following criteria over appropriate prime / sealer coat:
[a. all areas (except as noted): washable latex with G3 (eggshell) finish.]
[b. laundry facilities / rooms, public wash / shower / bathrooms, residential kitchens and
bathrooms and ensuites: [washable latex] [alkyd] with G5 (semi-gloss) finish.]
[c. public change / wash / shower rooms and institutional facility bathing and shower rooms:
epoxy (tile-like) G5 (semi-gloss) finish for wet surfaces.]
[d. public and institutional facility “clean” or “sanitary” areas such as food preparation and
laboratory areas: epoxy (tile-like) G5 (semi-gloss) finish for dry surfaces.]
11. [Doors shall be painted a different color than door frames and trim with walls a different color than
either.] [Doors, frames and trim shall be painted a different color than walls] [The same color as
walls.] Unless otherwise noted or scheduled all doors, frames and trim shall be painted using a
G5 (semi-gloss) finish.
12. Window frames (unless pre-finished) [including trim and sills shall be painted [a different color
than walls] [the same color as walls] [shall be painted a different color than window trim and sills
and a different color than walls]. Unless otherwise noted or scheduled all window frames, trim
and sills shall be painted using a G5 (semi-gloss) finish.
13. Where required by authorities having jurisdiction, exit and vestibule doors shall be painted a
contrasting color to walls and a different color than any other door in the same area.
14. Access doors, prime coated butts and other prime painted hardware (e.g. door closers), registers,
radiators and covers, exposed piping and electrical panels shall be painted to match adjacent
surfaces (i.e. same color, texture and sheen), unless otherwise noted or where pre-finished.
15. Plywood service panels (e.g. electrical, telephone and cable vision panels) including edges shall
be back-primed and painted [flat gray] [to match painted wall mounted on].
16. The inside of light valances shall be painted gloss white.
17. The inside of all duct work behind louvers, grills and diffusers for a minimum of 460 mm (18") or
beyond sight line, whichever is greater, shall be painted using flat black (non-reflecting) paint.
18. Parking bays lines shall be identified with 100 mm (4") wide white or yellow painted lines with
each bay consecutively numbered with 50 mm (2") wide white or yellow painted numbers in
accordance with approved parking layout and/or in accordance with the requirements or
authorities having jurisdiction.
19 Barrier free accessible parking bays and refuge areas shall be identified with appropriate symbol
designation and/or in accordance with the requirements or authorities having jurisdiction.
20. Pedestrian walkways shall be identified with 100 mm (4") wide yellow painted lines at 45 degrees
to path of travel spaced at 450 mm (18") o.c. and/or in accordance with the requirements or
authorities having jurisdiction.
21. Low headroom areas shall be identified with minimum 100 mm (4") wide yellow band on leading
edge marked "CAUTION _ LOW CLEARANCE" in 50 mm (2") high black letters at suitable
intervals and/or in accordance with the requirements or authorities having jurisdiction.
22. Where other methods are not specified (i.e. applied material or nosing) and/or in accordance with
the requirements or authorities having jurisdiction at stairs providing access and exit for persons
with visual impairment, slip resistant paint shall be applied to handrails and treads. Slip resistant
paint shall be of a contrasting color at tactile warning strips at stair treads and landings.
2.5 Gloss / Sheen Ratings:
1. Paint gloss shall be defined as the sheen rating of applied paint, in accordance with the following
MPI values:
Gloss Description Units Units

Level @ 60 degrees @ 85 degrees
G1 Matte or Flat finish 0 to 5 10 max.
G2 Velvet finish 0 to 10 10 to 35
G3 Eggshell finish 10 to 25 10 to 35
G4 Satin finish 20 to 35 35 min.
G5 Semi-Gloss finish 35 to 70
G6 Gloss finish 70 to 85
G7 High-Gloss finish > 85
2. Gloss level ratings of all painted surfaces shall be as specified herein and as noted on Finish
Schedule.
NOTES:
1. A high gloss finish provides more physical and stain resistance with such painted surfaces appearing to have a “hard”
finish. Such glossy finishes, however tend to enhance textures or defects of the surface to which they are applied.
Use of higher gloss finishes should be reviewed from the point of view of excessive surface preparation required
which might not be warranted for the surface to be coated.
2. Unless otherwise approved by the painting inspection agency having jurisdiction, the use of deep colors or high
contrast accent colors will require a minimum of three or more finish coats over primer to achieve satisfactory hiding
results.
3. Caution should be used when specifying deep colors in high traffic areas, regardless of the surface to which these
colors are applied. Machine tinted color in a flat, eggshell, semi-gloss and to some extent high gloss finish will mark
easily and leave an unsightly appearance with loss of sheen and with considerable reduction of abrasion resistance.
In such cases, either a clear urethane or high performance acrylic type of coating over such deep colors may solve
the problem but may also result in a change in hue and where touch-up painting is required the entire surface will
have to be redone from break to break or from corner to corner as spot touch-up will be very noticeable. Refer to MPI
Painting Manual.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 Condition of Surfaces:
1. Prior to commencement of work of this section, thoroughly examine (and test as required) all
conditions and surfaces scheduled to be painted and report in writing to the Contractor and
Consultant any conditions or surfaces that will adversely affect work of this section.
2. No painting work shall commence until all such adverse conditions and defects have been
corrected and surfaces and conditions are acceptable to the Painting Subcontractor and
Inspection Agency.
3. Commencement of work shall not be held to imply acceptance of surfaces except as qualified
herein. Such surfaces as concrete, masonry, structural steel and miscellaneous metal, wood,
gypsum board and plaster, shall not be the responsibility of the Painting Subcontractor.
4. The Painting Subcontractor shall not be responsible for the condition of the substrate or for
correcting defects and deficiencies in the substrate which may adversely affect the painting work
except for minimal work normally performed by the Painting Subcontractor and as indicated
herein. It shall always, however, be the responsibility of the Painting Subcontractor to see that
surfaces are properly prepared before any paint or coating is applied.
3.2 Preparation of Surfaces:
1. Prepare all surfaces in accordance with MPI requirements. Refer to the MPI Painting Manual in
regard to specific requirements [for the following:]
a. environmental conditions.
b. pH testing.
c. acid etching.
d. rust stain removal.
e. asphalt surfaces.
f. vertical and horizontal concrete surfaces.
g. clay and concrete masonry units.
h. structural steel and miscellaneous metals.
i. steel exposed to high heat.
j. galvanized and zinc coated metal.
k. aluminum and copper surfaces.
l. glue laminated beams and columns.
m. dimension and dressed lumber.
n. wood doors.
o. wood paneling and casework.
p. wood decks, floors, stairs and steps.
q. wood shingles and shakes.
r. stucco, plaster and gypsum board.
s. acoustical panels and tiles.
t. canvas and cotton coverings.
u. bituminous coated surfaces.
2. Sand, clean, dry, etch, neutralize and/or test all surfaces under adequate illumination, ventilation
and temperature requirements.
3. Remove and securely store all miscellaneous hardware and surface fittings / fastenings (e.g.
electrical plates, mechanical louvers, door and window hardware (e.g. hinges, knobs, locks, trim,
frame stops), removable rating / hazard / instruction labels, washroom accessories, light fixture
trim, etc. from wall and ceiling surfaces, doors and frames, prior to painting. Carefully clean and
replace all such items upon completion of painting work in each area. Do not use solvent or
reactive cleaning agents on items that will mark or remove finishes (e.g. lacquer finishes). Doors
shall be removed before painting to paint bottom and top edges and then re-hung.
4. Protect all adjacent interior surfaces and areas, including rating and instruction labels on doors,
frames, equipment, piping, etc., from painting operations and damage with drop cloths, shields,
masking, templates, or other suitable protective means and make good any damage caused by
failure to provide such protection.
5. Substrate defects shall be made good and sanded by others ready for painting particularly after
the first coat of paint. Start of finish painting of defective surfaces (e.g. gypsum board) shall
indicate acceptance of substrate and any costs of making good defects shall be borne by the
painter including re-painting of entire defective surface (no touch-up painting).
6. Confirm preparation and primer used with fabricator of steel items. Refer to Quality Assurance.
NOTES:
1. Primers (e.g. alkyd, epoxy, zinc, etc.) require overcoating within manufacturer’s specified time limits. After this time
they may become too hard to facilitate good adhesion. This is particularity important in the selection and use of
primers in the fabrication of structural steel and miscellaneous metal. Shop cleaning procedures, the selection of the
“correct” primer and inspection for such work must be in accordance with MPI Painting Manual requirements.
2. Painting work shall be scheduled before the installation of miscellaneous hardware, surface fittings, fastenings,
fixtures and trim by others including the hanging of doors and installation of door hardware. If such items require the
removal, storage, and reinstallation, the coordination and onus rests with the General Contractor. Extensive touch-up
painting necessary as a result of the installation or re-installation of such fittings by others after painting, shall be
considered as additional services at additional cost to the Owner.
3.3 Application:
1. Do not paint unless substrates are acceptable and/or until all environmental conditions (heating,
ventilation, lighting and completion of other subtrade work) are acceptable for applications of
products.
2. Apply paint or stain in accordance with MPI Painting Manual [Premium] [Custom] Grade finish
requirements.
3. Apply paint and decorating material in a workmanlike manner using skilled and trade qualified
applicators as noted under Quality Assurance.
4. Apply paint and coatings within an appropriate time frame after cleaning when environmental
conditions encourage flash-rusting, rusting, contamination or the manufacturer’s paint
specifications require earlier applications.
5. Painting coats specified are intended to cover surfaces satisfactorily when applied at proper
consistency and in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
6. Tint each coat of paint progressively lighter to enable confirmation of number of coats.
7. Unless otherwise approved by the painting inspection agency, apply a minimum of four coats of
paint where deep or bright colors are used to achieve satisfactory results.
NOTE: Refer to Spec Notes at beginning of 2.5 in regard to the use of deep colors.
8. Sand and dust between each coat to provide an anchor for next coat and to remove defects
visible from a distance up to 1000 mm (39”).
9. Do not apply finishes on surfaces that are not sufficiently dry. Unless manufacturer’s directions
state otherwise, each coat shall be sufficiently dry and hard before a following coat is applied.
10. Prime coat of stain or varnish finishes may be reduced in accordance with manufacturer’s
directions.
11. Paint finish shall continue through behind all wall-mounted items (e.g. chalk and tack boards).
PAINT SYSTEM SPECS NOTES:
1. Select appropriate paint systems for exterior and interior surfaces to be painted and delete all other systems not
required.
2. Insert appropriate gloss level rating (G1, G2, etc.) in place of [insert gloss level]. Refer to MPI Approved Product
Listings to ensure that desired gloss level is available. Specific paint colors and gloss ratings should be indicated on
Finish Schedules for both interior and exterior surfaces.
3. Where different finishes are required under a specific heading, a reference to applicable materials must be inserted
after the finish, e.g.:
EXT 6.3B Alkyd G5 finish for wood doors and frames.

EXT 6.4B Alkyd G4 finish for fascias.
INT 9.2C Latex sealer / alkyd G5 finish for kitchens and bathroom surfaces.
INT 9.2C Latex sealer / alkyd G3 finish for all other surfaces.
4. Where both Custom Grade (typically one primer and one finish coat) and Premium Grade (typically one primer and
two finish coats) systems are used, indicate same on the Finish Schedule or indicate specific system when it differs
from the “typical” grade selected.
5. Where choice of an “Environmentally Friendly” (i.e., low odor / VOC) “green”) product is required, specifier must
consult MPI Product Selection Guide and select system / products having desired E1, E2 or E3 rating. This includes
non-latex / non-water based paints and finishes which meet EPA Method 24 / MPI criteria.
6. For individual product selection and evaluations refer to MPI Painting Manual Approved Product List.
7. For specific surface preparation requirements for each system refer to Chapters 2 (Exterior) and 3 (Interior) of the
MPI Painting Manual.
8. Ensure that shop preparation and shop primers for exterior and interior structural steel and miscellaneous metals are
compatible with field applied coatings. This can be done by incorporating the following notes within each appropriate
steel work specification section.
“Shop primers for all exterior and interior painted steel work shall be of types specified in the painting specification
section. Where non-complying primers are used by the steel fabricator, the fabricator shall completely remove same
from all surfaces and prepare and prime surfaces in accordance with the requirements of Section 09900 for painted
steel work at no additional cost to the Owner or the painter.”
“The Fabricator of structural steel and miscellaneous metal items shall notify the Paint Inspection Agency on award of
contract and provide a written confirmation of preparation procedures and of primers used for all steel items supplied.”
“A third party independent inspection agency may periodically inspect all exterior and interior steel work to be painted
for finish, surface preparation and application of required primers.”
9. For specific surface preparation and paint system selection requirements of previously painted adjacent surfaces refer
to the MPI Repainting Manual.
3.4 Exterior Finish / Coating Systems:
Paint exterior surfaces in accordance with the following MPI Painting Manual requirements:
1. Asphalt Surfaces: (zone / traffic marking for drive and parking areas, etc.)
EXT 2.1A Latex zone / traffic marking finish.

EXT 2.1B Alkyd zone / traffic marking finish.
NOTES:
1. Determine if painting of zone / traffic or game lines on asphalt surfaces is or is not included under work of this section
and ensure this work is coordinated or included in the appropriate section of work. Include the following statements
as appropriate:
2. Painting of zone / traffic line layouts on exterior asphalt surfaces to be (by others) in accordance with requirements of
the MPI Painting Manual, approved drawings and Section [insert appropriate section number].
3. Painting of game line layouts on exterior asphalt surfaces to be (by others) in accordance with the requirements of the
MPI Painting Manual, approved drawings, Section [insert appropriate section number].
2. Concrete Vertical Surfaces: (including horizontal soffits)
EXT 3.1A Latex [insert gloss level] finish (over alkali resistant primer).
EXT 3.1B Latex [insert gloss level] finish over latex [insert texture type] aggregate.
EXT 3.1C Water based light industrial [insert gloss level] coating.
EXT 3.1D Epoxy (over epoxy)
EXT 3.1E Epoxy-modifed latex finish.
EXT 3.1F Elastomeric coating.
EXT 3.1G Water repellent (non-paintable) finish.
EXT 3.1H Water repellent (paintable) finish.
EXT 3.1J Concrete stain finish.
EXT 3.1K Latex [insert gloss level] finish.
EXT 3.1L High-build latex finish.

EXT 3.1M Polyurethane, pigmented finish (over epoxy).
EXT 3.1N Latex [insert gloss level] [insert texture type] aggregate finish.
NOTES:
1. Note that the application of water repellent sealers to exterior concrete surfaces may be by others in accordance with
concrete finishes specification requirements. When such surfaces are also required to be painted after the application
of a water repellent sealer, ensure that a paintable sealer is used. Ensure this work is co-ordinated or included in the
appropriate section of work.
2. When EXT 3.1G, 3.1H or 3.1J systems are not part of the work under this section include the following statement:
“The application of [water repellent sealers][concrete stain] to exterior concrete vertical surfaces shall be done by
others in accordance with the requirements of Section 03300.”
3. Concrete Horizontal Surfaces: (decks, stairs, driveways, parking and court areas, etc.) (SRA
Optional for all these systems)
EXT 3.2A Latex floor paint [gloss] [low gloss] finish.

EXT 3.2B Latex deck coating.
EXT 3.2C Epoxy deck coating, slip resistant.
EXT 3.2D Alkyd floor enamel [insert gloss level] finish.
EXT 3.2E Latex zone / traffic marking finish. [for parking lines, etc]
EXT 3.2F Alkyd zone / traffic marking finish. [for parking lines, etc]
EXT 3.2G Sealer, clear finish.
EXT 3.2H Sealer, clear, water based finish.
EXT 3.2J Concrete stain finish.
SPEC NOTE: Determine if painting of zone / traffic lines on concrete surfaces is or is not included under work of this
section and ensure this work is co-ordinated or included in the appropriate section of work. Note that such
work may be done by others as an extension of asphalt pavement marking work. Include the following
statement as appropriate:
“Painting of zone / traffic line layouts on exterior concrete surfaces to be (by others) in accordance with MPI
Painting Manual requirements, approved drawings and Section [insert appropriate section number].”
4. Cementitious Composition Board Surfaces: (vertical surfaces, horizontal soffits)
EXT 3.3A Latex [insert gloss level] finish.

EXT 3.3B Alkyd [insert gloss level] finish.
EXT 3.3D Epoxy-modifed latex finish.
EXT 3.3E Epoxy finish.
EXT 3.3F Polyurethane, pigmented finish (over epoxy).
EXT 3.3G Latex [insert gloss level] [insert texture type] aggregate finish.
EXT 3.3H High-build latex finish.
EXT 3.3J Latex [insert gloss level] finish (over alkali resistant primer).
5. Clay Masonry Units: (pressed and extruded brick)

EXT 4.1B Latex [insert gloss level] [insert texture type] aggregate finish.
EXT 4.1D Epoxy finish. [for smooth brick]
EXT 4.1F Water repellent (non-paintable) finish.
EXT 4.1G Water repellent (paintable) finish.
EXT 4.1J Polyurethane, pigmented finish (over epoxy).
NOTES:
1. Note that the application of water repellent sealers to exterior clay and concrete masonry surfaces may be by others
in accordance with clay or concrete masonry specification requirements. When such surfaces are also required to be
painted after the application of a water repellent sealer, ensure that a paintable sealer is used. Ensure this work is
coordinated or included in the appropriate section of work.
2. When EXT 4.1F, 4.1G, 4.2H and 4.2J systems are not part of the work under these sections include the following
statement:
“The application of water repellent sealers to exterior clay masonry or concrete masonry surfaces shall be done by
others in accordance with the requirements of Section [insert appropriate section number].”
6. Concrete Masonry Units: (smooth and split face block and brick).
EXT 4.2A Latex [insert gloss level] finish (over latex block filler).
EXT 4.2C Water based light industrial [insert gloss level] coating. [for moderate chemical
resistance]
EXT 4.2D Elastomeric coating.
EXT 4.2G Polyurethane, pigmented finish (over high build epoxy).
EXT 4.2H Water repellent (non-paintable) finish. [not for use on light weight block]
EXT 4.2J Water repellent (paintable) finish. [not for use on light weight block]
EXT 4.2K High-build latex finish.
EXT 4.2L Latex [insert gloss level] finish (over alkali resistant primer).
NOTE: When EXT 4.2H or 4.2I systems are not part of the work under this section include the following statement:
“The application of water repellent sealers to exterior concrete masonry surfaces shall be done by others in
accordance with the requirements of Section 04200.”
7. Structural Steel and Metal Fabrications:
EXT 5.1A Quick dry enamel [insert gloss level] finish.

EXT 5.1B Water based light industrial [insert gloss level] coating (over inorganic zinc
primer).
EXT 5.1C Water based light industrial [insert gloss level] coating (over alkyd primer).
EXT 5.1D Alkyd [insert gloss level] finish (over alkyd primer).
EXT 5.1F Epoxy (over H.B. epoxy) finish.
EXT 5.1G Polyurethane, pigmented finish (over epoxy zinc rich primer and high build
epoxy).
EXT 5.1H Polyurethane, pigmented finish (over epoxy).
EXT 5.1J Polyurethane, pigmented finish (over high build epoxy).
EXT 5.1K Aluminum paint finish.
EXT 5.1L Polyurethane, pigmented finish (over inorganic zinc primer and high build
epoxy).
EXT 5.1M Water based light industrial [insert gloss level] coating (over rust inhibitive
primer).
EXT 5.1N Water based light industrial [insert gloss level] coating (over epoxy primer).
EXT 5.1P Polyurethane, pigmented finish (over epoxy zinc rich primer).
EXT 5.1Q Alkyd [insert gloss level] finish (over surface tolerant primer).
EXT 5.1R Water based light industrial [insert gloss level] coating (over H. B. epoxy).
EXT 5.1S Epoxy (over self-priming epoxy).
EXT 5.1T Polyurethane, pigmented finish (over H.B. self-priming epoxy).
EXT 5.1V Epoxy deck coating finish (over epoxy primer and epoxy high build) (with SRA).
EXT 5.1X Epoxy finish (with SRA) (over H.B. self-priming epoxy).
8. Steel - High Heat: (heat exchangers, breeching, pipes, flues, stacks, etc., with temperature
range as noted)
EXT 5.2A Heat resistant enamel finish, maximum 400 F (205 C)
EXT 5.2B Heat resistant enamel, aluminum finish, maximum 800 F (427 C).
EXT 5.2C Inorganic zinc rich coating, maximum 750 F (400 C).
EXT 5.2D High heat resistant coating, maximum 1100 F (593 C).
9. Galvanized Metal: (not chromate passivated)

For high contact / high traffic areas (doors, frames, railings, misc. steel, pipes, etc.)
For low contact / low traffic areas (overhead decking, ducts, gutters, flashing, etc.)

EXT 5.3C Epoxy finish. [for use on high contact / high traffic areas]
EXT 5.3D Polyurethane, pigmented finish (over vinyl wash and epoxy primer). [for use on
high contact / high traffic areas]
EXT 5.3E Bituminous finish. [for use on low contact / low traffic areas, e.g. unexposed
galvanized metal next to concrete, masonry, etc.]
EXT 5.3F Aluminum paint finish. [for use on low contact / low traffic areas only]
EXT 5.3G Water based light industrial [insert gloss level] coating. [for moderate chemical
resistance]
EXT 5.3H Latex [insert gloss level] finish (over water based primer). [for low contact / low
traffic areas - do not use flat finish on doors]
EXT 5.3J Water based light industrial [insert gloss level] coating (over water based
primer). [For moderate chemical resistance]
EXT 5.3K Water based light industrial [insert gloss level] coating (over epoxy).
EXT 5.3L Polyurethane, pigmented finish (over epoxy primer) [for use on high contact / high
traffic areas]
NOTES:
1. Particular attention should be paid to the durability of zinc coated surfaces on exterior high contact / high traffic areas
such as doors, frames, railings, misc. steel, etc. Do not use EXT 5.3E and 5.3F in these areas.
2. High contact / high traffic areas to include doors, frames, railings, misc. steel, pipes, etc.
3. Low contact / low traffic areas to include overhead decking, ducts, pipes, gutters, flashing, misc. steel, etc.
10. Aluminum: (sash, sills and frames, flashing, posts and railings, downpipes, etc.)
EXT 5.4A Alkyd [insert gloss level] finish (over vinyl wash primer and quick dry primer).
EXT 5.4B Polyurethane, pigmented finish (over epoxy).
EXT 5.4C Aluminum paint finish.
EXT 5.4D Bituminous finish. [for unexposed aluminum next to concrete, masonry, etc.]
EXT 5.4E Epoxy finish (over vinyl wash primer).
EXT 5.4F Alkyd [insert gloss level] finish (over quick dry metal primer).
EXT 5.4G Water based light industrial [insert gloss level] coating (over quick dry metal
primer).
EXT 5.4H Latex [insert gloss level] finish (over quick dry metal primer).
11. Copper: (excluding roofs)
EXT 5.5A Alkyd [insert gloss level] finish (over vinyl wash primer).
EXT 5.5B Polyurethane, pigmented finish (over epoxy).
EXT 5.5D Bituminous finish. [for unexposed copper next to concrete, masonry, etc.]
EXT 5.5F Alkyd [insert gloss level] finish (over alkyd primer). [for properly prepared
surfaces only]
EXT 5.5G Water based light industrial [insert gloss level] coating.
EXT 5.5H Latex [insert gloss level] finish.
12. Stainless Steel: (unpolished)
EXT 5.6A Alkyd [insert gloss level] finish.

EXT 5.6B Polyurethane, pigmented finish.
EXT 5.6D Epoxy finish.
EXT 5.6F Latex [insert gloss level] finish.
EXT 5.6G Water based light industrial [insert gloss level] coating.
13. Glue Laminated Beams and Columns:
EXT 6.1A Latex [insert gloss level] finish (over alkyd/oil primer).
EXT 6.1B Alkyd [insert gloss level] finish (over alkyd/oil primer).
EXT 6.1C Solid color stain finish (over alkyd/oil primer).
EXT 6.1D Varnish [gloss] [semi-gloss] finish (over stain).
EXT 6.1E Polyurethane, clear, 2 component finish (over stain).
EXT 6.1F Fire retardant, pigmented coating.
EXT 6.1G Fire retardant penetrating wood preservative, clear coating.
EXT 6.1H Polyurethane, clear, 2 component finish.
EXT 6.1J Polyurethane, pigmented finish.
EXT 6.1K Varnish [gloss] [semi-gloss] finish.
EXT 6.1L Latex [insert gloss level] finish (over latex primer).
EXT 6.1M Varnish, water based [insert gloss level].
14. Dimension Lumber: (columns, beams, exposed joists, underside of decking, siding, fencing,
etc.)
EXT 6.2B Solid color, water based stain finish (over alkyd/oil primer).
EXT 6.2C Alkyd [insert gloss level] finish (over alkyd/oil primer).
EXT 6.2D Solid color stain finish (over alkyd/oil primer).
EXT 6.2E Varnish [gloss] [semi-gloss] finish (over stain).
EXT 6.2F Fire retardant, pigmented [insert gloss level] coating.
EXT 6.2G Fire retardant penetrating wood preservative, clear coating.
EXT 6.2H Polyurethane, clear, 2 component finish.
EXT 6.2J Polyurethane, pigmented finish.
EXT 6.2K Varnish [gloss] [semi-gloss] finish.
EXT 6.2L Semi-transparent stain finish.
EXT 6.2M Latex [insert gloss level] finish (over latex primer).
EXT 6.2N Varnish, water based [insert gloss level] finish.
EXT 6.2P Stain, Semi-Transparent, water based.
15. Dressed Lumber: (doors, door and window frames, casings, battens, smooth facias, etc.)
EXT 6.3A Latex [insert gloss level] finish (over alkyd/oil primer). [do not use flat finish on
doors]
EXT 6.3B Alkyd [insert gloss level] finish (over alkyd/oil primer). [do not use flat finish on
doors]
EXT 6.3C Solid color stain finish (over alkyd/oil primer). [do not use on high contact areas
or on doors]
EXT 6.3D Semi-transparent stain finish. [do not use on doors]
EXT 6.3E Varnish [gloss] [semi-gloss] finish (over stain).
EXT 6.3F Varnish [gloss] [semi-gloss] finish.
EXT 6.3G Polyurethane, clear, 2 component finish.
EXT 6.3H Polyurethane, pigmented finish.
EXT 6.3J Water based light industrial [gloss] [semi-gloss] coating. [for doors and frames
only]
EXT 6.3K Solid color stain, water based finish. [do not use flat for doors and frames]
EXT 6.3L Latex [insert gloss level] finish (over latex primer). [do not use flat finish on
doors]
EXT 6.2M Varnish, water based [insert gloss level] finish.
EXT 6.2N Stain, semi-transparent, water based.
16. Wood Paneling: (plywood siding, fascias, soffits, etc.)
EXT 6.4A Solid color stain, water based finish (over alkyd/oil primer).
EXT 6.4D Semi-transparent stain finish.
EXT 6.4E Fire retardant, pigmented coating.
EXT 6.4F Fire retardant penetrating wood preservative, clear coating.
EXT 6.4G Latex [insert gloss level] finish (over alkyd primer).
EXT 6.4H Varnish [gloss] [semi-gloss] finish.
EXT 6.4J Varnish [gloss] [semi-gloss] finish (over stain).
EXT 6.4K Latex [insert gloss level] finish (over latex primer).
EXT 6.2L Stain, semi-transparent, water based.
17. Wood Decks and Stairs / Steps: (using spaced lumber) – (SRA Optional for all Systems)
EXT 6.5A Latex porch and floor [gloss] [low gloss] finish [with SRA] (over alkyd primer).
EXT 6.5B Alkyd floor enamel [gloss] [low gloss] finish [with SRA].
EXT 6.5C Alkyd floor enamel [gloss] [low gloss] finish [with SRA] (over wood preservative).
[for untreated wood].
EXT 6.5D Deck stain (over wood preservative).
EXT 6.5E Latex porch and floor [gloss] [low gloss] finish [with SRA] (over latex primer).
EXT 6.5F Deck stain finish.
EXT 6.5G Latex deck coating. [for plywood decks]
NOTE: If pressure treated wood material is to be stained or painted after installation the chemical formulation of the
treatment MUST be ascertained so that the correct stain or paint can be chosen. Obtain this information
from the supplier or manufacturer (treatment plant) and send to the Painting Association for analysis and
compatibility with paint or stain to be used.
18. Wood Shingles and Shakes: (excluding roofs)
EXT 6.6D Solid color stain, water based finish (over alkyd/oil primer).
EXT 6.6E Latex [insert gloss level] finish (over latex primer).
EXT 6.6F Semi-transparent stain finish.
19. Fiberglass: (panels, trims, fabrications, etc.)

EXT 6.7D Polyurethane, pigmented finish (over epoxy).
EXT 6.7E Epoxy-modified latex finish..
EXT 6.7F Epoxy finish.
20. Plastic: (vinyl siding and windows including related trims, ABS / PVA / PVC materials,
fabrications, etc.)

21. Stucco: (walls and soffits)
EXT 9.1A Latex [insert gloss level] finish

EXT 9.1B Water based light industrial [insert gloss level] coating.
EXT 9.1C Elastomeric coating.
EXT 9.1D Epoxy finish.
EXT 9.1F Water repellent (non-paintable) finish.
EXT 9.1G Water repellent (paintable) finish.
EXT 9.1J Latex [insert gloss level] finish (over alkali resistant primer).
22. Canvas and Cotton Coverings: (pipes, ductwork, etc.)

EXT 10.1B Water based light industrial [insert gloss level] coating.
EXT 10.1C Alkyd [insert gloss level] finish.
EXT 10.1D Aluminum paint finish.
23. Bituminous Coated Surfaces: (cast iron pipe, concrete, etc.)
EXT 10.2A Latex [insert gloss level] finish (over w.b. rust-inhibitive primer).
EXT 10.2C Alkyd [insert gloss level] finish (over w.b. rust-inhibitive primer).
EXT 10.2D Aluminum paint finish (over w.b. rust-inhibitive primer).
3.5 Interior Paint and Coating Systems:
Paint interior surfaces in accordance with the following MPI Painting Manual requirements:
1. Asphalt Surfaces: (zone / traffic marking of interior drive and parking areas)
INT 2.1A Latex zone / traffic marking finish.

INT 2.1B Alkyd zone / traffic marking finish.
NOTES:
1. Determine if painting of zone / traffic or game lines on asphalt surfaces is or is not included under work of this section
and ensure this work is co-ordinated or included in the appropriate section of work. Include the following statements
as appropriate:
2. Painting of zone / traffic line layouts on interior asphalt surfaces to be (by others) in accordance with approved
drawings, Section 02740 and MPI Painting Manual requirements.
3. Painting of game line layouts on interior asphalt surfaces to be (by others) in accordance with approved drawings,
Section 02740 and MPI Painting Manual requirements.
2. Concrete Vertical Surfaces: (including horizontal soffits)
INT 3.1A Latex [insert gloss level] finish (over alkali-resistant primer).
INT 3.1B Latex [insert gloss level] finish over [insert texture type] latex aggregate.
INT 3.1C High performance architectural latex [insert gloss level] finish.
INT 3.1D Alkyd [insert gloss level] finish.
INT 3.1E Latex [insert gloss level] finish.
INT 3.1F Epoxy (tile-like) finish. [for smooth concrete]
INT 3.1G Epoxy-modified latex finish [for smooth concrete]
INT 3.1H Multicolor finish.
INT 3.1J Water repellent paintable finish.
INT 3.1K Concrete stain finish.
INT 3.1L Water based light industrial [insert gloss level] coating.
INT 3.1M Institutional low odor / low VOC [insert gloss level] finish.
INT 3.1N Latex [insert gloss level] [insert texture type] aggregate coating.
INT 3.1P Epoxy high build low gloss finish (over epoxy high build low gloss).
INT 3.1Q Epoxy high build gloss finish (over epoxy high build gloss).
SPEC NOTES:
1. Note that the application of a clear sealer on interior concrete surfaces may be by others in accordance with concrete
finishes specification requirements. When such surfaces are also required to be painted after the application of a
water repellent sealer, ensure that a paintable sealer is used. Ensure this work is coordinated or included in the
appropriate section of work.
2. When INT 3.1J or 3.1K systems are not part of the work under this section include the following statement:
“The application of a [clear water repellent sealer][concrete stain] to interior concrete vertical surfaces shall be done
by others in accordance with the requirements of Section 03300.”
3. Concrete Horizontal Surfaces: (floors and stairs)
INT 3.2A Latex floor enamel [gloss] [low gloss] finish.

INT 3.2B Alkyd floor enamel [gloss] [low gloss] finish.
INT 3.2C Epoxy finish.
INT 3.2D Pigmented polyurethane finish.
INT 3.2E Concrete stain finish.
INT 3.2F Concrete floor sealer finish.
INT 3.2G Concrete floor sealer, water based finish.
INT 3.2H Latex zone / traffic marking finish. [for parking lines, etc]
INT 3.2J Alkyd zone / traffic marking finish. [for parking lines, etc]
INT 3.2K Polyurethane, Clear (2 component) finish.
INT 3.2L Epoxy high build low gloss finish (over epoxy high build low gloss).
INT 3.2M Epoxy high build gloss finish (over epoxy high build gloss).
NOTE: Determine if painting of zone / traffic lines on interior concrete surfaces is or is not included under work of
this section and ensure this work is co-ordinated or included in the appropriate section of work. Note that
such work may be done by others as an extension of asphalt pavement marking work. Include the following
statement as appropriate:
“Painting of zone / traffic line layouts on interior concrete surfaces to be (by others) in accordance with
approved drawings, Section 02740 and MPI Painting Manual requirements.”
4. Cementitious Composition Board Surfaces:
INT 3.3A Latex [insert gloss level] finish.

INT 3.3B High performance architectural latex [insert gloss level] finish.
INT 3.3C Alkyd [insert gloss level] finish.
INT 3.3D Epoxy-modified latex finish.
INT 3.3E Epoxy (tile like) finish.
INT 3.3F Multicolor finish.
INT 3.3G Institutional low odor / low VOC [insert gloss level] finish.
INT 3.3H Water based light industrial [insert gloss level] coating.
5. Clay Masonry Units: (pressed and extruded brick)

INT 4.1B Latex [insert gloss level] [insert texture type] aggregate coating.
INT 4.1C Water based light industrial [insert gloss level] coating.
INT 4.1D Alkyd [insert gloss level] finish.
INT 4.1F Epoxy (tile like) finish. [for smooth concrete]
INT 4.1G Epoxy-modified latex finish. [for smooth surfaces]
INT 4.1J Water repellent, clear (paintable) finish.
INT 4.1K Polyurethane, clear, 2 component finish.
INT 4.1L High performance architectural latex [insert gloss level] finish.
NOTES:
1. Note that the application of water repellent and clear finishes to interior clay and concrete masonry surfaces may be
by others in accordance with clay or concrete masonry specification requirements. When such is the case, include
the following statement:
“The application of a water repellent and/or clear finishes to interior clay and/or concrete masonry surfaces shall be
done by others in accordance with the requirements of Section [insert appropriate section numbers].”
2. Consider also, if such surfaces will be painted at some future date then a paintable water repellent finish should be
selected.
6. Concrete Masonry Units: (smooth and split face block and brick)

INT 4.2B Latex [insert gloss level] [insert texture type] aggregate coating.
INT 4.2D High performance architectural latex [insert gloss level] finish.
INT 4.2E Institutional low odor / low VOC [insert gloss level] finish.
INT 4.2F Epoxy (tile-like) finish. [for dry environments]
INT 4.2G Epoxy (tile-like) finish. [for wet environments]
INT 4.2J Epoxy-modified latex finish. [for dry environments].
INT 4.2K Water based light industrial [insert gloss level] coating.
INT 4.2L Water repellent (non-paintable) finish. [do not use on light weight block]
INT 4.2M Water repellent (paintable) finish. [do not use on light weight block]
INT 4.2N Alkyd [insert gloss level] finish (over latex sealer).
INT 4.2P High performance architectural latex finish (over alkali resistant primer).
INT 4.2Q Polyurethane, clear, 2 component finish.
INT 4.2R Epoxy high build low gloss finish (over epoxy high build low gloss).
INT 4.2S Epoxy high build gloss finish (over epoxy high build gloss).
7. Structural Steel and Metal Fabrications: (columns, beams, joists, etc.)
INT 5.1A Quick dry enamel [gloss] [semi-gloss] finish.

INT 5.1B Water based light industrial [insert gloss level] coating.
INT 5.1C Water based dry fall finish.
INT 5.1CC Water based dry fall finish (over quick dry shop primer). [for dry locations only]
INT 5.1D Alkyd dry fall finish.
INT 5.1DD Alkyd dry fall finish (over quick dry shop primer). [for dry locations only]
INT 5.1E Alkyd [insert gloss level] finish.
INT 5.1F Polyurethane, pigmented finish (over epoxy primer).
INT 5.1G Polyurethane, pigmented finish (over high-build epoxy).
INT 5.1H Polyurethane, pigmented finish (over inorganic zinc primer and epoxy).
INT 5.1J Polyurethane, pigmented finish (over epoxy zinc rich primer and epoxy).
INT 5.1K Epoxy-modified latex finish.
INT 5.1L Epoxy finish.
INT 5.1LL Epoxy Deck Coating finish (over epoxy primer).
INT 5.1M Aluminum paint finish.
INT 5.1N Water based light industrial [insert gloss level] coating (over epoxy primer).
INT 5.1P High build epoxy (over epoxy zinc rich primer).
INT 5.1Q Latex [insert gloss level] finish (over alkyd primer).
INT 5.1R High performance architectural latex [insert gloss level] finish.
INT 5.1S Institutional low odor / low VOC [insert gloss level] finish.
INT 5.1T Alkyd [insert gloss level] finish (over surface tolerant primer).
INT 5.1U Polyurethane, pigmented finish (over self-priming epoxy).
INT 5.1V Epoxy finish (over self-priming epoxy).
INT 5.1W Alkyd [insert gloss level] finish (over quick dry shop primer). [for dry locations
only]
INT 5.1X Latex [insert gloss level] finish (over quick dry shop primer). [for dry locations
only]
INT 5.1Y Epoxy high build low gloss finish (over primer)
INT 5.1Z Epoxy high build gloss finish (over epoxy primer).
INT 5.1QDS Quick dry shop paint finish (for dry locations only). [do not topcoat]
8. Steel - High Heat: (boilers, furnaces, heat exchangers, breeching, pipes, flues, stacks, etc., with
temperature range as noted)
NT 5.2A Heat resistant enamel finish, maximum 400 F (205 C).

INT 5.2B Heat resistant enamel, aluminum paint finish, maximum 800 F (427 C).
INT 5.2C Inorganic zinc rich coating, maximum 750 F (400 C).
INT 5.2D High heat resistant coating, maximum 1100 F (593 C).
9. Galvanized Metal: (doors, frames, railings, misc. steel, pipes, overhead decking, ducts, etc.)

INT 5.3B Water based light industrial [insert gloss level] coating.
INT 5.3C Alkyd [insert gloss level] finish (over cementitious primer).
INT 5.3D Epoxy finish (over epoxy primer).
INT 5.3E Epoxy finish (over vinyl wash primer and epoxy primer).
INT 5.3F Alkyd dry fall finish. [for use on low contact / low traffic areas only]
INT 5.3G Aluminum paint finish.
INT 5.3H Water based dry fall finish. [for use on low contact / low traffic areas only]
INT 5.3J Latex [insert gloss level] finish (over water based primer).
INT 5.3K Water based light industrial [insert gloss level] coating (over water based
primer).
INT 5.3L Alkyd [insert gloss level] finish (over non-cementitious primer).
INT 5.3M High performance architectural latex [insert gloss level] finish.
INT 5.3N Institutional low odor / low VOC [insert gloss level] finish.
NOTES:
1. Particular attention should be paid to the durability of zinc coated surfaces on interior high contact / high traffic areas
such as doors, frames, railings, misc. steel, etc. Do not use a dry fall finish (INT 5.3F or INT 5.3H) in these areas.
2. High contact/traffic areas to include doors, frames, railings, misc. steel, pipes, etc.
3. Low contact/traffic areas to include overhead decking, ducts, pipes, gutters, flashing, misc. steel, etc.
10. Aluminum: (unanodized)
INT 5.4A Alkyd (over vinyl wash primer) [insert gloss level] finish.
INT 5.4B Epoxy finish.
INT 5.4C Polyurethane,pigmented finish.
INT 5.4D Aluminum paint finish. [for exposed aluminum]
INT 5.4E Water based light industrial [insert gloss level] coating.
INT 5.4F High performance architectural latex [insert gloss level] finish.
INT 5.4H Latex [insert gloss level] finish (over quick dry primer for aluminum).
INT 5.4J Alkyd [insert gloss level] finish (over quick dry primer for aluminum).
11. Copper:
INT 5.5A Alkyd [insert gloss level] finish.

INT 5.5B Epoxy finish.
INT 5.5C Polyurethane, pigmented finish.
INT 5.5D Aluminum paint finish.
INT 5.5E Water based light industrial [insert gloss level] coating.
INT 5.5F High performance architectural latex [insert gloss level] finish.
INT 5.5H Latex [insert gloss level] finish.
12. Stainless Steel: (unpolished)
INT 5.6A Water based light industrial [insert gloss level] coating (over bonding primer).
INT 5.6B Alkyd [insert gloss level] finish.
INT 5.6C Epoxy finish.
INT 5.6D Polyurethane, pigmented finish.
INT 5.6E Aluminum paint finish.
INT 5.6F Water based light industrial [insert gloss level] coating (over quick dry primer).
INT 5.6G High performance architectural latex [insert gloss level] finish.
INT 5.6H Latex [insert gloss level] finish.
13. Glue Laminated Beams and Columns:
INT 6.1A Latex [insert gloss level] finish (over alkyd primer).
INT 6.1C Alkyd varnish [insert gloss level] finish.
INT 6.1D Polyurethane varnish [insert gloss level] finish.
INT 6.1E Polyurethane, pigmented [insert gloss level] finish.
INT 6.1F Water based varnish, clear [insert gloss level] finish.
INT 6.1G Semi transparent stain finish.
INT 6.1H Alkyd solid color stain finish.
INT 6.1J Polyurethane varnish [gloss] [satin] finish (over stain).
INT 6.1K Alkyd varnish [insert gloss level] finish (over stain).
INT 6.1M Latex [insert gloss level] finish (over latex primer).
INT 6.1N High performance architectural latex [insert gloss level] finish.
INT 6.1P Alkyd varnish [insert gloss level] finish (over stain and sealer).
INT 6.1Q Institutional low odor / low VOC [insert gloss level] finish.
INT 6.1R Water based varnish, clear [insert gloss level] finish (over stain).
INT 6.1S Polyurethane, clear, moisture cured [gloss] [flat] finish (over stain).
INT 6.1T Latex solid color stain finish.
INT 6.1U Fire retardant, pigmented coating [insert gloss level] (ULC rated).
INT 6.1V Fire retardant, clear coating [insert gloss level] (ULC rated).
INT 6.1W Polyurethane, clear, 2 component finish.
14. Dimension Lumber: (columns, beams, exposed joists, underside of decking, etc.)
INT 6.2A Latex [insert gloss level] finish (over alkyd primer).
INT 6.2D Latex [insert gloss level] finish (over latex primer).
INT 6.2E Multicolor finish.
INT 6.2F Fire retardant, pigmented [insert gloss level] coating (ULC rated).
INT 6.2G Fire retardant, clear [insert gloss level] coating (ULC rated).
INT 6.2H Polyurethane varnish [insert gloss level] finish.
INT 6.2J Polyurethane varnish [insert gloss level] finish (over stain).
INT 6.2K Alkyd varnish [insert gloss level] finish (over stain and sealer).
INT 6.2L Institutional low odor / low VOC [insert gloss level] finish.
INT 6.2M Water based varnish, clear [insert gloss level] finish (over stain).
INT 6.2N Polyurethane,clear, moisture cured [gloss] [flat] finish (over stain).
INT 6.2P Alkyd varnish [insert gloss level] finish.
INT 6.2Q Polyurethane, clear, 2 component finish.
15. Dressed Lumber: (including doors, door and window frames, casings, molding, etc.)
INT 6.3A High performance architectural latex [insert gloss level] finish.
INT 6.3BB Alkyd, water based gloss finish. [interior doors and frames in non-humid
locations only]
INT 6.3C Semi-transparent stain finish. [do not use on doors]
INT 6.3D Alkyd varnish [insert gloss level] finish (over stain).
INT 6.3E Polyurethane varnish [insert gloss level] finish (over stain).
INT 6.3F Lacquer [insert gloss level] finish (over stain).
INT 6.3G Lacquer, pigmented [insert gloss level] finish.
INT 6.3H Lacquer, clear [insert gloss level] finish.
INT 6.3J Alkyd varnish [insert gloss level] finish.
INT 6.3K Polyurethane varnish [insert gloss level] finish.
INT 6.3M Danish oil finish.
INT 6.3N Multicolor finish.
INT 6.3P Water based light industrial [insert gloss level] coating.
INT 6.3Q Water based varnish, clear [insert gloss level] finish.
INT 6.3R Fire retardant, pigmented [insert gloss level] finish (ULC rated).
INT 6.3S Fire retardant, clear finish (ULC rated).
INT 6.3T Latex [semi-gloss] [gloss] finish (over latex primer).
INT 6.3U Latex [semi-gloss] [gloss] finish (over alkyd primer).
INT 6.3V Institutional low odor / low VOC [insert gloss level] finish.
INT 6.3W Water based varnish, clear [insert gloss level] finish (over stain).
INT 6.3X Polyurethane, clear, moisture cured [gloss] [flat] finish.
INT 6.3Y Polyurethane, clear, moisture cured [gloss] [flat] finish (over stain).
INT 6.3Z Polyurethane, clear, 2 component finish.
16. Wood Paneling and Casework: (partitions, panels, shelving, millwork, etc.)
INT 6.4A Latex [insert gloss level] finish (over alkyd sealer).
INT 6.4B Alkyd [insert gloss level] finish (over alkyd sealer).
INT 6.4C Semi-transparent stain finish.
INT 6.4D Alkyd varnish [insert gloss level] finish (over stain).
INT 6.4E Polyurethane varnish [insert gloss level] finish (over stain).
INT 6.4F Lacquer [insert gloss level] finish (over stain).
INT 6.4G Alkyd varnish [insert gloss level] finish.
INT 6.4H Lacquer, pigmented [insert gloss level] finish.
INT 6.4J Polyurethane varnish [insert gloss level] finish.
INT 6.4K Danish oil finish.
INT 6.4L Multicolor finish.
INT 6.4M Water based, varnish clear [insert gloss level] finish.
INT 6.4N Water based light industrial [insert gloss level] coating.
INT 6.4P Fire retardant, pigmented [insert gloss level] coating (UL/ULC rated).
INT 6.4Q Fire retardant, clear coating (UL/ULC rated).
INT 6.4R Latex [semi-gloss] [gloss] finish (over latex primer).
INT 6.4S High performance architectural latex [insert gloss level] finish.
INT 6.4T Institutional low odor / low VOC [insert gloss level] finish.
INT 6.4U Water based varnish, clear [insert gloss level] finish (over stain).
INT 6.4V Polyurethane, clear moisture cured [gloss] [flat] finish (over stain).
INT 6.4W Lacquer [insert gloss level] finish (over stain).
INT 6.4X Lacquer, pigmented [insert gloss level] finish.
INT 6.4Y Lacquer, clear [insert gloss level] finish.
17. Wood Floors and Stairs: (including hardwood flooring, etc.) (SRA optional for all systems)
INT 6.5A Alkyd floor enamel [low gloss] [gloss] finish.

INT 6.5B Polyurethane varnish [gloss] finish (over stain).
INT 6.5C Polyurethane varnish [gloss] finish.
INT 6.5E Alkyd game line marking.

INT 6.5F Epoxy game line marking.
INT 6.5G Latex porch and floor [low gloss] [gloss] enamel finish.
INT 6.5J Polyurethane, moisture cured [gloss] finish (over stain).
INT 6.5K Polyurethane, moisture cured [gloss] finish.
INT 6.5M Polyurethane, clear, 2 component finish.
NOTE: Painting of interior game line layouts is usually by others in accordance with gymnasium hardwood flooring
specification requirements. When not included under work of this section add the following:
“Painting of interior game line layouts to be by others in accordance with requirements of Section [09640].”
18. Wood Shingles and Shakes: (wall covering)
NT 6.6A Latex [insert gloss level] finish.

INT 6.6C Semi-transparent stain finish.
INT 6.6D Alkyd solid color stain finish.
INT 6.6E Latex solid color stain finish.
INT 6.6F Latex [insert gloss level] finish (over latex primer).
INT 6.6G Fire retardant, pigmented [insert gloss level] coating (UL/ULC rated).
INT 6.6H Fire retardant, clear [insert gloss level] coating (UL/ULC rated).
19. Fiberglass: (panels, trims, fabrications, etc.)

INT 6.7D Epoxy finish.
INT 6.7E Polyurethane, pigmented finish.
INT 6.7F Epoxy-modified latex [insert gloss level] finish.
INT 6.7G Multicolor finish.
INT 6.7H High performance architectural latex [insert gloss level] finish.
INT 6.7J Institutional low odor / low VOC [insert gloss level] finish.
20. Plastic: (lumber, panels, trims, fabrications, vinyl wall covering, PVA / PVC materials, etc.)
INT 6.8A High performance architectural latex [insert gloss level] finish.
INT 6.8D Multicolor finish.
INT 6.8E Latex [insert gloss level] finish.
INT 6.8F Institutional low odor / low VOC [insert gloss level] finish.
21. Spray Textured Surfaces: (ceilings)
INT 9.1A Latex, flat finish [for spray application only].

INT 9.1B Latex [insert gloss level] finish (over alkyd sealer).
INT 9.1C Alkyd, flat finish.
INT 9.1D Alkyd [insert gloss level] finish (over alkyd sealer).
INT 9.1E Latex finish. [for spray application only]
22. Plaster and Gypsum Board: (gypsum wallboard, drywall, “sheet rock type material”, etc., and
textured finishes)
INT 9.2A Latex [insert gloss level] finish (over latex sealer).
INT 9.2C Alkyd [insert gloss level] finish (over latex sealer).
INT 9.2E Epoxy (tile-like) finish.
INT 9.2F Epoxy-modified latex (tile-like) finish.
INT 9.2G Multicolor finish.

INT 9.2H Fire retardant coating [clear or pigmented] (UL/ULC rated).
INT 9.2J Water based fire retardant coating (UL/ULC rated).
INT 9.2K Latex [insert gloss level] finish (over alkyd primer). [use on plaster surfaces
only]
INT 9.2L Water based light industrial [insert gloss level] coating.
INT 9.2N Epoxy high build low gloss finish (over latex sealer).
INT 9.2P Epoxy high build gloss finish (over latex sealer).
23. Acoustic Panels and Tiles:
INT 9.3A Latex, flat finish.

INT 9.3B Latex [insert gloss level] finish (over alkyd sealer).
INT 9.3C Alkyd, flat finish.
INT 9.3D Institutional low odor / low VOC [insert gloss level] finish.
INT 9.3E High performance architectural latex [insert gloss level] finish.
24. Canvas and Cotton Coverings:

INT 10.1C Aluminum paint finish.
INT 10.1D Institutional low odor / low VOC [insert gloss level] finish.
25. Bituminous Coated Surfaces: (cast iron pipe, concrete, etc.)

INT 10.2C Aluminum paint finish.
26. Painting of interior game line layouts with colors as noted on approved game line layout drawing
on interior resilient [gymnasium] flooring to be by others in accordance with [insert specification
Section] [MPI Painting Manual requirements].
3.6 Mechanical / Electrical Equipment and Related Surfaces:
NOTE: Co-ordinate painting of mechanical and electrical equipment, piping, conduit, system Identification with appropriate
Mechanical and Electrical specification sections.
1. Unless otherwise specified or noted, paint all “unfinished” conduits, piping, hangers, ductwork
and other mechanical and electrical equipment with color and texture to match adjacent surfaces,
in the following areas:
a. Where exposed-to-view in all exterior and interior areas.

b. In all interior high humidity interior areas.
c. In all boiler room, mechanical and electrical rooms.
2. In unfinished areas leave exposed conduits, piping, hangers, ductwork and other mechanical and
electrical equipment in original finish and touch up scratches and marks.
3. Touch up scratches and marks on factory painted finishes and equipment with paint as supplied
by manufacturer of equipment.
4. Do not paint over nameplates.
5. Paint the inside of all ductwork where visible behind louvers, grilles and diffusers for a minimum
of 460 mm (18”) or beyond sight line, whichever is greater, with primer and one coat of matt black
(non-reflecting) paint.
6. Paint the inside of light valances gloss white.
7. Paint disconnects switches for fire alarm system and exit light systems in red enamel.
8. Paint [red] or band all fire protection piping and sprinkler lines in accordance with mechanical
specification requirements. Keep sprinkler heads free of paint.
9. Paint [yellow] or band all natural gas piping in accordance with mechanical specification
requirements.
10. Back prime and paint face and edges of plywood service panels for telephone and electrical
equipment before installation [gray, semi-gloss] [to match adjacent wall surface]. Leave
equipment in original finish except for touch-up as required, and paint conduits, mounting
accessories and other unfinished items.
11. Paint exterior steel electrical light standards. Do not paint outdoor transformers and substation
equipment.
3.7 Field Quality Control / Standard of Acceptance:
1. All surfaces, preparation and paint applications shall be inspected.
2. Painted exterior and interior surfaces shall be considered to lack uniformity and soundness if any
of the following defects are apparent to the Painting Inspection Agency inspector:
a. brush / roller marks, streaks, laps, runs, sags, drips, heavy stippling, hiding or shadowing
by inefficient application methods, skipped or missed areas, and foreign materials in
paint coatings.
b. Evidence of poor coverage at rivet heads, plate edges, lap joints, crevices, pockets,
corners and re-entrant angles.
c. Damage due to touching before paint is sufficiently dry or any other contributory cause.
d. Damage due to application on moist surfaces or caused by inadequate protection from
the weather.
e. Damage and/or contamination of paint due to blown contaminants (dust, spray paint,
etc.).
3. Painted surfaces shall be considered unacceptable if any of the following are evident under
natural lighting source for exterior surfaces and final lighting source (including daylight) for interior
surfaces:
a. Visible defects are evident on vertical surfaces when viewed at normal viewing angles
from a distance of not less than 1000 mm (39”).
b. Visible defects are evident on horizontal surfaces when viewed at normal viewing angles
from a distance of not less than 1000 mm (39”).
c. Visible defects are evident on ceiling, soffit and other overhead surfaces when viewed at
normal viewing angles.
d. When the final coat on any surface exhibits a lack of uniformity of color, sheen, texture,
and hiding across full surface area.
4. Painted surfaces rejected by the inspector shall be made good at the expense of the Contractor.
Small affected areas may be touched up; large affected areas or areas without sufficient dry film
thickness of paint shall be repainted. Runs, sags of damaged paint shall be removed by scraper
or by sanding prior to application of paint.
3.8 Protection:
1. Protect all exterior surfaces and areas, including landscaping, walks, drives, all adjacent building
surfaces (including glass, aluminum surfaces, etc.) and equipment and any labels and signage
from painting operations and damage by drop cloths, shields, masking, templates, or other
suitable protective means and make good any damage caused by failure to provide such
protection.
2. Protect all interior surfaces and areas, including glass, aluminum surfaces, etc. and equipment
and any labels and signage from painting operations and damage by drop cloths, shields,
masking, templates, or other suitable protective means and make good any damage caused by
failure to provide such protection.
3. Erect barriers or screens and post signs to warn of or limit or direct traffic away or around work
area as required.
3.9 Clean-Up:
1. Remove all paint where spilled, splashed, splattered or sprayed as work progresses using means
and materials that are not detrimental to affected surfaces.
2. Keep work area free from an unnecessary accumulation of tools, equipment, surplus materials
and debris.
3. Remove combustible rubbish materials and empty paint cans each day and safely dispose of
same in accordance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
4. Clean equipment and dispose of wash water / solvents as well as all other cleaning and
protective materials (e.g. rags, drop cloths, masking papers, etc.), paints, thinners, paint
removers / strippers in accordance with the safety requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
3.10 Repainting of Existing Finishes:
1. Refer to MPI Maintenance Repainting Manual and Section [insert appropriate section number] for
repainting of existing finishes.
2. Use finish coat of respective new surface paint system for minor repair of existing finishes. Use
system primer where existing finishes are damaged down to bare surface.
END OF SECTION
SUBJECT: SECTION 10155 – TOILET COMPARTMENTS
SECTION 10155
TOILET COMPARTMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes stainless-steel, solid- phenolic units as follows:
1. Toilet Enclosures: Floor anchored.

2. Entrance Screens: Floor anchored
3. Urinal Screens: Floor anchored.
1. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for supports that attach floor-and-ceiling-anchored units
to overhead structural system.
2. Division 10 "Toilet and Bath Accessories" for toilet tissue dispensers, grab bars, purse shelves,
and similar accessories.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
1. Show locations of cutouts for compartment-mounted toilet accessories.

2. Show locations of reinforcements for compartment-mounted grab bars.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of unit indicated.
D. Samples for Verification: Of each type of color and finish required for units, prepared on 6-inch- (150-
mm-) square Samples of same thickness and material indicated for Work.
E. Warranty Certificate
A. Comply with requirements in CID-A-A-60003, "Partitions, Toilets, Complete."
B. Warranty Period of Five (5) years after substantial completion

2
C. Mockups: Build minimum of 10 m mockups to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards
for fabrication and installation.
MHA – TECH. SPECIFICATION – 1706 – 04/02/2015 SECTION 10155 – TOILET COMPARTMENTS 1/4
1. Build mockups - as shown in the drawing and samples approved.

3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents
contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.
D. If required, insert fire-test-response requirements for phenolic-core or solid-polymer units. See "Fire-
Test-Response Characteristics" Article in the Evaluations.
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls, columns, ceilings, and other construction
contiguous with toilet compartments by field measurements before fabrication and indicate
measurements on Shop Drawings.
1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the
Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating toilet compartments without field
measurements. Coordinate wall, floor, ceilings, and other contiguous construction to ensure
that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 METAL UNITS
2.2 PLASTIC-LAMINATE UNITS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products

1. Bobrick brand/ model; Maximum Privacy; Stainless steel edges series 2030, laminated plastic
edges series 2040. Then Solid Phenolic series 2080.
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. BOBRICK – A.M Bin Ibrahim Al Ghamdi Co.

2. TRESPA – Saudi Pan Gulf
3. AL MUTLAQ
4. Or Any Approved Equal
C. Plastic Laminate: NEMA LD 3, HGS, 0.048-inch (1.2-mm) nominal thickness.
1. Color and Pattern: One or Two colors and patterns in each room as selected by Architect from
manufacturer's full range of colors and patterns.
D. Door, Panel, and Pilaster Construction: Plastic-laminate facing sheets are pressure laminated to core
material without splices or joints in facings or cores. Laminate is applied to edges before broad
surfaces to seal edges and prevent laminate from being pried loose. Exposed core material is sealed
at cutouts to protect core from moisture.
1. Core Material: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2 particleboard with 45-lb (20.4-kg) density.
2. Doors and Panels: Finished to not less than 7/8 inch (22 mm) thick.
3. Pilasters: Provide construction to comply with one of the following:
a. Finished to not less than 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) thick and with internal.
b. Finished to 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) thick and with manufacturer's standard core of
corrosion-resistant steel sheet laminated to both sides of honeycomb of resin-
impregnated kraft paper in lieu of particleboard core.
c. Finished to not less than 1 inch (25 mm) thick and with internal, 0.1196-inch- (3.0-mm-)
thick steel-sheet reinforcement.
E. Pilaster Shoes and Sleeves (Caps): Stainless steel, ASTM A 666, Type 302 or 304, not less than
0.0312 inch (0.8 mm) specified thickness and 3 inches (75 mm) high, finished to match hardware.
F. Brackets (Fittings):
1. Stirrup Type: Ear or U-brackets, and shall be stainless steel
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard design, heavy-duty operating hardware and
accessories.
1. Material: Stainless steel.
B. Overhead Bracing: Manufacturer's standard continuous, extruded-aluminum head rail with antigrip
profile and in manufacturer's standard finish.
C. Support Posts for Urinal Screens: Manufacturer's standard aluminum post with floor shoe for
anchoring to floor construction.
D. Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of stainless steel or chrome-
plated steel or brass, finished to match hardware, with theft-resistant-type heads. Provide sex-type
bolts for through-bolt applications. For concealed anchors, use hot-dip galvanized or other rust-
resistant, protective-coated steel.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Overhead-Braced Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant supports, leveling

mechanism, fasteners, and anchors at pilasters to suit floor conditions. Make provisions for setting
and securing continuous head rail at top of each pilaster. Provide shoes at pilasters to conceal
supports and leveling mechanism.
B. Floor-Anchored Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant anchoring assemblies

complete with threaded rods, lock washers, and leveling adjustment nuts at pilasters for structural
connection to floor. Provide shoes at pilasters to conceal anchorage.
C. Ceiling-Hung Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant anchoring assemblies

complete with threaded rods, lock washers, and leveling adjustment nuts at pilasters for connection to
structural support above finished ceiling. Provide assemblies that support pilasters from structure
without transmitting load to finished ceiling. Provide sleeves (caps) at tops of pilasters to conceal
anchorage.
D. Floor-and-Ceiling-Anchored Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant anchoring

assemblies complete with leveling adjustment at tops and bottoms of pilasters. Provide shoes and
sleeves (caps) at pilasters to conceal anchorage.
E. Doors: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 24-inch- (610-mm-) wide in-swinging doors for standard
toilet compartments and 36-inch- (914-mm-) wide out-swinging doors with a minimum 32-inch- (813-
mm-) wide clear opening for compartments indicated to be accessible to people with disabilities.
1. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard self-closing type that can be adjusted to hold doors open at
any angle up to 90 degrees.
2. Latch and Keeper: Manufacturer's standard surface-mounted latch unit designed for
emergency access and with combination rubber-faced door strike and keeper. Provide units
that comply with accessibility requirements of authorities having jurisdiction at compartments
indicated to be accessible to people with disabilities.
3. Coat Hook: Manufacturer's standard combination hook and rubber-tipped bumper, sized to
prevent door from hitting compartment-mounted accessories.
4. Door Bumper: Manufacturer's standard rubber-tipped bumper at out-swinging doors and
entrance screen doors.
5. Door Pull: Manufacturer's standard or locally fabricated with a required length of 65 cm. for
door pull unit at out-swinging doors and shall comply with accessibility requirements of
authorities having jurisdiction. Provide units on both sides of doors at compartments indicated
to be accessible to people with disabilities. It is sustainable.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install units rigid, straight, level,
and plumb. Secure units in position with manufacturer's recommended anchoring devices.
1. Maximum Clearances:
a. Pilasters and Panels: 1/2 inch (13 mm).

b. Panels and Walls: 1 inch (25 mm).
2. Stirrup Brackets: Secure panels to walls and to pilasters with not less than two brackets
attached near top and bottom of panel.
a. Locate wall brackets so holes for wall anchors occur in masonry or tile joints.
b. Align brackets at pilasters with brackets at walls.
B. Floor-Anchored Units: Set pilasters with anchors penetrating not less than 2 inches (50 mm) into
structural floor, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written instructions. Level, plumb, and
tighten pilasters. Hang doors and adjust so tops of doors are level with tops of pilasters when doors
are in closed position.
C. Floor-and-Ceiling-Anchored Units: Secure pilasters to supporting construction and level, plumb, and
tighten. Hang doors and adjust so doors are level and aligned with panels when doors are in closed
position.
3.2 ADJUSTING
A. Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware according to manufacturer's written instructions
for proper operation. Set hinges on in-swinging doors to hold doors open approximately 30 degrees
from closed position when unlatched. Set hinges on out-swinging doors and doors in entrance
screens to return doors to fully closed position.
END OF SECTION 1015
SUBJECT: SECTION 10260- HEAVY DUTY RUBBER CORNER AND WALL GUARD
DIVISION 10260
HEAVY DUTY RUBBER CORNER AND WALL GUARD
Part 1 – GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Rubber corner and wall guards for wall and Columns protection
A. Heavy Duty Rubber Corner Guards

B. Heavy Duty Rubber Wall Guards
1.03 REFERENCES
A. British Standard (BS)

B. International Rubber Hardness Degree (IRHD)
A. Performance Requirements: Provide heavy duty rubber corner and wall guards that conform to the follow-
ing requirements of regulatory agencies.
1. Tensile: Provide heavy duty rubber corner and wall guards with a maximum tensile of 14 mn/m2,
when tested in accordance with BS 903 A2.
2. Elongation: Provide heavy duty rubber corner and wall guards with a 300% minimum elongation
when tested in accordance with BS 903 A2.
3. Hardness: Provide heavy duty rubber corner and wall guards with a hardness of 65-75 IRHD when
tested in accordance with BS 903 A26.
4. Compression Set: Provide heavy duty rubber corner and wall guards with a maximum compression
set of 30% when tested in accordance with BS 903 A6A for 22 hours at 70°C.
5. Tear Resistance: Provide heavy duty rubber corner and wall guards with a minimum tear resistance
of 40N/mn when tested in accordance with BS 903 A3, m method C.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer's printed product data for each type of wall protection specified.
B. Detail Drawings:
C. Samples: Verification samples of wall protection, in full size profiles of each type and color indicated.
D. Manufacturer’s Installation Instruction: Printed installation instructions for heavy duty rubber corner protec-
tion.
A. Deliver materials in unopened factory packaging to the jobsite

B. Inspect materials at delivery to assure that specified products have been received.
C. Store in original packaging in a climate controlled location away from direct sunlight.
MHA – TECH. SPECIFICATION – 1706– 04/02/2015 SECTION 10260 – HEAVY DUTY RUBBER CORNER GUARD 1/3
PROJECT: 1705 – MIG OFFICE TOWER
LOCATION: Riyadh, Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
1.07 WARRANTY
A. Standard Warranty against material and manufacturing.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURER
A. Acceptable Manufacturer/Distributor: OCEAN RUBBER or any Local Manufacturer/ Distributor in KSA.
B. Substitutions:
C. Provide all heavy duty rubber corner and wall guards from a single source.
2.02 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Corner Guard Profile
1. Heavy Duty Rubber Corner Guard - dimensions - 3"(75mm) x 3"(75mm) x 1000mm height.
B. Wall Guard Profile
1. Heavy Duty Rubber Wall Guard - dimensions - 200mmW x 25mmT with yellow strips.
2.03 MATERIALS
A. Heavy duty rubber corner and wall guard shall be durable, resilient and non marking, extruded from UV and
Ozone resistant and ageing resistant styrene butadiene/natural rubber blend (SBR).
2.04 FINISHES
A. Heavy Duty Rubber Corner Guards: Colors of the corner guard shall be black in a uniform quality and
free from foreign substances.
B. Heavy Duty Rubber Wall Guards: Colors of the wall guard shall be black with yellow strips in a quality
and free from foreign substances.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions in which the wall protection will be installed.
1. Complete all finishing operations, including painting, before beginning installation of wall protection
materials.
B. Wall surface shall be dry and free from dirt, grease and loose paint.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. General: Prior to installation, clean substrate to remove dust, debris and loose particles.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. General: Locate corner guard as indicated on the approved detail drawing for the appropriate substrate,
and in compliance with the installation instructions. Install corner guard level and plumb at the height indicated
on the drawings.
PROJECT: 1705 – MIG OFFICE TOWER
LOCATION: Riyadh, Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
B. Installation of Heavy Duty Rubber Corner and Wall Guards:
1. Cut the corner guard to the required length. Drill 3/16" holes on each wing of the corner guard.
Holes should be 1" from the end and space approximately 24" apart. Stagger holes on the other wing
starting with the holes 2" from the end. There are 12 fasteners per 9.843'length. #12 stainless steel
screws (Installer supplied) with flat washers are recommended.
2. Use the corner guard as a template, and transfer the holes locations to the wall. Drill holes for the
fasteners at each mark on the wall.
3. Mount the corner guard on the wall using the fasteners and flat washers. Tighten the fasteners to
secure the corner guard.
3.04 CLEANING
A. At completion of the installation, clean surfaces in accordance with the manufacturers clean up and main-
tenance instructions.
SUBJECT: SECTION 10801- TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
SECTION 10801
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services, and perform operations required for complete installation of
Toilet and Bath accessories and related work as indicated on the drawings and specified herein.
B. Work Included: The work shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
1. Toilet and bath accessories
2. Facial Mirrors
3. And Other related accessories
C. Related Work Specified Elsewhere

1. Basic Mechanical Requirements - Section 15010.
2. Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods - Section 15050.
A. Materials and work shall conform to the latest edition of industry standards, reference specifications specified
herein and to applicable codes and requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more
stringent.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit the following in accordance with the requirements specified under Submittals in Section 15010.
1. Product Data: Submit copies of manufacturer’s latest published literature for materials specified herein
for approval, and obtain approval before ordering materials.
2. Shop Drawings Submit shop drawings for work specified herein for approval.
3. Maintenance Data Submit maintenance data and spare parts lists for each type of manufactured piping
specialty. Include this data, product data, and shop drawings in maintenance manual in accordance with
Requirements of Section 15010.
A. Deliver materials and handle so as to prevent the inclusion of foreign materials and the damage of materials.
B. Store materials and equipment where designated. Assume responsibility and security for materials and
equipment and protect form detrimental conditions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS/EQUIPMENT
A. General
1. Toilet and Bath accessories to be obtained from one approved manufacturer unless otherwise specified.
2. List of all proposed Toilet and Bath accessories, indicating manufacturer, type and model number and
catalogues shall be submitted for approval.
3. Toilet and Bath accessories shall be submitted for approval.
4. Accessories shall be stored under cover and kept dry.
MHA – TECH. SPECIFICATION – 1706 – 04/02/2015 SECTION 10801 – TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 1/2
SUBJECT: SECTION 10801- TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
2.2 EXAMINATION
A. Examine conditions at the job site where work of this section is to be performed to insure proper arrangement
and fit of the work. Start of work implies acceptance of job site conditions.
2.3 PREPARATION
A. Examine the Contract Drawings and specifications in order to insure the completeness of the work required
under this Section.
B. Verify measurements and dimensions at the job site and cooperate in the coordination and scheduling of the
work of this Section with the work of related trades, so as not to delay job progress.
2.4 INSTALLATION
A. Concealed brackets, hangers and plates shall have a shop coat of paint.
B. Fixtures shall be set in a neat, finished and uniform manner making the connection to all fixtures at right angles
with the walls, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer.
1. Roughing for this work must be accurately laid out so as to conform with the finished wall material.
2. Fixtures are not to be set until so directed by the Engineer.
C. The location and disposition of all items shall be as indicated on the relevant or drawings.
D. It is to be noted that all fixtures mentioned below shall be approved for shapes and , colors before ordering
MHA – TECH. SPECIFICATION – 1706 – 04/02/2015 SECTION 10801 – TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 2/2
SUBJECT: SECTION 11014- FAÇADE MAINTENANCE EQUIPMENT
SECTION 11014
FACADE MAINTENANCE EQUIPMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Suspended access support equipment including:

1. System design.
2. Tieback anchors.
3. Suspension line anchors.
4. Fall arrest anchors.
5. Rigging sleeves.
6. Davits.
B. Horizontal fall restraint cable system including:

1. System design.
2. Cable.
3. Intermediate anchors.
4. Terminating anchors.
5. Energy absorber.
A. Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete.
B. Section 05120 - Structural Steel.
C. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications.
D. Section 07500 - Membrane Roofing.
E. Section 07620 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim.
F. Section 07920 - Joint Sealants.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC):

1. AISC Publication Load and Resistance Factor Design for Structural Steel Buildings.
2. AISC Specifications for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members.
B. ASTM International:
1. ASTM A36 - Specification for Structural Steel.
2. ASTM A76 - Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Hot-Wrought, Special Quality.
3. ASTM A123 - Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Hardware.
MHA-TECH. SPECIFICATIONS- 1706 - 04/02/2015 SECTION 11014 – FAÇADE MAINTENANCE EQUIPMENT 1/8
4. ASTM A500 - Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in
Rounds and Shapes.
5. ASTM A780 - Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings.
6. ASTM B209 - Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.
7. ASTM B221 - Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Wire, Shapes, and
Tubes.
8. ASTM B308/B308M - Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy 6061-T6 Standard Structural Profiles.
C. American Welding Society (AWS): AWS D1.1 Structural Welding Code.
D. Occupational Safety and Health Standards:

1. ANSI/IWCA I-14.1-2001 Window Cleaning Safety.
2. 1910 Subpart D (Walking and Working Surfaces).
3. 1910.66 Appendix C (Personal Fall Arrest).
4. 1910.66 Subpart F (Powered Platforms).
5. OSHA procedures and precautions for employees using descent control equipment.
A. Anchorage Design Requirements:

1. Safety anchor system design shall comply with current OSHA, ANSI, and local regulations pertaining
to window cleaning and fall protection.
2. Anchor system shall provide independent fall arrest anchorages in addition to suspension line
anchorages for each descent location as required by OSHA and ANSI requirements.
3. System shall be designed to be compatible with current window cleaning industry standard equipment
(examples: rope descent systems, boatswain chairs, swing stages, transportable suspension devises).
4. Structural design requirements of anchorages and tie-back
a. Anchorage shall be capable of sustaining a minimum ultimate load of 5,000 lbs., in any direction
the load may be applied, without fracture or failure.
b. Anchorage shall be capable of sustaining a minimum proof load of 2,500 lbs., in any direction
the load may be applied, without permanent deformation or damage to anchorage.
c. Anchorages shall be designed with a minimum 1,250 lb. working load, in any direction the load
may be applied.
5. Locate primary support and fall arrest anchors in conjunction with areas on facade of building needing
to be serviced. Consideration shall be given to the type of suspension equipment that will be used at
the building and conditions such as workers' reach, rigging methods, and roof edge conditions.
Anchorages shall be unobstructed and located behind and in line with equipment or portion of building
they are intended to service.
B. Rigging Sleeve and Davit Design Requirements:

1. Locate rigging sleeves and davits to accommodate suspended maintenance during swing stage
operations. Typically, spacing of davits is on column lines or every 20 feet (6 m), on center. Typical
spacing of rigging sleeves is 6 foot 8 inches (2032 mm), on center. Placement of supports should
allow cables suspending powered equipment to hang either parallel and in plane or slightly angulated
with the building facade as required by users. Consideration should be given to operating other
equipment that may be required for access.
2. Locate independent anchorages for personal fall protection when using rigging sleeves or davits in
accordance with provisions of Anchorage Design Requirements.
3. Davits shall be capable of supporting an ultimate load of not less than 4 times the rated load. The
rated load of the davit shall be based on the swing stage hoist and powered platform load capacity,
which is frequently 1,000 lb (454 kg) or more.
4. Manufacture shall provide engineer's calculations and test report to verify that davit will support load
requirements.
5. Outreach of portable davit boom shall not exceed 8 feet 6 inches (5640 mm).
6. Rigging sleeves shall meet the loading requirements of Anchorage Design Requirements.
C. Horizontal fall restraint cable system

1. The Horizontal fall restraint cable system (HFRCS) shall allow up to two users to traverse the length of
the cable span, each using a single lanyard for traveling along the cable spans. Turns in the HFRCS
will require a double lanyard. The HFRCS shall be designed for two users using an energy absorbing
lanyard, which limits the force applied to the HFRCS to 900 lb (408 kg) or less.
2. The horizontal line shall be constructed of 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) x 7 x 19 stainless steel or galvanized
aircraft cable, commercial grade per specification SD 118 and Fed. Spec. RR-W-410, construction
grade, with an average breaking strength of not less than 14,400 lb (6532 kg).
3. Horizontal lines shall be permanently attached to anchors with 3 non-corrosive permanently swaged
fittings swaged to manufacturer's specifications at each termination. Swages shall be verified not to
loosen under load. Load capacity of one swage shall exceed strength of wire rope.
4. Horizontal lines must be attached to anchorages designed to be capable of supporting a minimum
5,000 lb (2268 kg). However, the HFRCS cable and anchorages shall be independent of anchorages
used for suspension in accordance with provisions of Anchorage Design Requirements.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product proposed:

1. Test report certified by a professional engineer
2. General product data
3. Detailed drawings of equipment proposed
4. Installation instructions
C. Shop Drawings:
1. Submit scaled shop drawings showing location plan of all support equipment and sections detailing all
parts and accessories.
2. Clearly specify equipment dimensions, materials, fabrication details, hardware, and installation
instructions.
3. Include notes with guidelines of proper use of system.
4. Equipment location plan to include identification number next to each piece of equipment, i.e.
(anchors, davits, and rigging sleeves.) that are permanently affixed to a structure.
5. Field welds shall be indicated on equipment details using AWS symbols and showing length and size.
Auxiliary views shall be shown to clarify welding as required.
6. Shop drawings shall be prepared under supervision of a registered professional engineer and shall
bear engineer's seal and signature. Professional engineer shall be licensed in jurisdiction where
project is located. Include P.E. certified report of tested equipment.
D. Quality Assurance Submittal Certificates:

1. Provide documentation verifying company's amount of experience and successful performance in
design, fabrication, and installation of permanent window washing equipment.
2. Submit listing of company's installations representing similar scope and complexity to project
requirements for previous 10 years. List shall include information as follows:
a. Project name and address.
b. Name of owner.
c. Name of contractor.
d. Name of architect (if applicable).
e. Date of completion.
3. Provide documentation verifying that installers have been trained by the manufacturer and are
competent.
E. Contract Close-out Submittals:

1. Operation and Maintenance:
a. Provide a safety inspection logbook for yearly inspections. Log book shall include a certification
of compliance letter. The certification of compliance shall state that access system is in
compliance with current OSHA regulations and ANSI/IWCA I-14.1-2001 Window Cleaning
Safety Standard.
2. Project Record Document Data:
a. Record anchor locations and details.
b. Submit 2 copies of a reduced, plastic laminated Project Record Drawing showing as-installed
anchor locations, details, and instructional text in English (and Spanish upon request). Post one
copy on interior of each roof door or adjacent to exit on roof; owner shall establish exact
location.
c. Submit a letter of certification by a registered professional engineer licensed in jurisdiction
where project is located verifying that installed anchors and system are in compliance with
OSHA and ANSI requirements as specified. Each piece of access equipment dedicated to the
building shall be tested on site under the supervision of a P.E. in accordance with ANSI/IWCA
I-14.1-2001 Window Cleaning Safety and Summit Anchor Co. test procedures.
A. Qualifications:
1. Provide products from a company specializing in design, fabrication, and installation of permanent
window washing equipment with a minimum of 5 years documented experience. Companies like
miscellaneous metal fabricators not normally engaged in design and fabrications of suspended access
equipment are not acceptable.
2. Manufacturer and installer shall have specific liability insurance (products and completed operations)
in an amount not less than $5,000,000.
3. Installer(s) shall be trained or qualified by manufacturer in installation techniques and procedures of
permanent window washing equipment and shall demonstrate a minimum of 5 years successful
experience in such installation.
B. Regulatory Requirements:
1. Comply with Occupational Health and Safety Standards:
a. ANSI/IWCA I-14.1-2001 Window Cleaning Safety Standard.
b. 1910 Subpart D (Walking and Working Surfaces).
c. 1910.66 Appendix C (Personal Fall Arrest).
d. 1910.66 Subpart F (Powered Platforms).
e. OSHA Procedures and precautions for employees using descent control equipment.
2. Welding shall comply with AWS D1.1 and shall be performed by welders qualified to work in
jurisdiction where project is located.
3. Comply with AISC publications:
a. Load and Resistance Factor Design for Structural Steel Buildings.
b. Specifications for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members.
C. Mock-Up: Provide a mock-up for evaluation of surface preparation techniques and application workmanship.
1. Provide installed components designated by Architect.
2. Do not proceed with remaining work until workmanship, function and load capacity is approved by
Architect.
3. Rework components as required to produce acceptable work.
A. Deliver materials in original unopened packaging.
B. Storage and Protection:

1. Store materials in a protected area away from construction activities.
2. Clean bolts that have become dirty before installing.
3. Special care must be taken with stainless steel since not compatible with many chemicals and
materials.
4. Do not install damaged materials. Remove damaged materials from site.
1.8 SEQUENCING AND COORDINATION
A. General contractor is responsible for coordinating the schedule for producing shop drawings, fabricating
suspended access equipment, and installation. General contractor shall allow three weeks for delivery of
shop drawings and three weeks to deliver equipment upon approval of shop drawing by general contractor.
B. Manufacturer to provide detailed installation instructions and directions for installation of embedded items,
welded items, and through-bolted items, etc.
C. Manufacturer to provide installation assistance during installation of the equipment. However, the
responsibility of the installation rest with the general contractor unless equipment is installed and certified by
the manufacturer.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS AND INSTALLERS
A. Acceptable Manufacturer and Installer: BMU RC-T101 by XSPlatforms, MARS-Secalt by METCO or Any
approved Local available manufacturers.
B. Substitutions:
C. Equivalent or superior materials and/or system substitutions shall be submitted to architect of record for
review in compliance with substitution procedures in Section 01630 of this Project Manual.
2.2 STRUCTURAL COMPONENTS' MATERIALS
A. Exposed Structural Components Finish: Galvanized Mild Steel or Stainless Steel:

1. Steel: ASTM A572 GR 50.
2. Steel: ASTM A36.
3. Galvanizing: ASTM A123.
4. Stainless Steel; 304 ASTM A 193 Grade B8, Class 2.
5. Aluminum; 6061-T6 Alloy.
B. Yield Strength:
1. Base Plates and Bottom Plates, High Strength Steel: 50 ksi minimum.
2. Other Sections: 36 ksi minimum.
C. Non-Structural Components:
1. Aluminum; 6061-T6 Alloy.
2. Alloys shall conform to requirements published in AA Aluminum Standards.
3. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B209.
4. Extruded Bars, Rods, Shapes, and Tubes: ASTM B221.
D. Cold-Rolled Sections
1. ASTM A500.
2. Yield Strength: 55 ksi minimum.
3. Tensile Strength: 62 ksi minimum.
E. Nuts, Bolts, Davit Pins, and Washers:

1. Stainless Steel; 304 ASTM A 193 Grade B8 or F593C.
2. Galvanized Flat Washers ASTM F-436 or 18 -8 Stainless Steel.
F. Anchor Bolts (for securing base plate):

1. Metal: Stainless Steel, 304 Stainless Steel; ASTM A 193 Grade 8, B8.
2. Size: 5/8 inch (16 mm) diameter minimum.
G. Hilti HAD Undercut Anchoring System:

1. HAD-T Undercut Anchor (through-set type).
2. Anchor size and embedment depth: As needed to suit loads imposed by Summit Anchor equipment.
Consult project engineer to determine proper anchoring system based on concrete condition, psi, and
thickness before ordering Summit equipment.
3. Install per Hilti installation instructions.
H. Hilti HVA Capsule Adhesive Anchoring System:

1. Anchor size and embedment depth: As needed to suit loads imposed by Summit Anchor equipment.
Consult project engineer to determine proper anchoring system based on concrete condition, psi, and
thickness before ordering Summit equipment.
2. Install per Hilti installation instructions, using Hilti accredited installers only.
3. Each installed anchor assembly shall be load tested to 50 percent of its rated capacity. Test results
shall be certified a P.E. with experience in suspended access equipment.
2.3 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Anchor:
1. Capable of withstanding 5000 lb (2268kg) in any direction without permanent deflection.
2. Anchor eye size: Not less than 3/4 inch (20 mm) diameter material with 2-1/4 inches (60 mm) eye
opening.
3. Anchor Eye Metals:
a. Forged, 1030 quenched and tempered per ASTM A 576, 72ksi minimum
b. Stainless steel, type 304 solution annealed, 35 ksi minimum.
4. Anchor tube height: Not less than 4 inches (102 mm) above the finished roof.
B. Davit Base
1. Stanchion type complete with davit adapter and lock pin with stainless steel safety snap pin.
2. Davit socket: With two stainless steel hinge pins and stainless steel safety snap pins.
3. Pier Height: Not less than 10 in. above finished roof surface to allow proper fit up with adaptor.
C. Rigging Sleeves
1. Assembled complete with cap tethered to cross bar.
2. Length as required to clear under side of facade by 2 inches (51 mm).
3. Not less than 6 inches (152 mm) above the finished roof.
D. Cable system
1. Install complete with inline shock absorber to limit load to 2,250 lb (1020 kg) or less at terminating
anchors.
2. Pass through cable anchors to allow up to two workers to traverse straight cable runs with single
lanyard without detachment off lanyard.
E. Flashing with one E.P.D.M. gasket seal top and base

1. Seamless Spun Aluminum Flashing: ASTM B221; Type 6061-T6 alloy.
2. Stainless Steel: 304.
F. Cast in place equipment
1. A minimum of two cast-in-place steel studs are required for concrete embedded anchors.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate work true to dimension, square, plumb, level, and free from distortion or defects detrimental to
appearance and performance.
B. Grind off surplus welding material to ensure exposed surfaces are smooth so as not to abrade workers'
ropes.
C. Welding shall be in accordance with the AWS Structural Welding Code D1.1/D1.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Site Verification of Conditions:

1. Examine areas and conditions under which permanent window washing equipment shall be installed.
2. Report to general contractor any conditions that deviate from shop drawings or any defects in
workmanship that would cause an unsafe installation. This report shall be verified in writing to the
general contractor and any other responsible party.
3. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper execution of work.
4. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
5. Commencement of installation constitutes acceptance of conditions and responsibility for satisfactory
performance by installer.
6. Faults occurring in work of this section due to acceptance of unsatisfactory conditions shall be
corrected at no additional cost to Owner.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General Requirements:
1. Install window washing system in compliance with manufacturer's instructions. Install equipment level,
tightly fitted, and flush to adjacent surfaces as needed for proper installation.
2. Coordinate anchor installation with roofing installation to ensure a watertight and warrantable condition
of the roofing. Anchors shall be directly flashed into roofing in a manner compatible with roofing
system and anchors.
3. When components come into contact with dissimilar metals, surfaces shall be kept from direct contact
to prevent corrosion.
4. No wall anchors shall be installed through membrane roofing system without specification detailing
such from the architect or water proofing company warranting the roof.
5. Deform a minimum of two threads of tail end of anchor studs after nuts have been tightened to prevent
accidental removal or vandalism. Deform threads with 2/32 inch (2 mm) stainless steel punch.
B. Instructions for welding access equipment to structure:

1. All welders must be certified to American Welding Society (AWS) in accordance with AWS standards.
2. Welding rods used to weld the anchor system to be E70 xx electrodes.
3. Prior to welding anchors to structure, abrasively remove within one inch of all welded surfaces
galvanizing, mill, scale, and rust.
4. Immediately after welding, chip away slag to prepare for welding inspector to inspect welds.
5. An AWS certified welding inspector must inspect and confirm size of all field welds. Following the
inspection a written report must be supplied to the building owner and/or general contractor. Welded
joints shall not be painted until after welding has been completed and the weld accepted.
6. Immediately after an acceptable inspection, paint welded areas with cold-galvanizing compound to
protect from corrosion.
7. Structural steel to receive roof or wall anchors shall have a surface wide enough so that base plate
can be welded all the way around. For example, anchors equipped with 4-1/2 inches (112.5 mm) base
plates would require a minimum 5 inches (137.5 mm) surface to weld to.
C. Adhesive and Undercut Anchor Fasteners:

1. Installation of Summit Anchor Co. equipment mounted with adhesive type anchor fasteners shall be
performed by Hilti accredited installers only.
2. Installation of Summit Anchor Co. equipment mounted with undercut type anchor fasteners shall be
performed by Hilti trained installers only.
D. Aluminum Flashing:
1. Deck flange shall be flashed in compliance with National Roofing Contractor Association
recommendations.
3.3 REPAIR/RESTORATION
A. Galvanizing Touch-Up:
1. Immediately after erection clean field welds and abraded areas. Repair damaged areas in compliance
with ASTM A780.
A. Inspection and Site Visits:

1. Inspections and site visits shall be performed while installation of equipment is in progress under the
supervision qualified professional engineer registered in the jurisdiction where the project is located.
2. On site inspection of equipment welded to structure shall be performed by an AWS Certified Welding
Inspector verifying, in writing, size and quality of welds. Such an inspection shall be performed on
each piece of equipment before roofing material is installed.
3. On site inspection shall be performed on all cast in place items while being tied in with the rebar with
sufficient time before concrete is poured to allow to adjustments to embedded items as recommended
by inspector.
4. Contractor shall be responsible to schedule above site visits and inspections with sufficient advanced
notice given to the inspection company.
B. Site Tests:
1. All equipment shall be tested on site in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and
ANSI/IWCA I-14.1-2001 Window Cleaning Safety Standards, before being placed in service.
2. Equipment shall be tested under the supervision of a professional engineer with experience with
suspended maintenance equipment and manufacturers guidelines.
C. Manufacturer shall assist and/or supervise installation of window washing equipment installed by others
when such is included in contracted.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Verify that completed work has been installed correctly and products function properly. Make adjustments
where needed to ensure satisfactory operation.
B. Complete inspection logbook to certify system for use noting any deviations, changes, or corrections from
original shop drawings. Provide as-built anchor layout plan on 11 inches by 17 inches (280 mm by 430 mm)
paper or larger together with annual inspection log book.
END OF SECTION
SUBJECT: SECTION 11060- THEATER AND STAGE EQUIPMENT
SECTION 11060
THEATER AND STAGE EQUIPMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Stage Platforms
B. Stage Supports.
C. Seating Risers and Support Systems.
D. Guardrails.
E. Lighting.
F. Crowd Control Barriers.
G. Stair Units.
H. Storage Carts.
A. Section 16100 - Wiring Methods: Electrical wiring for lighting devices.
B. Section 16500 - Lighting: Interior and exterior luminaries.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Aluminum Association (AA): AA DAF-45 Designation System for Aluminum Finishes.
B. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC): AISC Manual of Steel Construction.
C. APA - The Engineered Wood Association: U.S. Product Standard PS 1-83.
D. ASTM International (ASTM):

1. ASTM A 36 - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel.
2. ASTM A 500 - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon
Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes.
3. ASTM A 501 - Standard Specifications for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon
Steel Structural Tubing.
4. ASTM A 513 - Standard Specification for Electric-Resistance-Welded Carbon and Alloy
Steel Mechanical Tubing.
5. ASTM B 209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.
E. American Welding Society (AWS):

1. ANSI/AWS D1.1/D1.1M Structural Welding Code - Steel.
2. AWS D1.3 Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel, Second Edition.
F. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA).
G. International Code Council (ICC): International Building Code.
MHA – TECH. SPECIFICATION – 1706 – 04/02/2015 SECTION 11060 – THEATER AND STAGE EQUIPMENT 1/7
H. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): NFPA 102 Standards for Grandstands, Folding and
Telescopic Seating, Tents, and Membrane Structures.
I. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): UL 94 Flammability Tests for Flammability of Plastic

Materials for Parts in Devices and Appliances.
1.4 SUBMITTALS

C. Shop Drawings: Submit plan, section, elevation and perspective drawings as necessary to depict
the proper configuration, assembly and installation and termination of each product specified in
this section.
D. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, two samples, representing actual
product, color, and finish.
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: All primary products specified in this section will be supplied by a
single manufacturer with a minimum of ten (10) years experience.
B. Installer Qualifications: All products listed in this section are to be installed by a single installer
with a minimum of five (5) years demonstrated experience in installing products of the same type
and scope as specified.
C. Mock-Up: Provide a mock-up for evaluation of surface preparation techniques and application
workmanship.
1. Finish areas designated by Architect.
2. Do not proceed with remaining work until workmanship, color, and sheen are approved by
Architect.
3. Refinish mock-up area as required to produce acceptable work.
A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.
B. Store and dispose of hazardous materials, and materials contaminated by hazardous materials,
in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Store products indoors in temperature controlled facility.
A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits

recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental
conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. At project closeout, provide to Owner or Owners Representative an executed copy of the

manufacturer's standard limited warranty against manufacturing defect, outlining its terms,
conditions, and exclusions from coverage.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Staging Concepts, Inc., which is located at: 7008 Northland Dr. Suite
150 ; Brooklyn Park, MN 55428; Toll Free Tel: 800-337-5339; Tel: 763-533-2094; Email: request
info ([email protected]); Web: www.stagingconcepts.com
B. Substitutions:
2.2 APPLICATIONS/SCOPE
A. Steel Structures: All steel structures must be designed in accordance with standards found in the
current edition of the AISC Manual of steel construction and welded in accordance with
ANSI/AWS D1.1/D1.1M and ANSI/AWS D1.3.
B. Platforms: Interlocking, lightweight modular stage platforms.

1. Configuration: Single tier.
2. Configuration: Multiple tiers.
3. Configuration: As noted on the Contract Drawings.
4. Live Load: not less than 125 psf (610 kg/sm).
2.3 PLATFORMS
A. Plywood Subfloor: SC90 - 1 inch (25.4 mm) thick CDX span rated sheathing in accordance with
APA 1-83.
1. Surface Material: Poly Vinyl - Color: Black.
2. Surface Material: Poly Vinyl - Color: Gray.
3. Surface Material: Plyron.
4. Surface Material: Carpet - Color: Black.
5. Surface Material: Carpet - Color: Gray.
6. Surface Material: Plywood - Unfinished
7. Surface Material: Plywood - Painted
8. Surface Material: Plywood - recessed for floor finish by others
9. Surface Material: Opaque Acrylic.
10. Surface Material: Clear Acrylic.
11. Frame: 4 Inch (102 mm) extruded 6105-T5 aluminum frame with 1 inch (25mm) protective
edge.
a. Finish: Mill.
b. Finish: Clear anodized.
c. Finish: Black powder coat
d. Finish: Black anodized.
B. Aluminum Subfloor: SC97 - 0.090 inch (2.3 mm) 6105-T5 aluminum, non-slip ribbed planks
finished to AA DAF-45.
1. Surface Planks: 6 inches x 1 3/4 inches (152mm x 45mm).
5. Frame: 4 3/4 Inch (121 mm) extruded 6105-T5 aluminum frame with 1 3/4 inch (45mm)
protective edge.
a. Finish: Mill.
b. Finish: Clear anodized.
2.4 SUPPORTS
A. Bridge Support: SC9600 Bridge support system with threaded adjustable-leveling foot.
1. Material: Aluminum
2. Finish: Mill.
3. Finish: Clear anodized.

4. Finish: AAMA 2604 Powder coat - Color: Black.
5. Height Range: 24 inches - 36 inches (610mm - 914mm).
8. Adjustment Increments: 4 inches (102mm) minimum.
B. Leg Supports: SC90 deck support system.

1. Leg Type: Fixed
2. Leg Type: Adjustable.
3. Material: Aluminum
4. Finish: Mill.
5. Finish: Clear anodized.
C. Frame Supports: SC 100 folding bridge supports.

1. Material: Steel
2. Leg Type: Fixed
3. Leg Type: Adjustable
4. Finish: AAMA 2604 Powder Coat - Color: Black
5. Finish: Zinc Plating
D. Adjustable Height Folding and Rolling Stage System: SC2003 Rolling Stage Support.
1. Dimensions: 8 feet x 12 feet (2438mm x 3658mm).
2. Height Range: 36 inches - 50 inches (914mm - 1270 mm)
3. Height Range: 48 inches - 72 inches (1219mm - 1829 mm).
E. Fixed Height Folding and Rolling Stage System: SC9000 EZ Stage.

1. Dimensions: 6 feet x 8 feet (1829mm x 2438mm).
2. Height: 12 inches (305mm).
2.5 SEATING RISER SUPPORT SYSTEM
A. Vertical Members: 2 inch (51mm) O.D. ASTM A 513 carbon steel tubing with urethane-coated
leveling foot.
1. Height Adjustment Increments: 3 inches (76 mm) maximum.
2. Finish: Black zinc plating.
3. Finish: Clear zinc plating.
B. Horizontal Members: 2 inch by 2 inch (51mm x 51mm) ASTM A 500 square carbon steel tubing.
C. Cross Bracing: 1 inch (25mm) ASTM A 36 carbon steel HR flat bar.

3. Finish; AAMA 2604 Powder coat - Color: Black.
D. Pivot Connection: Aluminum casting, 380 aluminum alloy, with grade 5 pivot pins.
E. Casters: Retractable with lever handle, meeting OSHA requirements of 60 pounds-force (2.873
kPa).
F. Seating Risers: SC2000 Folding Seating Risers.
2.6 GUARDRAILS
A. Railings:
1. Railing Type: SC90 Standard 2-Line Guardrail.
2. Railing Type: SC90 IBC Guardrail.
3. Vertical Post Spacing: In accordance with all federal, state and local building codes
having jurisdiction, but in no case greater than 4 inches (102mm).
4. Post and Rail Diameter: 1.66 inches (42mm).
5. Guardrail Height: 30 inches (762mm).
8. Toe board: 4 inch (102 mm) ASTM B 209 extruded aluminum.
9. Finish: Mill.
10. Finish: Anodized.
11. Finish: AAMA 2604 Powder coat
a. Color: Black.
b. Color: Silver.
B. Hardware: Tamperproof socket-head cap screw and connectors.
2.7 ACCESSORIES
A. Fixed Stair Units: Heavy gauge ASTM A 501 steel tube with Black AAMA 2604 powder coat
finish.
1. Treads:
a. Tread Depth: 11 inches (279mm).
b. Tread Width: 36 inches (914mm).
c. Tread Width: 44 inches (1118mm).
d. Tread Finish: To match platform decks.
2. Risers: Maximum height: 7 inches (178mm), unless otherwise specified.
3. Handrails: 1.66 inch (42mm) diameter posts and rails in accordance with all federal, state
and local building codes having jurisdiction.
a. Finish: Mill.
b. Finish: Anodized.
c. Finish: AAMA 2604 Powder coat - Color: Black.
4. Hardware: Tamperproof socket-head cap screw and connectors.
B. Adjustable Stair Units:

1. Stair Tread: 12 inches (304mm) deep by 36 inches (914mm) wide. Material and finish to
match platform panels.
2. Height Range: 16 inches to 24 inches (406mm - 610mm).
6. Handrails: 1.66 inch (42mm) diameter posts and rails in accordance with all federal, state
and local building codes having jurisdiction.
a. Finish: Mill.
b. Finish: Anodized.
c. Finish: AAMA 2604 Powder coat - Color: Black.
7. Hardware: Tamperproof socket-head cap screw and connectors.
C. Aisle Lights: UL approved 0.375 inch (9.5 mm) low voltage rope lighting, with 3 inch (76 mm)
bulb spacing, complete with transformer and wiring.
1. Voltage: 12 volt.
2. Voltage: 24 volt.
3. Bulbs: Clear.
D. Crowd Control Barricades: 4 foot by 4 foot (1219mm x 1219mm) interlocking ASTM A 501
tubular steel sections with steel mesh face panels and black AAMA 2604 powder coat finish.
E. Chair Stops: Extruded aluminum rectangular tubing.

1. Height: 2.188 inches (55.6 mm).
2. Finish: Mill.
3. Finish: Anodized.
F. Closure Panels:
1. Material: 1 inch (25mm) APA 1-83 CDX plywood sheathing. Includes quick-locking
mechanism. Finish: To match platform panel.
2. Material: 1/8 inch (3mm) or 3/16 inch (4.5mm) aluminum sheet. Includes quick locking
mechanism. Finish: Anodized.
G. Skirting: Fire retardant pleated fabric in accordance with NFPA 701, with reinforced webbing at
top and hook and loop attachment material. Includes extruded drapery attachment clip.
1. Height: Fixed - ____________ inches (____mm).
2. Height: Adjustable.
3. Color: Black.
4. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard color offerings.
5. Color: ______________.
H. Storage Carts: Heavy gauge ASTM A 501 steel tube with Black AAMA 2604 powder coat finish.
1. Cart Type: Arena Cart:
a. Deck Capacity: 15.
2. Cart Type: Vertical Platform Cart.
a. Deck Capacity: 4 - (20 1/2 inches wide).
b. Deck Capacity: 6 - (28 1/2 inches wide).
c. Deck Capacity: 7 - (34 1/2 inches wide).
d. Deck Capacity: 8 - (38 1/2 inches wide).
e. Deck Capacity: 10 - (47 inches wide).
3. Cart Type: Stackable Platform Single Cart.
4. Cart Type: Stackable Platform Stacked Cart.
5. Cart Type: 34 inch Wide Guardrail Cart.
a. Guardrail Capacity: 12
6. Cart Type: 44 inch Wide Guardrail Cart.
a. Guardrail Capacity: 16
7. Cart Type: Support Cart.
a. SC9600 Supports.
b. SC100 Supports.
8. Casters: Two (2), 8 inch (203mm) diameter fixed and two (2), 8 inch (203mm) diameter
swivel type.
9. Casters: Four (4), 8 inch (203mm) diameter swivel type.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
3.2 PREPARATION
B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best
result for the substrate under the project conditions.
3.3 INSTALLATION
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products until completion of project.
B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
SUBJECT: SECTION 11110- COMMERCIAL LAUNDRY EQUIPMENT
SECTION 11110
COMMERCIAL LAUNDRY EQUIPMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Commercial Laundry Equipment of the Following Types:

1. Washer - extractors.
2. Drying tumblers.
3. Flatwork ironers.
4. Flatwork folders.
5. Ironing systems.
A. Section 15105 - Pipes and Tubes: Water Supply piping.
B. Section 15150 - Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping: Waste piping.
C. Section 15190 - Fuel Piping: Natural or LP gas supply lines and fittings.
D. Section 15460 - Domestic Water Conditioning Equipment: Water softeners.
E. Section 15800 - Air Distribution: Hot air exhaust outlets.
F. Section 16100 - Wiring Methods: Electrical power connections.
1.3 SUBMITTALS

C. Shop Drawings: Provide drawings depicting the plan and elevation views of each model
specified, with notations for supply and waste line connections, chemical connections, steam
supply, electrical connections, handing and any other pertinent placement information.
Coordinate with locations found on the Contract Drawings.
D. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, two samples that depict the actual
product, color, and pattern.
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: All primary products specified in this section will be supplied by a
single manufacturer with a minimum of ten (10) years experience.
B. Installer Qualifications: All products listed in this section are to be installed by a single installer
with a minimum of five (5) years demonstrated experience in installing products of the same type
and scope as specified.
C. Certifications:
1. Washer-Extractors: Listed with CSA, ETL, ISO 9001 and 14001 Quality and
MHA – TECH. SPECIFICATION – 1706 – 04/02/2015 SECTION 11110 – COMMERCIAL LAUNDRY EQUIPMENT 1 / 29
Environmental Impact Standards.

2. Top load Washers: UL, CSA Listed
3. Dryers: UL, CSA Listed.
4. Ironers: Listed with CSA or ETL, ISO 9001 and 14001 Quality and Environmental Impact
Standards.
A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. Handle in
accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits

recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under
environmental conditions outside manufacturer's recommended limits.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Warranty: At project closeout, provide to Owner or Owners Representative an executed copy of

the manufacturer's standard limited warranty against manufacturing defect, outlining its terms,
conditions, and exclusions from coverage.
1. Washer-Extractors
a. Parts: Three (3) years on all machine parts from date of installation or three and one
half (3 1/2) years from date of manufacture; which ever comes first.
b. Washer Mainframe, inner cylinder, including shaft and coupler, bearings and seals:
Five (5) years from the date of installation or five and one half (5 1/2) years from the
date of manufacture; which ever comes first.
2. Topload Washers: Three (3) Years on all machine parts from date of installation. Dryers:
Three (3) Years on all machine parts from the date of installation.
3. Ironers:
a. Mainframe and Rolls: Five (5) years on parts.
b. Machine components (excluding ribbons): Three (3) years on parts from date of
installation or three and one half (3 1/2) years from date of manufacture.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Continental Girbau, Inc., which is located at: 2500 State Rd. 44 ;
Oshkosh, WI 54904; Toll Free Tel: 800-256-1073; Tel: 920-231-8222 ; Fax: 920-231-4666 ;
Email: request info ([email protected]); Web: www.continentalgirbau.com
B. Substitutions: Not permitted.
2.2 E-SERIES WASHER - EXTRACTORS
A. E-Series Washer-Extractor General Characteristics:

1. Cylinder (inner/outer) module front face material: AISI Type 304. Cabinet (Top/Lower
Front/ Pillars/Sides) material: Titan steel finish.
2. Noise and In-Line Filters:
a. No more than 70 dB (Measured Equivalent Continuous) at the workstation of the
unit.
b. Standard in-line circuit filters that reduce induced noise and radiating noise for
output wiring.
c. Standard in-line DC reactor for improving the input power-factor and reducing
harmonics when the voltage imbalance exceeds 2 percent.
3. Wash Wheel and Lifters:
a. Wash wheel polished to a clean finish and free of bolts and visible welds.
b. Funneled tub perforations in order to protect wash items damage caused from
sharp edges.
c. Tub lifter with top and side perforations that lift and drop water and wash items
together providing superior load saturation, chemical penetration and improved
rinsing.
4. Bearing Housing/Protection: Solid one (1) piece construction for optimum structural
support and must have an in-line bearing protection weep system allowing any moisture
that may breach the seal to be drained away before reaching the main bearing.
5. Suspension System: Unit equipped with an internal suspension system capable of
absorbing up to 95 percent of transmitted load dynamic energy (vibration) and isolating it
away from electrical components, major mechanical components (bearings, shaft, frame)
and the floor. Unit shall be freestanding and not require bolt down or pin attachment to
floor structure and should require no additional foundation from standard commercial
concrete for mounting.
B. E-Series Washer-Extractor - Logi Control General Characteristics:

1. Programmable Extraction: High extract shall be a minimum of 351 G-force with the ability
to program any one of six (6) extract speeds.
2. Cycle Selection: Maximum of eight (8) laundry cycles to ensure maximum simplicity.
Cycles may be customized to adapt to specific linen processing requirements with the
ability to program a minimum of two (2) and no more than nine (9) baths (fills) to ensure
thorough cleaning and flexibility.
3. Programmable Controls:
a. Programmable microprocessor control with 8-cycle programs with the ability to
program up to nine (9) phases. A phase consists of no less than four (4)
programmable fill levels, adjustable fill temperatures in six of nine phases,
automatic chemical injection and the ability to program at least three (3) on/off
rotation combinations for flush, wash and rinse phases.
b. Programming of up to eight (8) minutes per phase for flush and rinse baths and at
least twenty (20) minutes for wash, programmable extract, delay start control,
display cycle progress through LED indicator located on control panel and shall
allow management to limit operator programming through the use of a secret
access code and cycle lockout function.
4. Water Temperature Control: Thermostatically controlled water inlet valve. Operator may
set pre-set wash temperatures from 32 degrees F to 140 F (0 - 40 degrees C) for
designated phases. Wash phase shall allow programmable temperatures from 32 degrees
F to 194 degrees F (0 - 90 degrees C) to adapt to specific linen treatment specifications
and/or government sanitary regulations.
5. Progressive Cool Down: Capable of a gradual reduction of water temperature from wash
to rinse so to reduce fabric shock/wrinkles. Reduction shall be no more than 7 degrees F
per minute from 194 degrees F to 130 degrees F (90 degrees C - 54 degrees C).
6. Automatic Chemical Injection Chemical Dispenser: Eight (8) independent chemical
injection connections for automatic dispensing of liquid chemicals with a minimum of four
(4) independent activation signals. For safety purposes all connection ports shall be
mounted on the rear of the machine. Top mounted four (4) compartment pre-wash and
wash detergent / bleach / softener dispenser. The chemistry from liquid supply or hopper
compartments must be able to be dispensed automatically at the appropriate time of the
cycle only after being diluted with water. The chemical water solution is dispensed to the
load below water level to protect the load from possible chemical damage.
C. E-Series Washer-Extractor - LogiPro Control General Characteristics:

to program any one of six (6) extract speeds and “0” no extract.
2. Cycle Selection: Maximum of twenty-five (25) laundry cycles to ensure maximum
simplicity. Cycles may be customized to adapt to specific linen processing requirements
with the ability to program a minimum of two (2) and no more than eleven (11) phases
(bath exchanges) to ensure thorough cleaning and flexibility.

program up to eleven (11) phases. A phase consists of no less than six (6)
programmable fill levels, adjustable fill temperatures from 32 degrees F to 194
degrees Fahrenheit (0 - 90 degrees Celsius) in all 11 phases, automatic chemical
injection, chemical pump timing signal and the ability to program at least three (3)
on/off rotation combinations and no rotation for flush, wash and rinse phases.
b. Programming of up to twenty (20) minutes per phase for flush, wash and rinse baths
and programmable extract in each phase up to 9 minutes, delay start control,
set pre-set wash temperatures from 32 degrees F to 194 degrees Fahrenheit (0 - 90
degrees Celsius) for phases (baths) one (1) to eleven (11). All phases shall allow
programmable temperature to adapt to specific linen treatment specifications and/or
government sanitary regulations.
to rinse so to reduce fabric shock/wrinkles. Reduction shall be no more than 7 degrees
Fahrenheit per minute from 194 degrees Fahrenheit to 130 degrees Fahrenheit (90
degrees Celsius - 54 degrees Celsius).
6. Rinse Hold: When selected by the operator, will automatically halt the selected bath until
the operator advances the machine past “hold” and allows the machine to complete the
cycle.
7. Delay Start: Programmable cycle start option programmable by selecting the cycle and
activating the feature. This programmable clock is set by programming the 24-hour clock
time if start.
8. Automatic Chemical Injection Chemical Dispenser: Four (4) independent chemical
injection connections (model EH020) for automatic dispensing of liquid chemicals with a
minimum of four (4) independent activation signals. For safety purposes all connection
ports shall be mounted on the rear of the machine. Top mounted four (4) compartment
pre-wash and wash detergent / bleach / softener dispenser. The chemistry from liquid
supply or hopper compartments must be able to be dispensed automatically at the
appropriate time of the cycle only after being diluted with water. The chemical water
solution is dispensed to the load below water level to protect the load from possible
chemical damage.
D. E-Series Washer-Extractor - Inteli Control General Characteristics:

1. Wash / Extraction Speeds: Programmability of at least four (4) wash rotation speeds and
at least six (6) levels of extract by phase. High extract is a minimum of 351 G-Force.
2. Cycle Selection: At least 20 preprogrammed laundry cycles and 79 fully programmable
cycles. The programmable cycles shall allow flexibility of as few as one (1) Phase / bath or
as many as 21 phase / bath exchanges to ensure proper load processing and flexibility.
a. 79 fully programmable cycles with the ability to program manually at the machine or
via a card download interface for maximum speed and accuracy for multiple
machines or locations.
b. Up to 21 phases or bath exchanges. A phase (bath) consists of no less than six (6)
programmable fill levels, adjustable fill temperatures, programmable thermostatic
cool down, automatic chemical dispensing and or injection and the ability to select
at least five (5) on/off rotation combinations of speed and duration for wash, variable
wash time and 6 variable extract speeds for all programmed phases.
c. Display cycle progress through LED indicator using words and icons located on
control panel and shall allow management to limit operator programming through
the use of a secret access code and cycle lockout function.
pre-set all phase bath temperatures from 32 degrees F to 194 degrees F (0 - 90 degrees
C) to adapt to specific linen treatment specifications and/or government sanitary
regulations.
to rinse so to reduce fabric shock/wrinkles. Allows at least four (4) programmable levels of
gradient reduction per minute including: 2, 5.5, 9 and 18 degrees F.
6. Automatic Chemical Injection Chemical Dispenser: Unit shall provide eight (8)
independent chemical injection connections for automatic dispensing of liquid chemicals
with a minimum of four (4) independent activation signals with an option for twelve (12),
EH030, EH040 models and twelve (12) independent activation signals standard for the
EH055, EH090, EH130, EH255 models. For safety purposes all connection ports shall be
mounted on the rear of the machine. Unit shall be equipped with a top mounted four
(4)-compartment pre-wash and wash detergent/ bleach/softener dispenser. The chemistry
from liquid supply or hopper compartments must be able to be dispensed automatically at
the appropriate time of the cycle only after being diluted with water. The control shall allow
for the hopper and liquid injection signals to be controlled independently and allow for
signal duration/flush programming. The chemical water solution shall be delivered to the
load below water level to protect the load from possible chemical damage.
E. Model: EH020 as manufactured by Continental Girbau, Inc.

1. Capacity:
a. Weight: 20 lbs (8 kg).
b. Volume: 2.8 cu ft (79.2 cu dm).
2. Size / Dimensions:
a. Cylinder Diameter: 21.1 inches (536 mm).
b. Cylinder Depth: 13.8 inches (351 mm).
c. Height: 42.5 inches (1080 mm).
d. Width: 27 inches (685 mm).
e. Depth: 27.6 inches (700 mm).
f. Door Opening: 12.7 inches (322 mm).
g. Floor to Door Height: 15.4 inches (390 mm).
3. Dynamic Load: Dynamic load to floor shall not exceed 115-pounds with a frequency of
16.2 Hz.
4. Control Type: Logi Control.
5. Performance:
a. Washing Speed: 50 RPM.
b. Spin Speeds: 50/100/580/690/780/970 RPM.
c. G-Force: 0.75/3/101/143/183/300.
6. Mechanical:
a. Drain: 1 inch (25.4 mm) Pump Drain.
b. Drain: 2 inches (51 mm) Gravity Drain.
c. Inlets: 3/4 inch (19 mm).
d. Water Pressure: 30 to 60 psi (2 - 4 bar).
e. Water Flow Rate: 8 gal / min (30 l/min).
f. Motor Power: 0.8 kW.
g. Modified Energy Factor (MEF): 2.21.
h. Water Consumption Factor (WCF): 5.03.
7. Power: 120V/60Hz/Single Phase.
F. Model: EH030 as manufactured by Continental Girbau, Inc.

1. Capacity:
b. Volume: 4.4 cu ft (126 cu dm).
d. Width: 31.3 inches (796 mm).
g. Floor to Door Height: 20 inches (509 mm).
16.7 Hz.
4. Performance:
a. Spin Speeds: 46.5/100/400/600/800/1005 RPM.
b. G-Force:.75/3/56/125/222/351.
5. Control Type: Logi Control - 46.5 RPM.
6. Control Type: Inteli Control - 27/36/43/46.5 RPM.
7. Mechanical:
a. Drain: 3 inches (76 mm).
b. Inlets: 3/4 inch (19 mm).
c. Water Pressure: 30 to 60 psi (2 - 4 bar).
d. Water Flow Rate: 16 gal/min (60 l/min).
e. Motor Power: 0.87 kW.
f. Modified Energy Factor (MEF): 2.08.
g. Water Consumption Factor (WCF): 4.68.
8. Power: 208-240V/60Hz/Single Phase (standard).
9. Auxiliary Heating: Electric- 208V/60Hz/Single Phase.
a. Heating Element: 6.4 kW.
11. Auxiliary Heating: Steam.
a. Steam Pressure: 29 to 87 psi (2-6 bar).
b. Steam Flow: 176 lbs/hr (80 kg/hr).
G. Model: EH040 as manufactured by Continental Girbau, Inc.

1. Capacity:
a. Weight: 40 lbs (17.3 kg).
15.8 Hz.
4. Performance:
a. Spin Speeds: 44/100/351/550Hz/750Hz/950 RPM.
b. G-Force: 0.75/4/48/119/221/354.
5. Control Type: Logi Control - 44 RPM.
6. Control Type: Inteli Control - 25/34/40/44.
7. Mechanical:
8. Power: 208-240V/60Hz/Single Phase (standard).
11. Auxiliary Heating: Steam:
H. Model: EH055 as manufactured by Continental Girbau, Inc.
1. Capacity:
b. Cylinder Depth: 21 inches (530 mm).
15.3 Hz.
4. Performance:
a. Spin Speeds: 43/87/330/525/725/920 RPM.
b. G-Force: 0.77/3.14/45/114/218/351.
5. Control Type: Logi Control.
6. Control Type: Inteli Control - 22/29/36/43.
7. Mechanical:
8. Power: 208-240V/60Hz/Three Phase. (Standard).
9. Auxiliary Heating: Electric - 208V/60Hz/Three Phase.
10. Auxiliary Heating: Electric- 240V/60Hz/Three Phase.
11. Auxiliary Heating: Steam:
I. Model: EH090 as manufactured by Continental Girbau, Inc.

1. Capacity:
d. Depth: 57.3 inches (1455 mm).
e. Width: 54.7 inches (1390 mm).
f. Floor to Door Height: 25.8 inches (655 mm).
g. Door Opening: 22 inches (558 mm).
14.5 Hz.
7. Performance:
a. Washing Speeds: 19/26/33/40 RPM.
b. Spin Speeds: 40/79/300/490/680/870 RPM.
c. G-Force: 0.81/3.15/45/121/233/381.
8. Mechanical:
b. Inlets: 1 inch (25.4 mm).
c. Water Pressure: 30-60 psi (2-4 bar).
e. Steam Connection: 3/4 inch (19 mm).
g. Power: 208-240V/60Hz/Three Phase.
h. Power: 440-480V/60Hz/Three Phase.
J. Model: EH130 Stationary as manufactured by Continental Girbau, Inc.

1. Capacity:
f. Floor to Door Height: 32 inches (812 mm).
13.3 Hz.
7. Performance:
b. Spin Speeds: 36/72/275/450/625/800 RPM.
c. G-Force: 0.78/3.14/46/122/236/387.
8. Mechanical:
K. Model: EH130 Tilt as manufactured by Continental Girbau, Inc.

1. Capacity:
e. Width: 65 inches (1650 mm).
13.3 Hz.
7. Performance:
b. Spin Speeds: 36/72/275/450/625/800 RPM.
c. G-Force: 0.78/3.14/46/122/236/387.
8. Mechanical:
f. Compressed Air Connection: 3/8 inch (10 mm).
g. Compressed Air Pressure: 98 psi (7 bar).
h. Compressed Air Flow: 7.1 cfm (200 l/m).
i. Motor Power: 7.3 kW.
j. Power: 208-240V/60Hz/Three Phase.
k. Power: 440-480V/60Hz/Three Phase.
L. Model: EH255 Stationary as manufactured by Continental Girbau, Inc.

1. Capacity:
g. Door Opening: 26.9 inches (684 mm).
12.1 Hz.
5. Performance:
b. Spin Speeds: 32/66/250/405/565/725 RPM.
c. G-Force: 0.75/3.2/46/120/234/386.
6. Mechanical:
b. Inlets: 2 inch (51mm).
e. Steam Connection: 1 inch (25.4 mm).
f. Motor Power: 11 kW.
M. Model: EH255 Tilt as manufactured by Continental Girbau, Inc.

1. Capacity:

d. Depth: 81 inches (2058 mm).
12.1 Hz.
5. Performance:
b. Spin Speeds: 32/66/250/405/565/725 RPM.
c. G-Force: 0.75/3.2/46/120/234/386.
6. Mechanical:
b. Inlets: 2 inch (51 mm).
e. Steam Connection: 1 inch (25.4 mm).
f. Compressed Air Connection: 3/8 inch (10 mm).
g. Compressed Air Pressure: 98 psi (7 bar).
h. Compressed Air Flow: 7.1 cfm (200 l/m).
i. Motor Power: 11 kW.
j. Power: 208-240V/60Hz/Three Phase.
k. Power: 440-480V/60Hz/Three Phase.
2.3 M-SERIES WASHER - EXTRACTORS
A. M-Series Washer-Extractor General Characteristics:

1. Cylinder (inner/outer) module front face material: AISI Type 304. Cabinet (Top/Lower
Front/ Pillars/Sides) material: Titan steel finish.
2. Noise and In-Line Filters:
a. No more than 70 dB (Measured Equivalent Continuous) at the workstation of the
unit.
b. Standard in-line circuit filters that reduce induced noise and radiating noise for
output wiring.
c. Standard in-line DC reactor for improving the input power-factor and reducing
harmonics when the voltage imbalance exceeds 2 percent.
3. Wash Wheel and Lifters:
a. Wash wheel polished to a clean finish and free of bolts and visible welds.
b. Funneled tub perforations in order to protect wash items damage caused from
sharp edges.
c. Tub lifter with top and side perforations that lift and drop water and wash items
together providing superior load saturation, chemical penetration and improved
rinsing.
4. Bearing Housing/Protection: Solid one (1) piece construction for optimum structural
support and must have an in-line bearing protection weep system allowing any moisture
that may breach the seal to be drained away before reaching the main bearing.
B. M-Series Washer-Extractor - LogiPro Control General Characteristics:

to program any one of six (6) extract speeds and “0” no extract.
2. Cycle Selection: Maximum of twenty-five (25) laundry cycles to ensure maximum
simplicity. Cycles may be customized to adapt to specific linen processing requirements
with the ability to program a minimum of two (2) and no more than eleven (11) phases
(bath exchanges) to ensure thorough cleaning and flexibility.
program up to eleven (11) phases. A phase consists of no less than six (6)
programmable fill levels, adjustable fill temperatures from 32 degrees -194 degrees
Fahrenheit (0-90 Celsius) in all eleven (11) phases, automatic chemical injection,
chemical pump timing signal and the ability to program at least three (3) on/off
rotation combinations and no rotation for flush, wash and rinse phases.
b. Programming of up to twenty (20) minutes per phase for flush, wash and rinse baths
and programmable extract in each phase up to 9 minutes, delay start control,
set pre-set wash temperatures from 32 degrees F to 194 degrees Fahrenheit (0 - 90
degrees Celsius) for phases (baths) one (1) to eleven (11). All phases shall allow
programmable temperature to adapt to specific linen treatment specifications and/or
government sanitary regulations.
to rinse so to reduce fabric shock/wrinkles. Reduction shall be no more than 7 degrees
Fahrenheit per minute from 194 degrees Fahrenheit to 130 degrees Fahrenheit (90
degrees Celsius - 54 degrees Celsius).
6. Rinse Hold: When selected by the operator, will automatically halt the selected bath until
the operator advances the machine past “hold” and allows the machine to complete the
cycle.
7. Delay Start: Programmable cycle start option programmable by selecting the cycle and
activating the feature. This programmable clock is set by programming the 24-hour clock
time if start.
8. Automatic Chemical Injection Chemical Dispenser: Four (4) independent chemical
injection connections (model EM025) and eight (8) independent chemical injection
connections (models EM040 and EM055) for automatic dispensing of liquid chemicals with
a minimum of four (4) independent activation signals. For safety purposes all connection
ports shall be mounted on the rear of the machine. Top mounted four (4) compartment
pre-wash and wash detergent / bleach / softener dispenser. The chemistry from liquid
supply or hopper compartments must be able to be dispensed automatically at the
appropriate time of the cycle only after being diluted with water. The chemical water
solution is dispensed to the load below water level to protect the load from possible
chemical damage.
C. Model: EM025 as manufactured by Continental Girbau, Inc.

1. Capacity:
a. Dry weight: 25 lbs (11 kg).
d. Width: 27 inches (685 mm).
3. Performance:
b. Spin Speeds: 50Hz/100/300/400/500/600 RPM.
c. G-Force: 0.75/3/27/48/75/108.
4. Mechanical:
a. Drain: 2 inches (51mm).

5. Power: 120V/60Hz/Single Phase.
D. Model: EM040 as manufactured by Continental Girbau, Inc.

1. Capacity:
a. Dry weight: 40 Lbs (17 Kg).
b. Volume: 5.9 Cu. ft. (166 cu dm).
3. Performance:
a. Washing Speed: 46.5 RPM.
b. Spin Speeds: 46.5/100/300/400/500/600 RPM.
c. G-Force: 0.75/3/31/56/87/125.
4. Mechanical:
e. Steam Connection: 1/2 inch (12.7 mm).
5. Power: 208-240V/60Hz/Single Phase.
E. Model: EM055 as manufactured by Continental Girbau, Inc.

1. Capacity:
a. Dry weight: 55 lbs (24 kg).
b. Volume: 8 cu ft (226 cu dm).
3. Performance:
a. Washing Speed: 43.6 RPM.
b. Spin Speeds: 43.6/100/300/400/500/600 RPM.
c. G-Force: 0.75/4/35/63/98/141.
4. Mechanical:
5. Power: 208-240V/60Hz/Single Phase.
2.4 L SERIES WASHER-EXTRACTORS
A. L-Series Washer-Extractor - General Characteristics

1. Cabinet (front top and sides)/Cylinder (Inner and outer) Material: AISI Type 304.
2. Cycle Selection: A minimum of 99 laundry cycles with a minimum of 79 cycles, which may
be customized to adapt to specific linen processing requirements.
a. Equipped with a microprocessor control allowing adjustment of wash/rinse
temperatures, water level up to a minimum of six (6) levels, three (3) variable
rotation options plus "0" rotation with option of reprogramming on/off time by the
second, and the programming of extraction times up to twelve (12) minutes per
phase.
b. Allows programming of chemical injection times by one (1) second intervals. Control
shall display cycle progress through LED indicator located on control panel.
c. Allows management to limit operator programming through the use of a program
access key including audit capability of total and individual cycles run, hours of
operation and error code counts.
4. Water Temperature Control: Operator may set pre-set wash temperatures from 33
degrees F to 194 degrees F (0.5 - 90 degrees C) to adapt to specific linen treatment
specifications and/or government sanitary regulations. Water inlet valve shall be
thermostatically controlled.
5. Progressive Cool Down/Crease Guard: Capable of a gradual reduction of water
temperature from wash to rinse so to reduce fabric shock/wrinkles. Reduction limited to no
more than 7 degrees F per minute until 113 degrees F is reached.
6. Chemical Dispenser: Top mounted four (4)-compartment pre-wash and wash
detergent/bleach/softener dispenser. For safety purposes, dispenser cover is self-closing
and manufactured using flexible material for optimum durability and longevity.
7. Automatic Chemical Injection: Five (5) independent chemical injection connections for
automatic dispensing of liquid chemicals with a minimum of four (4) independent activation
signals. For safety purposes all connection ports are mounted on the rear of the machine
and shall allow for hook-up without removal of the machine's top or rear panel.
8. Cycle Lockout: Lockout of any program or programs from operator use in order to
eliminate the frequency of operator error.
9. Program Accelerator/Visual Cycle Indicator: Operator may manually accelerate program
to permit bypass of any program step. Accelerator control and visual cycle indicator is
conveniently located on the microprocessor control and allows operator to monitor cycle
progress/position. Manual accelerate may be locked out at any time.
10. Water Seals: Machine bearings protected by double seals. Main seal composed of EPDM
Nitrile rubber for maximum moisture protection.
B. Model: L1075 as manufactured by Continental Girbau, Inc.

1. Capacity:
b. Cylinder Depth: 20 inches (500 mm).
c. Height: 57 inches (1440 mm).
3. Performance:
b. Spin Speed: 510 RPM.
c. G-Force: 131.
4. Mechanical:

c. Water Pressure: 7 to 90 psi (0.5 - 6 bar).
5. Auxiliary Heating: Electric.
b. Steam Flow: 220 lbs/ hr (100 kg/hr).
C. Model: L1125 as manufactured by Continental Girbau, Inc.

1. Capacity:
f. Floor to Door Height: 24.4 inches plus base (620 mm plus base).
3. Performance:
b. Spin Speed: 465 RPM.
c. G-Force: 130.
4. Mechanical:
c. Water Pressure: 7 to 90 psi (0.5 - 6 bar).
5. Auxiliary Heating: Electric.
a. Steam Pressure: 30-90 psi (2-6 bar).
b. Steam Flow: 400 lbs/ hr (180 kg/hr).
2.5 MG SERIES WASHER-EXTRACTORS
A. Model: MG040 on-premise 40 pound capacity hard-mount washer-extractor by Continental

Girbau, Inc.
1. Capacity: 40 lbs (17 kg).
2. Cylinder Diameter: 24.4 inches (620 mm).
a. Height: 52.2 inches (1325 mm).
b. Depth: 40 inches (1016 mm).
c. Width: 29.5 inches (750 mm).
4. Heating: Hot water.
5. Heating: Steam.
6. Heating: Electric auxiliary heat.
7. Motor Power: 0.8 kW.
8. Electric Heating Power: 208/60/1: 8.1 kW.

B. Model: MG055 on-premise 55 pound capacity hard-mount washer-extractor by Continental

Girbau, Inc.
1. Capacity: 55 lbs (24 kg).
b. Depth: 43.2 inches (1098 mm).
4. Heating: Hot water.
5. Heating: Steam.
6. Heating: Electric auxiliary heat.
7. Motor Power: 1.05 kW.
2.6 ECON-O-WASH WASHERS
A. Model: JWT820 as manufactured by Continental Girbau, Inc.

1. Capacity: 2.8 cu ft (79 cu dm).
a. Height: 43 inches (1092 mm).
d. Floor to Work Surface: 36 inches (914 mm).
e. Color: White.
3. Performance:
a. Washing Speed: 44/67 RPM.
b. Spin Speed: 710/473 RPM.
4. Motor Power: 1/2 HP.
a. Power: 120V/60Hz/Single Phase - 15A Protection.
2.7 PRO SERIES II DRYING TUMBLERS
A. Pro Series II Drying Tumblers General Characteristics:

1. Cylinder walls and lifter material: galvanized steel. Rear cylinder back plate material:
Annealed stainless steel.
2. Cylinder walls, back plate and lifter material: galvanized steel.
3. Axial airflow system introduces heated air from the back of the cylinder and is directed
through the load exiting through the front perforations.
4. Microprocessor Control system with four time-dry or auto-dry cycles and a no-heat cycle
option. AutoDry selection automatically controls heat cycle runtime based on dryness
level of individual loads. AutoDry and time dry allows temperature control by degree
(Celsius or Fahrenheit) and automatic load cool-down and special Condition cycle.
B. Model: CG20-30 as manufactured by Continental Girbau, Inc.

1. Capacity: Up to 30 pounds, 7.7 cu ft (0.22 cu m).
a. Basket Diameter: 26.5 inches (673 mm).
b. Basket Depth: 24 inches (610 mm).
d. Height: 72.25 inches (1835 mm) with optional filler plate.
e. Height: 76.25 inches (1937 mm) with optional filler plate.
f. Depth: 40.875 inches (1038 mm).
g. Width: 28 inches (711 mm).
h. Door Opening: 22.68 inches (576 mm).
i. Floor to Door: 27.5 inches (699 mm).
3. Exhaust Diameter: 6 inches (152 mm).
4. Basket Motor: (2) 1/4 HP (19 kW).

5. Mechanical - Gas Heat Source:
a. Power: 120V/60Hz/Single Phase.
b. Power: 208-240V/60Hz/Single Phase.
c. Power: 200-208,240V/60Hz/Three Phase.
d. Power: 380V/60Hz/Three Phase.
e. Power: 460-480V/60Hz/Three Phase.
f. Heating: 64,000 BTU/h.
g. Inlet Diameter: 1/2 inch (13 mm) Male NPT.
6. Mechanical - 12 kW Electric Heat Source:
a. Oven Size: 40,956 BTU/h.
b. Power: 208V/60Hz/Single Phase - 64A.
c. Power: 240V/60Hz/Single Phase - 57A.
d. Power: 200-208V/60Hz/Three Phase - 37A.
e. Power: 240V/60Hz/Three Phase - 33A.
f. Power: 380V/60Hz/Three Phase - 20A.
g. Power: 460-480V/60Hz/Three Phase - 16A.
7. Mechanical - Steam Heat Source:
f. Steam Heating:
1) At 100 psi: 134,700 BTU/h.
2) At 15 psi: 89,940 BTU/h.
g. Steam Inlet: 3/4 inch (19 mm) NPT.
h. BHP Consumption:
1) At 100 psi: 3.9 BHP.
2) At 15 psi: 2.6 BHP.
C. Model: CG30-40 as manufactured by Continental Girbau, Inc.

a. Basket Diameter: 30 inches (762 mm).
e. Height: 76.25 inches (1937 mm) with optional filler plate.
f. Depth: 46.875 inches (1191 mm).
g. Width: 31.5 inches (800 mm).
h. Door Opening: 22.68 inches (576 mm).
i. Floor to Door: 27.5 inches (699 mm).
4. Basket Motor: (2) 1/4 HP (0.19 kW).
g. Inlet Diameter: 1/2 inch (13mm) Male NPT.
d. Power: 200-208V/60Hz/Three Phase - 37A.
e. Power: 240V/60Hz/Three Phase - 33A.
f. Power: 380V/60Hz/Three Phase - 20A.

g. Power: 460-480V/60Hz/Three Phase - 16A.
f. Steam Heating:
1) At 100 psi: 166,000 BTU/h.
2) At 15 psi: 129,000 BTU/h.
g. Steam Inlet: 3/4 inch (19 mm) NPT.
h. BHP Consumption:
1) At 100 psi: 4.8 BHP.
2) At 15 psi: 3.7 BHP.
D. Model: CG55-65 as manufactured by Continental Girbau, Inc.

f. Width: 34.5 inches (876 mm).
h. Floor to Door: 26.87 inches (682 mm).
d. Heating: 112,000 BTU/h.
e. Inlet Diameter: 1/2 inch (13 mm) Male NPT.
E. Model: CG50-60 as manufactured by Continental Girbau, Inc.

c. Height: 76.625 inches (1946 mm) - gas / electric models.
d. Height: 80 inches (2032 mm) - steam model.
e. Depth: 47 inches (1194 mm).
4. Basket Motor: 1/2 HP (0.37 kW).
5. Reversing Motor: (2) 1/3 HP (0.25).
b. Power: 200-208,240V/60Hz/Single Phase.

g. Inlet Diameter: 1/2 inch (13 mm) Male NPT.
b. Power: 200-208V/60Hz/Three Phase.
c. Power: 240V/60Hz/Three Phase.
e. Power: 440V/60Hz/Three Phase.
f. Power: 460-480V/60Hz/Three Phase.
g. Steam Heating:
1) At 100 psi: 177,500 BTU/h.
2) At 15 psi: 119,000 BTU/h.
h. Steam Inlet: 3/4 inch (19 mm) NPT.
i. BHP Consumption:
1) At 100 psi: 5.1 BHP.
2) At 15 psi: 3.4 BHP.
F. Model: CG75-85 as manufactured by Continental Girbau, Inc.

2. Size / Dimensions:.
c. Height: 76.625 inches (1946 mm) - gas / electric models.
d. Height: 80 inches (2032 mm) - steam model.
e. Depth: 53 inches (1346 mm).
4. Basket Motor: 3/4 HP (0.56 kW).
5. Reversing Motor: (2) 1/3 HP (0.25 kW).
f. Inlet Diameter: 1/2 inch (13 mm) Male NPT.

g. Heating: 165,000 BTU/h.
h. Steam Heating:
1) At 100 psi: 210,000 BTU/h.
2) At 15 psi: 141,000 BTU/h.
i. Steam Inlet: 3/4 inch (19 mm) NPT.
j. BHP Consumption:
1) At 100 psi: 6.1 BHP.
2) At 15 psi: 4.1 BHP.
G. Model: CG115-25 as manufactured by Continental Girbau, Inc.

b. Basket Depth: 41 inches (1041mm).
c. Height: 85.7 inches (2177 mm) - gas model.
d. Height: 83.5 inches (2121 mm) - steam model.
4. Reversing Motor: 3/4 HP (0.56 kW).
5. Motor (Fan): 1 HP (0.75 kW).
a. Power: 200-208,240V/60Hz/Three Phase.
c. Heating: 300,000 BTU/h.
d. Inlet Diameter: 3/4 inch (19 mm) Male NPT.
b. Power: 440V/60Hz/Three Phase.
c. Power: 460-480V/60Hz/Three Phase.
d. Steam Heating:
1) At 100 psi: 405,000 BTU/h.
2) At 15 psi: 272,000 BTU/h.
e. Steam Inlet: 3/4 inch (19 mm) NPT.
f. BHP Consumption:
1) At 100 psi: 11.7 BHP.
2) At 15 psi: 7.9 BHP.
H. Model: CG165-75 as manufactured by Continental Girbau, Inc.

a. Basket Diameter: 50.75 inches (1289 mm).
b. Basket Depth: 42.5 inches (1080 mm).
g. Floor to Door: 33.86 inches (860 mm).
4. Reversing Motor: 3/4 HP (0.56 kW).
5. Motor (Fan): 3 HP (2.24 kW).
c. Heating: 395,000 BTU/h.
d. Inlet Diameter: 1 inch (25.4 mm) Male NPT.

b. Power: 440V/60Hz/Three Phase.
c. Power: 460-480V/60Hz/Three Phase.
d. Steam Heating:
1) At 100 psi: 648,000 BTU/h.
2) At 15 psi: 433,000 BTU/h.
e. Steam Inlet: 3/4 inch (19 mm) male NPT.
f. Steam Outlet: 1 inch (25.4 mm) NPT.
g. BHP Consumption:
1) At 100 psi: 18.8 BHP.
2) At 15 psi: 12.6 BHP.
2.8 PRO-SERIES II STACK DRYING TUMBLERS
A. Pro Series II Drying Stack Drying Tumblers General Characteristics

1. Cylinder walls and lifter material: galvanized steel. Rear cylinder backplate material:
Annealed stainless steel.
2. Cylinder walls, back plate and lifter material: galvanized steel.
3. Axial airflow system introduces heated air from the back of the cylinder and is directed
through the load exiting through the front perforations.
4. Microprocessor Control system with four time-dry heat cycles (High, Medium, Low and
Delicates ) cycle option. Time dry allows variable time, temperature control by degree
(Celsius or Fahrenheit) and automatic load cool-down.
B. Model: CG30X2 as manufactured by Continental Girbau, Inc.

1. Capacity: 2-Drying pockets each with capacity up to 30 pounds, 10.6 Cu. Ft. (0.3 cu m)
per basket.
c. Height: 76.25 inches (1937mm).
g. Floor to Door (top door): 48 inches (1219 mm).
a. Power: 120,208-240V/60Hz/Single Phase.
b. Power: 200-208,240V/60Hz/Three Phase.
d. Power: 460-480V/60Hz/Three Phase.
e. Heating (per pocket): 73,000 BTU/h.
f. Inlet Diameter: 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) Male NPT.
C. Model: CG45X2 as manufactured by Continental Girbau, Inc.

1. Capacity: 2-Drying pockets each with capacity up to 45 pounds, 14.8 cu ft (0.419 cu m)
per basket.
g. Floor to Door (top door): 49 inches (1245 mm).
a. Power: 208-240V/60Hz/Single Phase.

b. Power: 200-208,240V/60Hz/Three Phase.
c. Heating (per pocket): 95,000 BTU/h.
d. Inlet Diameter: 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) Male NPT.
2.9 E SERIES DRYING TUMBLERS
A. E-Series 20-25 Pound High Performance Dryer - General Characteristics

1. Dry Weight Capacity: Rated capacity of up to 25 pounds, allowing for varied linen types
and maximum drying speed.
2. Cabinet: AISI-304 stainless steel top, front and side panels.
3. Cylinder Dimension / Volume: Minimum 26 inch (660 mm) diameter for maximum drop and
no more than 24 inches (610 mm) deep for ease of unloading. Cylinder cubic volume shall
be a minimum of 7.0 cubic feet (0.2 cu m) with a cylinder light.
4. Door Material and Diameter:
a. Tumbler door: Steel with a tab latch door system and a shock resistant clear
window.
b. Window: Mounted without the use of gaskets exposed to the tumbler load that may
wear. Door diameter must be at least 20 1/2 inches (510 mm) for ease of loading
and unloading.
5. Airflow / Vent Diameter: Maximum of 220 cfm for fast, efficient drying and proper balance
with input heat energy. Exhaust vent to be a maximum of 4 inches (102 mm) in diameter
for gas and electric models.
6. Heating Source / Input: Axial airflow design allowing for maximum efficiency. Tumbler
basket shall be non-perforated.
7. Lint Filtration: Permanently fixed "lint filter" type allowing for easy and frequent removal of
lint. For purposes of operator safety, it is not required that the front panel be removed for
regular lint cleanout. Screen is constructed of durable nylon construction allowing
extended life.
8. Drive System: Belt drive and dual-roller system for maximum drive efficiency and long life.
9. Control and Features: Microprocessor controlled and capable of five (5) cycle selections
with the capability to programming cycles, set vend price, retrieve audit information, and
operate diagnostic tests and raid advance options. Any cycle can be modified to set cycle
time from 1-99 minutes, temperature (100-160 degrees), and cool-down time (0-59
minutes). The micro displays error modes identifying the cause of safety shutdown.
Four-digit display, along with a LED (Light Emitting Diode) for status of lights on the
keypad and status words for the control.
10. Cycle Status Display: Depicts time remaining (drying cycle, cooling cycle, end of cycle).
11. Basket Construction: Non-perforated galvanized steel with a stainless steel back plate and
molded polypropylene lifters for extended life and maximum resistance to residual laundry
chemicals.
12. Motor Configuration: Single motor design: blower/fan motor rated at no less than 1/3 HP
maximum efficiency.
B. Model: KFE as manufactured by Continental Girbau, Inc.

1. Capacity: Volume: 7.0 cu ft (1990 cu dm).
d. Door Opening: 20.5 inches (521 mm).
3. Exhaust: 4 inch (102 mm) diameter / 220 cfm (374 cu m/h) exhaust air flow.
4. Basket Motor: 1/3 HP.
5. Mechanical - Electric Heat Source:
a. Power: 240V/60Hz/Single Phase - 5350 Watts, 30A Protection.
C. Model: KFG as manufactured by Continental Girbau, Inc.

1. Capacity: Volume: 7.0 cu ft (1990 cu dm).

3. Exhaust: 4 inch (102 mm) diameter / 220 cfm (374 cu m/h) exhaust air flow.
a. Power: 120V/60Hz/Single Phase - 15A Protection.
b. Heating: 25,000 BTU/h.
c. Inlet Diameter: 3/8 inch (10 mm) NPT.
2.10 ECON-O-DRY DRYERS
A. Model: JDE - Single Load Dryer as manufactured by Continental Girbau, Inc.

e. Color: White.
3. Exhaust:
a. Diameter: 4 inches (102 mm).
b. Flow: 220 cfm (6.23 cu m/min).
a. Power: 240V/60Hz/Single Phase - 5350 Watts, 30A Protection.
B. Model: JDG - Single Load Dryer as manufactured by Continental Girbau, Inc.

e. Color: White.
3. Exhaust:
a. Voltage: 120/60/1 - 15A Protection.
b. Heating: 25,000 BTU/h.
C. Model: JSE - Econ-O-Dry Stack Double Load as manufactured by Continental Girbau, Inc.
1. Capacity: 7.0 cu ft (199 cu dm) per basket.
d. Door Opening: 24.7 inches (628 mm) per basket.
e. Color: White.
3. Exhaust:
4. Basket Motor: 1/3 HP per basket.
a. Power: 240V/60Hz/Single Phase- 5350 Watts, 30 Amp Protection per basket.
D. Model: JSG - Econ-O-Dry Stack Double Load as manufactured by Continental Girbau, Inc.
1. Capacity: 7.0 cu ft (199 cu dm) per basket.

d. Door Opening: 24.7 inches (628 mm) per basket.
e. Color: White.
3. Exhaust:
4. Basket Motor: 1/3 HP per basket.
a. Voltage: 120/60/1 - 15A Protection per basket.
b. Heating: 25,000 BTU/h per basket.
2.11 PRO-SERIES FLATWORK IRONERS (Excluding F32)
A. Pro-Series Flatwork Ironers - General Characteristics:

1. Roll Material: Constructed of polished chrome for maximum corrosion resistance and do
not require the use of wax products for proper operation.
2. Exhaust: Rear bottom mounted to keep heat and exhaust away from the operator.
3. Feed And Pressure Ribbons: One-piece construction made of polyester for maximum
longevity. Pressure ribbons shall be made of NOMEX for optimum heat resistance
longevity with covered staple seams for quality ironing and quick replacement. Pressure
ribbon contact shall be at least 250 degrees of the roll circumference to ensure optimum
linen contact and operate at a speed identical to that of the heated cylinder so as to
eliminate linen distortion and ensure iron/dry quality.
4. Safety Stop Button: Allows the operator to stop all machine function in case of an
emergency or operator error.
5. Manual Advance Option: Allows the operator to mechanically advance the roll. This helps
to prevent linen damage in the case of power loss.
6. Control: Unit is controlled through an independently mounted microprocessor control.
Control offers AutoSpeed setting capable of automatically adjusting the ironing speed to
address specific linen types and moisture retention levels. Microprocessor controlled
safety checks, temperature control, process and operating alarm function and built-in
electronic diagnostic package for quick service checks.
7. Automatic Safety Cool Down: Ironer capable of automatically monitoring the reduction of
roll temperature following shutdown of the unit. The heated cylinder, feed and pressure
ribbons will continue to operate without heat until a safe temperature is achieved so as to
reduce wear and tear and prevent scorching of the ribbons. Once safe temperature is
reached the unit will automatically shutdown with no further operator attention.
8. Lint Filter: Built-in lint filter for optimum airflow and prevention of lint exhaust to the
atmosphere, vents and work area.
9. Optional Integrated Primary Folder: Ironer allows for user selected option of an integrated
folding system that provides 4-measured primary folds with the ability to save up to
9-different linen dimension in the microprocessor. The micro and folding device also
provides an auto fold function selection to automatically measure each item and adjust the
fold length without operator input.
B. Model: F13__ as manufactured by Continental Girbau, Inc.

1. Cylinder Diameter: minimum 12.8 inches (325 mm).
2. Useable Cylinder Length: 61 inches (1550 mm).
3. Useable Cylinder Length: 76.4 inches (1940 mm).
4. Ironing Speed: 3 to 16 ft/min (1 to 5 m/min).
5. Exhaust:
a. Diameter: 4.5 inches (114 mm).
b. Flow: 347 cfm (590 cu m/h).
6. Motor: 0.67 HP.
7. Full Load: 3.5A.

8. Heater: Electric - 15.6 kW.
10. Heater: Natural Gas - 75,600 BTU/h, Supply 7(+-1) inch wc.
11. Heater: Propane Gas - 75,600 BTU/h, Supply 11(+-0.3) inch wc.
14. Evaporation Capability: 3.96 gal/hr (15 l/hr)
15. Evaporation Capability: 4.76 gal/hr (18 l/hr)
18. Power: 208-240/60/Single phase.
19. Power: 208/60/Three Phase.
C. Model: F20___ as manufactured by Continental Girbau, Inc.

1. Cylinder Diameter: Minimum 20.1 inches (510 mm).
6. Ironing Speed: 3 to 30 ft/min (1 to 9 m/min).
7. Exhaust:
b. Flow: 497 cfm (844 cu m/h).
8. Motor: 1.48 HP.
9. Full Load: 11.3A.
10. Size / Dimensions: Height: 55.9 inches (1420 mm).
11. Size / Dimensions: Depth: 45.8 inches (1164 mm).
12. Size / Dimensions: Width: 85.4 inches (2170 mm).
14. Size / Dimensions: Width: 127 inches (3225 mm).
30. Heater: Steam - 166,500 BTU/h.
a. Consumption: 146 lbs/h (66 kg/h).
b. Pressure: 116 psi (8 bar).
c. BHP Consumption: 4.97 BHP.
d. Steam Inlet: 1 inch (25.4 mm).
e. Condensate Outlet: 0.75 inches (19 mm).
f. Safety Valve Discharge Diameter: 0.5 inches (12.7 mm).

b. Pressure: 116 psi (8 bar).
c. BHP Consumption: 8.3 BHP.
d. Steam Inlet: 1 inch (25.4 mm).
e. Condensate Outlet: 0.75 inches (19mm).
f. Safety Valve Discharge Diameter: 0.5 inches (12.7 mm).
2.12 PRO-SERIES FN32 HEATED CHEST FLATWORK IRONERS
A. Pro-Series Heated Chest Flatwork Ironers - General Characteristics:

1. Bed Material/ Roll Diameter: Mirror polished finish to.8 micron for maximum corrosion
resistance and optimal ironing performance. Minimum of 31.5 inch (800 mm) roll diameter
with complete cylinder perforation for maximum suction.
2. Exhaust: Shaft mounted fan to keep heat and exhaust away from the operator.
3. Control: Unit mounted microprocessor control. Control offers manual speed control and
AutoSpeed setting capable of automatically adjusting the ironing speed to address specific
linen types and moisture retention levels. Microprocessor also offers pressure adjustment,
roll reverse, safety checks, actual and programmed temperature control, process and
operating Alarm function and built-in electronic diagnostic package for quick service
checks.
4. Discharge Options: Allows for user determined discharge options to a raised platform table
or to interface with adjustable height of with ancillary folding, cross-folding and stacking
devices.
5. Automatic Safety Shut-Down: Capability of automatically lifting the pressure roll from the
heated bed following shutdown of the unit. Cylinder pad and feed ribbons are removed
from direct contact with any heat energy input until the unit is engaged for production,
ensuring maximum longevity.
6. Canopy and Bed: Full view canopy allowing for inspection on heat isolation and noise
reduction. Ironing bed allows for at least 180 degrees of contact and is fully insulated to
optimize efficiency.
7. Drive System: Speed controlled by a variable speed inverter drive system for optimum roll
speed control and operate by specific meter (metric) or foot English Standard) per minute
increments with real-speed check and varied roll speed programmability.
8. Safety: Safety stop button allows the operator to stop all machine function in case of an
emergency or operator error. All pressure components must certified following ASME code
and not allow start-up until hand guard check has been performed.
B. Model: 1 Roll - FN32___ as manufactured by Continental Girbau, Inc.

5. Ironing Speed: 13 to 82 ft/min (4 to 25 m/min)
6. Exhaust:
b. Flow: 636 cfm (1080 cu m/h).
7. Cylinder Motor: 14.75 HP.
8. Extraction Motor: 1.47 HP.
9. Ventilation Motor: 0.24 HP.
10. Compressed Air Flow (min/max): 19/25 gal/min (71/95 l/hr).
11. Compressed Air Diameter: 0.5 inches (12.7 mm).
12. Size / Dimensions: Height: 65 inches (1650 mm).
13. Size / Dimensions: Depth: 99.6 inches (2530 mm).

17. Full Load 208-240/Three Phase: 44.3A.
18. Full Load 440-480/Three Phase: 23A.
19. Full Load 208-240/Three Phase: 62A.
20. Full Load 440-480/Three Phase: 32.3A.
b. Pressure (min/max): 116/174 psi (8/12 bar).
24. Steam Inlet Diameter: 1.5 inches (38.1 mm).
25. Condensate Outlet Diameter: 1.5 inches (38.1 mm).
26. Thermal Fluid Flow: 137 gal/min (520 l/min).
29. Thermal Fluid Pressure: 58 psi (4 bar).
30. Thermal Fluid Inlet Diameter: 3 inches (76.2 mm).
31. Thermal Fluid Outlet Diameter: 3 inches (76.2 mm).
32. Heater: Gas - 580,064 BTU/h
33. Gas Consumption: 635.3 cfh (18 cu.m/h).
34. Gas Pressure (min/max): 40.9/200.7 inch.w.c. (102/500 mbar).
35. Gas Connection: 3/4 inches (19 mm).
2.13 X-SERIES FLATWORK IRONERS
A. Model: X13061 Express Heated-Roll Flatwork Ironer as manufactured by Continental Girbau,

Inc.
2. Usable Cylinder Width: 60.6 inches (1540 mm).
3. Evaporation Capability: 3.96 gal/hr (15 l/h).
4. Ironing Speed: 3-36 ft/min (1-11 m/min).
5. Heating: Electric.
6. Heating: Natural gas.
7. Heating: Propane.
8. Full Load, Gas 208-240/60/1: 6 Amps.
9. Full Load, Electric 208/60/3: 39 Amps.
B. Model: X13084 Express Heated-Roll Flatwork Ironer as manufactured by Continental Girbau,

Inc.
8. Full Load, Gas 208-240/60/1: 4.7 Amps.
C. Model: X20075 Express Heated-Roll Flatwork Ironer as manufactured by Continental Girbau,

Inc.
3. Evaporation Capability: 7.93 gal/hr (30 l/h) gas/electric, 11.1 gal/h (42 l/h) steam.

8. Full Load, Gas/Steam 208-240/60/1: 6.1 Amps.
D. Model: X20100 Express Heated-Roll Flatwork Ironer as manufactured by Continental Girbau,

Inc.
3. Evaporation Capability: 10.57 gal/hr (40 l/h) gas/electric, 14.79 gal/h (56 l/h) steam.
E. Model: X20125 Express Heated-Roll Flatwork Ironer as manufactured by Continental Girbau,

Inc.
3. Evaporation Capability: 15.85 gal/hr (60 l/h) gas, 13.21 gal/hr (50 l/h) electric, 18.49 gal/h
(70 l/h) steam.
2.14 FLATWORK FOLDERS
A. Model: FL-Lite Flatwork Folder as manufactured by Continental Girbau, Inc.

1. Usable Feed Width: 118 inches (3000 mm), 130 inches (3300 mm), 138 inches (3500
mm).
2. Feed Height: 31.5-47.2 Inches (800-1200 mm).
3. Conveyor Speed: Up to 165 ft/min 50 m/min).
4. Electric Power: 2.8 -3.2 kVA.
5. Compressed Air Connection: 1/2 inch (15 mm).
6. Operating Pressure: 6-10 bar.
7. Voltage: 208-240/69/3.
8. Voltage: 440-480/60/3.
B. Model: FT-Lite Folder and Stacker as manufactured by Continental Girbau, Inc.

1. Usable Feed Width: 48 inches (1219 mm).
2. Feed Height: 27.6-35.4 inches (700-900 mm).
3. Electric Power: 2 kVA.
4. Compressed Air Connection: 1/2 inch (15 mm).
5. Operating Pressure: 6-10 bar.
6. Voltage: 208-240/69/3.
7. Voltage: 440-480/60/3.
2.15 IRONING SYSTEMS
A. Model: XC24102 Compact 5-in-One Ironing System as manufactured by Continental Girbau,
Inc.
1. Cylinder Diameter: 24 inches (600 mm).
7. Full Load, 400/240V: 8.8/15 Amps.
B. Model: XC24130 Compact 5-in-One Ironing System as manufactured by Continental Girbau,

Inc.
2. Usable Cylinder Width: 130 inches (3300 mm).
7. Full Load, 400/240V: 8.8/15 Amps.
C. Model: XC32102 Compact 5-in-One Ironing System as manufactured by Continental Girbau,

Inc.
7. Full Load, 400/240V: 9.8/16.7 Amps.
D. Model: XC32130 Compact 5-in-One Ironing System as manufactured by Continental Girbau,

Inc.
2. Usable Cylinder Width: 130 inches (3300 mm).
7. Full Load, 400/240V: 9.8/16.7 Amps.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION

3.2 PREPARATION
B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best
result for the substrate under the project conditions.
C. Check surfaces for level prior to installing equipment. If surfaces are not in an acceptable
condition, notify the Architect immediately of the condition.
3.3 INSTALLATION
B. Install all hookups in accordance with UPC and NEC requirements.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products until completion of project.
B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
SUBJECT: SECTION 11150 – PARKING CONTROL EQUIPMENT
SECTION 11150
PARKING CONTROL EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Automatic barrier gates.

2. Vehicle detectors.
3. Traffic controllers.
4. Exit terminals.
5. Fee computers.
6. Parking facility management software.
7. Access control units.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 2 Section "Asphalt Paving" for asphalt driveway and approach paving.
2. Division 2 Section "Cement Concrete Pavement" for concrete driveway and approach paving.
3. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for pipe bollards to protect parking control equipment.
4. Division 8 Sections for parking garage entrance doors and grilles interlocked to parking
control equipment.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for parking control equipment.
Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished
specialties and accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: For parking control equipment. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and
attachments to other work.
1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances,
method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.
2. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.
D. Field quality-control reports.
E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For parking control equipment to include in emergency, operation,
and maintenance manuals.
MHA – TECH. SPECIFICATION – 1706 – 04/02/2015 SECTION 11150 – PARKING CONTROL EQUIPMENT 1/7
F. Software and Firmware Operational Documentation:
1. Software operating and upgrade manuals.

2. Program Software Backup: On magnetic media or compact disk, complete with data files.
3. Device address list.
4. Printout of software application and graphic screens.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain parking control equipment from European manufacturer to the approval of
A/E.
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a
qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
D. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site
E. Retain subparagraphs below if additional requirements are necessary; include information about
conference.
1. Inspect and discuss electrical roughing-in, equipment bases, and other preparatory work
specified elsewhere.
2. Verify that equipment operation is consistent with system description.
3. Review sequence of operation for each type of parking control equipment.
4. Review coordination of interlocked equipment specified in this Section and elsewhere.
5. Review required testing, inspecting, and certifying procedures.
1.5 SOFTWARE SERVICE AGREEMENT
A. Technical Support: Beginning with Substantial Completion, provide software support for two years.
B. Upgrade Service: Update software to latest version at Project completion. Install and program
software upgrades that become available within two years from date of Substantial Completion.
Upgrading software shall include operating system. Upgrade shall include new or revised licenses
for use of software.
1. Provide 30 days' notice to Owner to allow scheduling and access to system and to allow
Owner to upgrade computer equipment if necessary.
1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for
storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Gate Arms: one breakaway gate arms for each gate installed complete with accessory
components.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and manufacturer for type of use
and finish indicated, and as follows:
1. Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M).

2. Extruded Shapes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M).
B. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.
C. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, commercial quality, with G60 (Z180)
coating designation; mill phosphatized.
D. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304.
E. Anchorages: Anchor bolts, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M and ASTM F 2329.
2.2 AUTOMATIC BARRIER GATES
A. General:
Provide UL-approved parking control device consisting of operator and controller housed in a
weathertight, tamper-resistant cabinet enclosure with gate arm. Device shall be activated by a signal
from access or revenue control device. Fabricate unit with gate-arm height in down position of not
more than 35 inches (889 mm) above pavement to prevent even small vehicles from passing under
gate arm.
Technical Specifications:
Power supply: 230v~+ 6%/-10% 50-60 Hz

Electric Motor: Single phase, bi-directional
Absorbed power: 220W
Current drawn: 1A
Motor winding thermal cutout: 1200C
Anti Crush System: Hydraulic valves (by-pass)
Duty Cycle: 100%
Mechanical Deceleration: Adjustable
Operating Temperature Range: -200C + 700C
Weight: 84Kg
Oil type: HP Oil
Barrier Opening Times: 4 - 8 secs
Beam Length: 4 - 7m
Casing anti corrosion treatment: Cataphoresis
Finish: polyester paint, RAL 2004
Housing protection: IP55
Cooling: forced ventilation with fan
Optional accessories: Skirt kit,
Fork support
Automatic release solenoid valve
anti vandal valve
Top and bottom skirt up to 5m
B. Standard: Provide barrier gates and gate operators that are listed and labeled according to UL 325 by
a qualified testing agency
C. Controller: Factory-sealed, solid-state, plug-in type, with galvanized-steel box for wiring connections.
1. Type: Communicating.
a. Real-time communication of lane counts, status messages, and execute commands.

b. Monitor illegal entries and exits, tailgates, tickets, monthlies, and backouts.
c. Status messages for gate up too long, backouts, ticket in chute, and gate-arm rebound.
d. Communication commands for resetting loops, turning "Full" signs on/off, raising and
lowering gate arm, and disabling card readers
2. Features: Equip unit with the following:
a. Able to store successive inputs and sequentially processing each one.

b. Automatic instant-reversing obstacle detector mechanism that stops downward motion
of gate arm if arm contacts or nears an object and that immediately returns arm to
upward position. Include a 0- to 60-second, variable-time reset device.
c. On-off power supply switch.
d. Automatic-manual switch.
e. Differential counter.
f. Directional arming logic.
g. RS-422 communication port.
h. Broken gate-arm monitoring.
i. Programmable automatic timer.
j. Internal resettable counters.
k. Thermal-overload protection with manual reset.
l. Plug-in connectors for three vehicle loop detectors.
m. Thermostatically controlled heater with on/off/auto switch.
n. Diagnostic mode for on-site testing, with LEDs for inputs and outputs.
o. Automatic and continuous testing of inputs and outputs.
p. Switch to test motor and limit switches.
q. Emergency manual disconnect.
r. Battery backup.
s. Single, 115-V ac grounded power receptacle.
t. Reversible arm capability for right- or left-handed operation.
u. Full connection and control from building management system
D. Cabinets: Fabricated from metal sheet with seams welded and ground smooth; approximately 15
inches square by 40 inches tall (381 mm square by 1016 mm tall). Provide single, gasketed access
door for each cabinet with flush-mounted locks. Furnish two keys for each lock. Fabricate cabinet
with internal reinforcing and four mounting holes accessible only from inside cabinet.
1. Material: Not less than 0.097-inch- (2.5-mm-) thick[, galvanized-] steel sheet or 0.125-inch-
(3.2-mm-) thick aluminum sheet.
a. Finish cabinet, interior and exterior, with manufacturer's standard Red color baked-
enamel finish over primer.
E. Straight Gate Arm: 50mm x 100mm Aluminum, with painted finish and black diagonal stripes on traffic-
side face. Provide mounting flange with breakaway feature to ensure clean break if arm is struck by
vehicle.
1. Length: 7 meters
2. Opening Time: 4 – 8 seconds.
3. Inherently adjustable torque limiting clutch for safety.
F. Accessories:
1. Audible alarm that activates as part of a safety device system.

2. Additional obstruction detector; noncontact infrared
3. Barrier-arm warning safety signs on both sides of unit limiting traffic to vehicular traffic.
4. Low-voltage red warning lights that illuminate when gate is in down position.
5. Low-voltage light on cabinet top that flashes or changes from red to green when barrier gate
is operating.
6. Manually operated crank for emergency operation.
7. Gate-arm tip support with electromagnetic lock
2.3 VEHICLE DETECTORS
A. Vehicle Loop Detector System: Provide self-tuning electronic presence detector with adjustable
detection patterns, adjustable sensitivity and frequency settings, and panel indicator light designed
to detect presence or transit of a vehicle over an embedded loop of wire and to emit signal activating
gate-arm operator. Include automatic closing timer with adjustable time delay before closing, timer
cut-off switch, and vehicle loop detector designed to open and close gate arm and hold gate arm
open until traffic clears. Provide number of loops consisting of multiple strands of wire, number of
turns, loop size, and method of placement at location shown on Drawings, as recommended in
writing by detection system manufacturer for function indicated.
1. Factory-Formed Loop: Wire, preformed in size indicated; style for pave-over installation.
2. System Performance: Capable of the following:
a. Recognize two vehicles within (152 mm) of each other on standard-sized loop.
b. Recognize vehicle direction by detecting vehicle moving from one loop to another.
c. Generate reverse count if vehicle backs up after generating directional count in forward
direction.
d. Continuous diagnostic monitoring for intermittently operating and failed loops.
e. Crosstalk test between adjacent loops.
B. Active Infrared Vehicle Detector: Provide retro reflective type presence detector with adjustable
detection zone pattern and sensitivity, designed to detect the presence or transit of vehicle in gate-
arm pathway by interrupting infrared beam in zone pattern and to emit signal activating gate-arm
operator. Include automatic closing timer with adjustable time delay before closing, timer cut-off
switch, and vehicle presence detector designed to open and close gate arm and to hold gate arm
open until traffic clears.
2.4 PARKING FACILITY MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE
A. General: Manufacturer's standard software that is compatible with security access control system and
that provides automatic facility monitoring, supervision, and remote control of parking control
equipment from one or more locations.
1. System Performance: Capable of the following:
a. Collect data for activity reporting.

b. Collect data for access and space control.
c. Full tracking of track entries and exits
d. Program parking control equipment.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances, including equipment bases; accurate placement, pattern, and orientation of
anchor bolts; critical dimensions; and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Examine roughing-in for electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before parking
control equipment installation.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install parking control equipment as required for a complete and integrated installation.
1. Rough-in electrical connections according to requirements specified in Division 16 Sections.
B. Automatic Barrier Gates: Anchor cabinets to concrete bases with anchor bolts or expansion anchors
and mount barrier gate arms.
1. Install barrier gates according to UL 325.
C. Vehicle Loop Detectors: Pave-over and seal wire loop at locations indicated on Drawings according to
manufacturer's written instructions. Connect to parking control equipment operated by detector.
D. Traffic Controllers: Anchor controllers to driveway surfaces with anchor bolts or expansion anchors.
E. Entry Terminal and Exit Terminals: Attach cabinets to concrete bases with anchor bolts or expansion
anchors.
1. Connect equipment to remote computer.
F. Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables."
G. Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding."
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and
adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.
B. Perform tests and inspections.
1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect

components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in
testing.
C. Tests and Inspections:
1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance
Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.
2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper
motor rotation and unit operation.
3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
D. Parking control equipment will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
E. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust parking control equipment to function smoothly and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.
B. Confirm that locks engage accurately and securely without forcing or binding.
C. After completing installation of exposed, factory-finished parking control equipment, inspect exposed
finishes and repair damaged finishes.
SUBJECT: SECTION 11172- WASTE COMPACTORS
SECTION 11172
WASTE COMPACTORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes waste compactors.
1. Division 11 Section "Foodservice Equipment" for waste compactors in foodservice facilities.

2. Division 11 Section "Residential Appliances" for residential waste compactors.
3. Division 16 Sections for electrical service connections.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. WASTEC Rating: The volume of waste material in the charging chamber moved by the ram within
the compactor in a single stroke.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and
accessories.
B. Coordination Drawings: Drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated
with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved:
1. Roughing-in dimensions, service connection details, and locations of field connections.

2. Required clearances for equipment service and operation.
3. Setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchor bolts and other anchorages.
C. Qualification Data: For Installer.
D. Maintenance Data: For waste compactors to include in maintenance manuals. In addition to items
specified in Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:
1. Operating and maintenance instructions.

2. Parts inventory list.
3. Purchase source for operating and maintenance materials.
4. Emergency information.
5. Name, address, and telephone number of manufacturer's service representative whose
location is nearest to Project site.
MHA – TECH. SPECIFICATION – 1706 – 04/02/2015 SECTION 11172 – WASTE COMPACTORS 1/4
1. Maintenance Proximity: Not more than [one hour's] [two hours'] [three hours'] normal
travel time from Installer's place of business to Project site.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Waste Compactor Standards: Comply with ANSI Z245.2 and with NFPA 82.
D. Waste Bin and Hopper Standard: Comply with ANSI Z245.30.
1.6 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide [12] <Insert number>
months' full maintenance by skilled employees of waste compactor Installer.
1. Schedule regular surveillance and preventive maintenance visits at [seven] <Insert

number>-day intervals for three months and at one-month intervals for nine months.
2. Repair or replace worn or defective components; and lubricate, clean, and adjust equipment
as required for proper equipment operation. Use replacement parts and maintenance
supplies that were used in the manufacture and installation of the original equipment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 WASTE COMPACTORS
A. Waste Compactors: Manufacturer's standard [vertical] [stationary horizontal] [self-contained

horizontal] [pivoting-ram] packaged units with components, options, and accessories needed to
comply with requirements and provide complete functional systems.

2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Bes-Pac; <Insert product name or designation>.

b. Chicago Trashpacker Company, LLC; <Insert product name or designation>.
c. Galbreath, Inc.; <Insert product name or designation>.
d. GPI Division, Harmony Enterprises, Inc.; <Insert product name or designation>.
e. Holt Specialty Equipment, Inc.; <Insert product name or designation>.
f. J. V. Manufacturing, Inc.; <Insert product name or designation>.
g. K-PAC Equipment, Division of Krause Corporation; <Insert product name or
designation>.
h. Marathon Equipment Company; <Insert product name or designation>.
i. McClain Industries, Inc./E-Z Pack; <Insert product name or designation>.
j. Philadelphia Tramrail Company; <Insert product name or designation>.
k. Precision Machinery Systems, Inc.; <Insert product name or designation>.
l. Rudco Products, Inc.; <Insert product name or designation>.
m. Sebright Products Inc.; <Insert product name or designation>.
n. SP Industries, Inc.; <Insert product name or designation>.
o. Wastequip-Accurate Industries; <Insert product name or designation>.
p. Wilkinson Hi-Rise, LLC; <Insert product name or designation>.
q. <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation.>
3. Basis-of-Design Product: <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation> or

a comparable product by one of the following:
a. <Insert, in separate subparagraphs, manufacturer's name.>
4. Minimum WASTEC Rating Base Size: [0.14 cu. yd. (0.11 cu. m)] [1.00 cu. yd. (0.77 cu. m)]
[1.50 cu. yd. (1.15 cu. m)] [2.00 cu. yd. (1.53 cu. m)] [3.50 cu. yd. (2.68 cu. m)] [5.00 cu.
yd. (3.82 cu. m)] [7.50 cu. yd. (5.73 cu. m)] [10.00 cu. yd. (7.65 cu. m)] <Insert volume>.
5. Minimum Infeed Opening: [19 by 22 inches (483 by 559 mm)] [24 by 36 inches (610 by
914 mm)] [30 by 48 inches (762 by 1219 mm)] [48 by 60 inches (1219 by 1524 mm)] [72
by 108 inches (1829 by 2743 mm)] <Insert dimensions>.
6. Minimum Discharge Opening: <Insert dimensions.>
7. Normal/Maximum System Pressures: [1600/1800 psi (11.0/12.4 MPa)] [2000/2400 psi
(13.8/16.5 MPa)] [2500/2800 psi (17.2/19.3 MPa)] <Insert value>.
8. Ram Face: <Insert dimensions.>
9. Ram Penetration: [6 inches (152 mm)] [14 inches (355 mm)] [30 inches (762 mm)] <Insert
depth>.
10. Normal/Maximum Packing Forces: [20,000/22,000 lbf (89/98 kN)] [36,000/40,000 lbf
(160/178 kN)] [70,000/80,000 lbf (311/356 kN)] [125,000/150,000 lbf (556/667 kN)] <Insert
value>.
11. Normal/Maximum Force Ratings: [20.0/24.0 psi (1.4/1.7 MPa)] [28.0/32.0 psi (1.9/2.2 MPa)]
[34.0/40.0 psi (2.3/2.8 MPa)] [39.0/45.0 psi (2.7/3.1 MPa)] <Insert value>.
12. Normal Cycle Time: [30] [40] [50] [60] <Insert number> seconds.
13. Unit Weight: [2500 lb (1134 kg)] [6000 lb (2722 kg)] [12,000 lb (5443 kg)] [20,000 lb (9072
kg)] <Insert weight>.
14. Motor Size: [3 hp] [10 hp] [15 hp] [20 hp] [30 hp] [50 hp] <Insert size>.
15. Controls: <Insert special control features; e.g., monitors, photo-eye startup, etc.>
2.2 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate waste compactors with smooth, eased exposed edges.
B. Fabricate bins, hoppers, chutes, compaction chambers, unit bodies, and similar components of steel
plate with welded joints. Reinforce with structural-steel members sized and spaced to withstand
impacts and pressures of normal operations and to prevent excessive long-term development of
waves and valleys.
C. Fabricate equipment with replaceable parts at points of normal wear.
D. Provide electrical devices, controls, and materials of type and quality recommended by NEMA for
applications indicated. See Division 16 Sections for power characteristics and service to equipment,
including disconnect switches.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances, clearance requirements, service rough-ins, and other conditions affecting
performance of work.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Set waste compactors level, plumb, properly aligned, and securely in place. Anchor as required for
secure operation.
B. Complete field assembly with joining methods recommended in writing by manufacturer.
3.3 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to

adjust, operate, and maintain waste compactors. Refer to Division 1 Section "Demonstration and
Training."
SUBJECT: SECTION 11460- UNIT KITCHENS
SECTION 11460
UNIT KITCHENS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes factory-fabricated and -assembled unit kitchens with [metal] [laminate-clad]
[wood] cabinets, countertops, fixtures, appliances, and accessories.
1. Division 1 Section "LEED Requirements" for additional LEED requirements.

2. Division 11 Section "Residential Appliances" for standard manufactured residential kitchen
appliances.
3. Division 12 Section "Kitchen Casework" for stock manufactured kitchen casework and
countertops.
4. Division 15 Section "Fuel Gas Piping" for gas connections to unit kitchen appliances.
5. Division 15 Section "Plumbing Fixtures" for kitchen sinks [waste disposers] [and] [instant-
hot-water dispensers] furnished as plumbing fixtures.
6. Division 15 Section "Metal Ducts" for ducted extensions and fans for [exhaust hoods] [and]
[range hoods] of unit kitchens.
7. Division 15 plumbing Sections for plumbing services and connections to unit kitchen
appliances and fixtures.
8. Division 16 electrical Sections for wiring and other electrical work associated with connecting
unit kitchens and appliances.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual

components and profiles, finishes, furnished specialties, and accessories.
1. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and utility requirements of appliances.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.
D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size
indicated below.
1. Metal finish for cabinets [and countertops], 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm).
2. Wood finish for cabinets, 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm).
3. Plastic laminate for [cabinets] [countertops] [cabinets and countertops], 8 by 10 inches
(200 by 250 mm).
MHA – TECH. SPECIFICATION – 1706 – 04/02/2015 SECTION 11460 – UNIT KITCHENS 1 / 14

4. Solid surfacing for countertops, 6 inches (150 mm) square.

5. One full-size unit of each type of exposed hardware.
E. LEED Submittals:
1. Credit EQ 4.4: Composite wood manufacturer's product data for each composite wood
product used indicating that the bonding agent used contains no urea formaldehyde.
2. Credit MR 7: Certificates of chain-of-custody signed by manufacturers certifying that
cabinets[ and countertops] are made from wood obtained from forests certified by an FSC-
accredited certification body to comply with FSC 1.2, "Principles and Criteria." Include
evidence that manufacturer is certified for chain-of-custody by an FSC-accredited certification
body.
F. Product Certificates: For each type of unit kitchen, signed by product manufacturer.
G. Manufacturer Certificate: Signed by manufacturer certifying that it complies with requirements.
H. Maintenance Data: For unit kitchen appliances to include in maintenance manuals.
I. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that fabricates unit kitchens and their
components. Manufacturers that only assemble components obtained from other sources are not
acceptable.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain unit kitchens through one source from a single manufacturer.
C. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of unit kitchens
and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product
Requirements."
1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's
approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect
for review.
D. Regulatory Requirements: Where unit kitchens are indicated to comply with accessibility
requirements, comply with [the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance
Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and
Facilities (ADAAG)."] [ICC A117.1.] [FED-STD-795, "Uniform Federal Accessibility
Standards."] <Insert local regulation.>
1. Provide operating controls for appliances that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or
twisting of the wrist, and that operate with a force of not more than 5 lbf (22.2 N).
E. Forest Certification: Provide cabinets[ and countertops] made from wood obtained from forests
certified by an FSC-accredited certification body to comply with FSC 1.2, "Principles and Criteria."
F. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
1. Built-in Refrigerators: Listed and labeled for recessed installation. Mount label to be visible
after installation of unit; include electrical rating, type of refrigerant, and minimum installation
clearances.

2. Refrigerated Unit Kitchens[ and Wet Bars]: Listed and labeled for entire unit as a single
integrated system. Mount label to be visible after installation of unit; include electrical rating,
type of refrigerant, and minimum installation clearances.
G. [Wood] [Laminate-Clad] Cabinet Fabrication Standard:
1. AWI 400B, Custom grade.

2. KCMA A161.1. Provide cabinets with KCMA's "Certified Cabinet" seal affixed to a
semiexposed location of each unit and showing compliance with standard.
3. Either fabrication standard above.
H. Appliance Standards:
1. Refrigerators and Freezers: UL 250.

2. Electric Ranges: UL 858.
3. Microwave Ovens: UL 923.
4. Gas-Burning Appliances: ANSI Z21 Series, and carry the design certification seal of AGA.
A. Deliver factory-assembled units, individually factory packaged and protected. Label with
manufacturer's name, product name, and model number.
B. Do not deliver unit kitchens until spaces to receive them are clean, dry, and ready for their
installation.
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install unit kitchens until spaces are enclosed and weatherproof,
wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature
and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its
intended use.
B. Field Measurements: Verify the following by field measurements and indicate measurements on
Shop Drawings:
1. Concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support unit kitchens before they are
enclosed.
2. Actual locations of walls, columns, and other construction contiguous with unit kitchens.
3. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the
Work, establish dimensions of contiguous walls, columns, and other construction; also of
concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements and proceed with fabricating unit kitchens
without field measurements. Coordinate wall and other contiguous construction to ensure
that actual recessed opening dimensions correspond to established dimensions.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units
of work specified in other Sections to ensure that unit kitchens can be supported and installed as
indicated.
B. Coordinate wiring requirements and current characteristics of unit kitchens with building electrical
system. See Division 16 Sections.
C. Coordinate layout and installation of plumbing, mechanical, and electrical services for unit kitchens.

1.8 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace
components of unit kitchens[ or appliances] that fail in materials or workmanship within specified
warranty period.
1. Warranty Period for Refrigerators: [Five] <Insert number> years from date of Substantial
Completion for sealed refrigeration system that includes compressor, condenser, evaporator,
and connecting tubing.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

1. Acme Kitchenettes Corp.

2. Cervitor Kitchens, Inc.
3. Dwyer Products Corp.
4. <Insert manufacturer's name.>
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008, Commercial Steel (CS) Type B, suitable for exposed
applications.
B. Porcelain-Enamel-Finished Steel Sheet: ASTM A 424, enameling-grade steel, uncoated thickness

indicated; with exposed face and edges coated with primer, ground coat, and color cover coat; and
concealed face coated with primer and ground coat; acid resistant.
C. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304.
D. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD[, made with binder containing no urea
formaldehyde].
E. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2, minimum 45-lb/cu. ft. (720-kg/cu. m) density [, made with
binder containing no urea formaldehyde].
F. Softwood Plywood: Exterior, DOC PS 1.
G. Hardwood Plywood: HPVA HP-1, Type I[, made with adhesive containing no urea
formaldehyde].
H. Solid Wood: Clear hardwood lumber of species indicated, free of defects, selected for compatible
grain and color, and kiln dried to 7 percent moisture content.
I. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3.
J. Thermoset Decorative Overlay: Thermally fused, melamine-impregnated decorative paper

complying with LMA SAT-1.

K. Solid-Surfacing Material: Homogenous solid sheets fabricated from reacted monomers and resins,
mineral fillers, and pigments; in thickness indicated; complying with ISSFA-2.
2.3 METAL CABINETS
A. Steel Base Cabinets: Fabricate frames and sides from 0.0269-inch- (0.7-mm-) thick cold-rolled steel
sheet; welded and reinforced with internal gussets and bracing; with baked-enamel finish.
1. Door and Drawer Fronts: 0.0269-inch- (0.7-mm-) thick cold-rolled steel sheet, textured or
smooth; welded, reinforced, and sound-deadened; with baked-enamel finish.
2. Door and Drawer Fronts: High-pressure decorative laminate, Grade VGS, bonded to exterior
and interior faces of 5/8-inch- (16-mm-) thick particleboard; with PVC edging or matching
laminate.
B. Stainless-Steel Base Cabinets: Fabricate frames and sides from 0.0375-inch- (0.95-mm-) thick
stainless-steel sheet; welded and reinforced with internal gussets and bracing.
1. Door and Drawer Fronts: 0.0375-inch- (0.95-mm-) thick stainless-steel sheet; welded,
reinforced, and sound-deadened.
C. Undercounter Storage Cabinet: Same material and finish as base cabinets, with adjustable shelf
and drawer or with two drawers.
D. Wall Cabinets: Same material and finish as base cabinets, with flush double bottoms and adjustable
shelves.
1. Wall Shields: Fabricated from [textured, cold-rolled steel sheet with baked-enamel finish,
color to match cabinets] [textured, cold-rolled steel sheet with baked-enamel finish,
color to match countertop] [stainless-steel sheet]. Provide wall shields for back wall[ and
side walls] between countertop splash and wall cabinets.
E. Shelves: Manufacturer's standard rolled-front shelves, [fixed,] [adjustable,] of same material and
finish as cabinets.
F. Wire Pulls: [Brushed-chrome] [Polished-chrome] [Brushed-brass] [Polished-brass] <Insert

metal and type of finish> finish.
2.4 LAMINATE-CLAD CABINETS
A. Framed-Style Base Cabinets:
1. Face Frames: 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) thick plywood or solid wood.

2. Back Panels: 3/8-inch- (10-mm-) thick particleboard with thermoset decorative laminate
bonded to inside surface.
3. Top, Bottom, and End Panels: 3/8-inch- (10-mm-) thick particleboard with thermoset
decorative laminate bonded to both sides.
4. Door and Drawer Fronts: 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) thick medium-density fiberboard with 16-mil-
(0.4-mm-) thick vinyl film bonded to exposed surfaces and thermoset decorative overlay
bonded to inside surfaces.
a. Wire Pulls: [Brushed-chrome] [Polished-chrome] [Brushed-brass] [Polished-

brass] <Insert metal and type of finish> finish.
5. Door and Drawer Fronts: 5/8-inch- (16-mm-) thick particleboard with thermoset decorative
laminate bonded to both sides.


6. Drawers: Four sided, with 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) thick particleboard fronts, backs, and sides,
and 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) thick particleboard bottom.
7. Shelves: 5/8-inch- (16-mm-) thick particleboard with thermoset decorative laminate bonded to
both sides and PVC edges.
B. Frameless-Style Base Cabinets:
1. Back Panels: 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) thick plywood or particleboard with thermoset decorative
laminate bonded to inside surface.
2. Top and Bottom Panels: 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) thick particleboard with thermoset decorative
3. End Panels: 5/8-inch- (16-mm-) thick particleboard with thermoset decorative laminate
bonded to both sides.
4. Door and Drawer Fronts: 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) thick plywood with Grade HGS high-pressure
decorative laminate bonded to front and edges, and Grade CLS high-pressure decorative
laminate to inside surface.


laminate bonded to both sides. Provide continuous bevel edge at tops and bottoms of doors
and bottom of drawer fronts in [wood-grain laminate] [solid wood].
7. Drawers: Four sided, with 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) thick particleboard fronts, backs, and sides,
and 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) thick particleboard bottom.
C. Wall Cabinets: Same material and finish as base cabinets, with adjustable shelves.
1. Wall Shields: Fabricated from [high-pressure decorative laminate of grade and color to
match cabinets] [high-pressure decorative laminate of grade and color to match
countertop] [stainless-steel sheet]. Provide wall shields for back wall[ and side walls]
between countertop splash and wall cabinets.
D. Scribe Strips for Recessed Cabinets: Same material, finish, and color as cabinet.
2.5 WOOD CABINETS
A. Base Cabinets: [Birch] [Maple] [Oak] [Cherry] [Ash].
1. Face Frames: 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) thick hardwood-veneer plywood or solid wood.

2. Back Panels: 3/8-inch- (10-mm-) thick particleboard with thermoset decorative laminate
bonded to inside surface.
3. Top, Bottom, and End Panels: 3/8-inch- (10-mm-) thick particleboard with thermoset
decorative laminate bonded to both sides.

5. Door and Drawer Fronts: 5/8-inch- (16-mm-) thick hardwood-veneer plywood with matching
hardwood edges.
6. Door and Drawer Fronts: 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) thick solid wood stiles and rails, with solid wood
center panels.
B. Wall Cabinets: Same material and finish as base cabinets, with adjustable shelves.
1. Wall Shields: Fabricated from [high-pressure decorative laminate of grade and color to
match countertop] [stainless-steel sheet]. Provide wall shields for back wall[ and side
walls] between countertop splash and wall cabinets.
C. Scribe Strips for Recessed Cabinets: Same material, finish, and color as cabinet.
D. Wire Pulls: [Brushed-chrome] [Polished-chrome] [Brushed-brass] [Polished-brass] <Insert

metal and type of finish> finish.
2.6 COUNTERTOPS
A. Countertop and Integral Sink: Seamless, one-piece countertop and sink with integral embossed
drainboard and backsplash[ and side splashes].
1. Stainless Steel: 0.0375-inch- (0.95-mm-) thick sheet bonded to 3/4-inch (19-mm) plywood.
2. Porcelain-Enamel-Finished Steel: 0.0677 inch (1.7 mm) thick.
3. Solid-Surfacing Material: Minimum 1/2 inch (13 mm) thick.
B. Countertop[ for Drop-in Sink]: Seamless, one-piece countertop with integral backsplash[ and side
splashes].
1. Stainless Steel: 0.0375-inch- (0.95-mm-) thick sheet bonded to 3/4-inch (19-mm) plywood.
2. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: Grade HGS, bonded to 3/4-inch (19-mm) plywood.
3. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: Grade HGP, post-formed, bonded to 3/4-inch (19-mm)
particleboard with Grade BKL unfinished backing sheet bonded to reverse side.
C. Countertop[ for Undercounter-Mounted Sink]: Seamless, 1-piece countertop with integral

backsplash[ and side splashes]; fabricated from 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) thick solid-surfacing material.
2.7 FIXTURES
A. Stainless-Steel Drop-in Sinks: [0.0500 inch (1.3 mm)] [0.0375 inch (0.95 mm)] thick; seamless;
single compartment.
B. Porcelain-Enamel-Finished Steel Drop-in Sinks: 0.0428 inch (1.1 mm) thick; seamless; single
compartment.
C. Undercounter-Mounted Sinks: Solid-surfacing material; seamless; single compartment.
D. Supplies: [NPS 3/8 (DN 12)] [NPS 1/2 (DN 15)] chrome-plated copper with stops.
E. Sink Faucet: Single-lever control; [polished chrome-plated mixing] [European-style, pull-out

spray] faucet with limited-swing spout and aerator.
F. Sink Faucet: Separate hot and cold controls[ with wrist-blade handles]; polished chrome-plated
mixing faucet with limited-swing [spout] [gooseneck spout] and aerator.
G. Sink Outlet with Disposer: 3-1/2-inch- (89-mm-) diameter outlet.

H. Sink Outlet without Disposer: 3-1/2-inch- (89-mm-) diameter outlet with stainless-steel cup strainer
and 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) diameter tailpiece.
I. Drain Piping: NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) chrome-plated cast-brass trap, tubular brass waste to wall, and
wall escutcheon.
J. Bar Sink Outlet: 2-inch- (51-mm-) diameter outlet with stainless-steel grid strainer.
K. Disposers: Continuous-feed, household, food-waste disposers. Include 115-V ac, 1725-rpm, 1/2-hp
motor with overload protection and reset button; 3-conductor, grounded power cord; wall switch;
corrosion-resistant chamber with jam-resistant, cutlery- or stainless-steel grinder or shredder;
NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) outlet; quick-mounting, stainless-steel sink flange; antisplash guard; and
combination cover/stopper.
L. Hot-Water Dispensers: Household type with instant on-off control; insulated, corrosion-resistant-
metal storage tank that is open to atmosphere; electric, 115-V ac, heating element; 3-conductor,
grounded power cord; chrome-plated faucet or spout; removable strainer; thermostat control for
water temperature up to 190 deg F (88 deg C); thermal-overload protection; and minimum 1/2-gal.
(1.9-L) tank capacity dispensing approximately 60 cups (240 mL) of water per hour.
2.8 APPLIANCES
A. Built-in Refrigerators: Fabricated with 1-piece seamless steel or ABS plastic inner liner; refrigerator
compartment with slide-out or removable shelves and meat tray; adjustable automatic temperature
control; door with magnetic gaskets and storage shelves; interior light; closed compartment for 25-
lb- (11-kg-) minimum storage of prefrozen food and 2 ice cube trays; 115-V ac.
1. Minimum Capacity: [3.2 cu. ft. (0.091 cu. m)] [5.5 cu. ft. (0.156 cu. m)] [6.0 cu. ft. (0.169 cu.
m)] <Insert capacity>.
2. Defrost System: [Automatic defrost timer] [Push button or manual].
3. Compressor: Cushion-mounted, self-oiling, and hermetically sealed compressor; fan or
gravity cooled.
4. Finish Panel: Manufacturer's standard door trim kit with filler panel or integral finish panel;
match material and finish of base cabinets.
B. Freestanding, Upright Refrigerator-Freezers: Two-door combination unit with 1-piece seamless

steel or ABS plastic inner liner; automatic defrost; closed freezer compartment with 2 adjustable
shelves[ and 2 ice cube trays]; full-width vegetable crisper; dairy compartment; interior light;
adjustable automatic temperature control; door with magnetic gaskets and storage shelves; 115-
V ac, with 3-conductor, grounded power cord.
1. Minimum Capacity: [12-cu. ft. (0.340-cu. m) refrigerator capacity with 100-lb (45-kg)] [14-
cu. ft. (0.396-cu. m) refrigerator capacity with 125-lb (57-kg)] [<Insert refrigerator
capacity> with <Insert freezer capacity>] freezer capacity.
2. Icemaker: Built-in automatic unit.
3. Finish Panel: Manufacturer's standard door trim kit with filler panel or integral finish panel;
match material and finish of base cabinets.
C. Automatic Icemakers: Built-in undercounter unit; capable of producing [22 lb (10 kg) of ice per
day; with 12-lb (5.4-kg)] [35 lb (15.9 kg) of ice per day; with 26-lb (11.8-kg)] [50 lb (22.6 kg) of
ice per day; with 35-lb (15.9-kg)] storage bin; 115-V ac, with 3-conductor, grounded power cord;
with plumbed water supply.
D. Electric Cooktops: Porcelain-enamel-finished steel; coil-element burners with removable rings and
reflector bowls, infinitely adjustable heating controls, and individual signal lights; with wiring
terminated at factory-installed junction box.
1. Cooktop Burner: One element rated at [900 W; 115] [1250 W; 208/240]-V ac.

2. Cooktop Burners: One element rated at 550 W, and one element rated at 950 W; 115-V ac.
3. Cooktop Burners: Two elements, each rated at 1250 W; [115] [208/240]-V ac.
4. Cooktop Burners: Two elements rated at 1250 W, and one element rated at 2100 W;
208/240-V ac.
E. Built-in Electric Ovens: Porcelain-enamel-finished steel exterior surfaces; coil-element burners with
removable rings and reflector bowls, infinitely adjustable heating controls, and individual signal
lights. Oven interior fabricated from 1-piece porcelain-enamel-finished steel with rounded corners,
with "Bake" and "Broil" oven elements, automatic heat control, signal light, and removable wire oven
rack; textured baked-enamel- or porcelain-enamel-finished steel oven door; 208/240-V ac, with
wiring terminated at factory-installed junction box.
1. Cooktop Burners: Three elements, each rated at 1250 W.

2. Oven Elements: [1500 W bake; 2000 W broil] [Manufacturer's standard].
F. Freestanding Electric Ranges: Porcelain-enamel-finished steel exterior surfaces; coil-element

burners with removable rings and reflector bowls, infinitely adjustable heating controls, and
individual signal lights. Oven interior fabricated from 1-piece porcelain-enamel-finished steel with
rounded corners, with "Bake" and "Broil" oven elements, automatic heat control, signal light, two
removable wire oven racks, and porcelain-on-steel broiler pan; textured baked-enamel- or porcelain-
enamel-finished steel oven door; 208/240-V ac, with wiring terminated at factory-installed junction
box.
1. Cooktop Burners: Three elements, each rated at 1250 W, and one element rated at 2100 W.
2. Oven Elements: Manufacturer's standard.
G. Gas Cooktops: Porcelain-enamel-finished steel; surface burners with removable cast-iron grates,
lift-out burner bowls, and 115-V ac electronic ignition; with wiring terminated at factory-installed
junction box, and burner control panel mounted at front of unit.
1. Cooktop Burners: Two elements, each rated at [8000 Btu (8440 kJ)] [10,000 Btu (10 550
kJ)] for natural gas.
H. Built-in Gas Ovens: [Stainless-steel] [Porcelain-enamel-finished steel] exterior surfaces; surface

burners with removable cast-iron grates, lift-out burner bowls, and 115-V ac electronic ignition; with
wiring terminated at factory-installed junction box. Oven interior fabricated from porcelain-enamel-
finished steel with rounded corners; removable wire oven rack, automatic heat control, and
combination surface burner and oven control panel mounted above oven door at front of unit.
1. Cooktop Burners: Three elements, each rated at 5000 Btu (5275 kJ) for natural gas.
2. Cooktop Burners: Four elements, each rated at 9000 Btu (9495 kJ) for natural gas.
3. Oven Burner: Rated at [9000 Btu (9495 kJ)] [18,000 Btu (18 990 kJ)] for natural gas.
I. Freestanding Gas Ranges: Porcelain-enamel-finished steel exterior surfaces; surface burners with
removable grates, lift-out burner bowls, and 115-V ac electronic ignition; with 3-conductor, grounded
power cord. Oven interior fabricated from porcelain-enamel-finished steel with rounded corners; two
removable wire oven racks, porcelain-on-steel broiler pan, automatic heat control, and combination
surface burner and oven control panel mounted above oven door at front of unit.
1. Cooktop Burners: Four elements, each rated at 9000 Btu (9495 kJ) for natural gas.
2. Oven Burner: Rated at 18,000 Btu (18 990 kJ) for natural gas.
J. Freestanding Microwave Ovens: [0.7-cu. ft. (0.020-cu. m) capacity with 600 W] [0.8-cu. ft. (0.023-
cu. m) capacity with 700 W] cooking power; electronic touch controls, variable power control,
digital clock timer, interior light, turntable, and tempered glass door; 115-V ac, with 3-conductor,
grounded power cord.
K. Built-in Microwave Ovens with Exhaust Hood: Undercabinet mounted, minimum 1.0-cu. ft. (0.028-
cu. m) capacity with 800 W cooking power; electronic touch controls, variable power control, digital

clock timer, interior light, turntable, tempered glass door, and exhaust hood with integral light and 2-
speed fan control; 115-V ac, with 3-conductor, grounded power cord.
1. Exhaust Hood: Recirculating, nonventing type, with replaceable charcoal filter.

2. Exhaust Hood: Ventilating type, with permanent washable filter. Provide exhaust duct and
[wall] [roof] cap and shutter. Refer to Division 15 Section "Metal Ducts."
L. Built-in Microwave/Convection Ovens with Exhaust Hood: Undercabinet mounted, minimum 1.0-cu.
ft. (0.028-cu. m) capacity with 800 W cooking power; electronic touch controls, variable power
control, digital clock timer, interior light, turntable, convection rack, tempered glass door, and
exhaust hood with integral light and 2-speed fan control; 115-V ac, with 3-conductor, grounded
power cord.
1. Exhaust Hood: Recirculating, nonventing type, with replaceable charcoal filter.

2. Exhaust Hood: Ventilating type, with permanent washable filter. Provide exhaust duct and
[wall] [roof] cap and shutter. Refer to Division 15 Section "Metal Ducts."
M. Ventilating Exhaust Hoods: Undercabinet mounted, 24 inches (610 mm) wide, [stainless] [baked-
enamel] steel; 2-speed fan control, permanent washable filter, and built-in lighting; 115-V ac, with
wiring terminated at factory-installed junction box.
1. Provide exhaust duct and [wall] [roof] cap and shutter. Refer to Division 15 Section "Metal
Ducts."
N. Recirculating, Nonventilating Exhaust Hoods: Undercabinet mounted, 24 inches (610 mm) wide,
[stainless] [baked-enamel] steel; 2-speed fan control, replaceable charcoal filter, and built-in
lighting; 115-V ac, with wiring terminated at factory-installed junction box.
O. Dishwashers: Built-in undercounter unit, [18 inches (457 mm) wide] [24 inches (610 mm) wide]
[width as indicated]; multiple wash cycles, coated roll-out racks, detergent dispenser, and insulated
cavity walls and door; 115-V ac, with wiring terminated at factory-installed junction box.
P. Automatic Coffeemakers: Stainless steel, with capacity for 3 pots of coffee; automatic brewing,
nonstick warmer plates, and lighted on-off switch; 115-V ac, with 3-conductor, grounded power cord;
designed for permanent installation in countertop, with plumbed water supply. Provide glass coffee
decanters in number to match capacity.
2.9 ACCESSORIES
A. Locks: Brass cylinder type; furnish two keys per lock. Provide [where indicated] [on base cabinet
doors] [on refrigerator].
B. Fluorescent Light Fixtures: Surface mounted to underside of overhead cabinet; with 15 W lamp, on-
off switch, grounded convenience receptacle, and translucent plastic lens.
C. Cutlery Drawers: Concealed drawer in undercounter storage compartment with pull-out divided tray.
D. Cutting Boards: Pull-out hardwood board.
E. Heat Shields: Minimum 12 inches high by 24 inches (305 mm high by 610 mm) wide, 0.025-inch-
(0.65-mm-) thick stainless steel over 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) thick board insulation.
2.10 FABRICATION
A. General: Factory fabricate and assemble unit kitchens, with base cabinets[, sink,] [, refrigerator,]
and countertop shipping as a one-piece assembly. Securely fasten components, fixtures, and
appliances together.

1. Provide manufacturer's standard hardware including concealed, adjustable plated-steel

hinges; steel drawer slides with nylon rollers; and catches and rubber bumpers on doors and
drawers. Unless otherwise indicated, provide chromium-plated metal or satin-finished
stainless steel for exposed hardware.
B. Accessible Units: Fabricate unit kitchens with 1-piece countertop that extends over open space
located under sink and over adjacent refrigerator at height of 34 inches (864 mm) above finished
floor.
1. Provide manufacturer's standard panels to enclose plumbing under countertop, of same

material and finish as cabinets.
C. Adjustable, Accessible Countertops: Fabricate unit kitchen with 2-piece countertop that allows
countertop over sink, including backsplash, side splashes, and sink assembly, to be adjusted
between 28 and 40 inches (710 and 1016 mm) above finished floor.
D. Removable, Accessible Cabinets: Fabricate cabinet under sink to allow cabinet removal without
disconnecting plumbing by [an open back that provides] [removable cabinet doors and snap-
out base platform that provide] [manufacturer's standard method that provides] access to
plumbing and electrical connections.
2.11 FINISHES
A. Steel Finishes: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal
Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
1. Baked-Enamel Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply manufacturer's

standard two-coat, baked-enamel finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat.
B. Stainless-Steel Finishes: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal
Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Remove tool and die marks
and stretch lines or blend into finish. Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform, directionally
textured, polished finish indicated, free of cross scratches. Run grain with long dimension of each
piece. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,
temporary protective covering before shipping.
1. Bright, Directional Polish: No. 4 finish.
C. Wood Finishes: Factory finished with manufacturer's standard stain, sealer, and clear finish coat.
Defer only final touchup until after installation.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine walls and floors, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.
1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to
performance of work.
B. Examine walls and partitions for proper backing for unit kitchens.
C. Examine roughing-in for electrical power [plumbing] [and] [mechanical] system(s) to verify actual
locations of connections before installation of unit kitchens.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install level, plumb, and true; shim as required, using concealed shims. Provide fasteners,
clips, backing materials, brackets, anchors, fillers, scribes, trim, and accessories necessary for
complete installation.
1. Anchor unit kitchens at ends and at intervals recommended by manufacturer, but not more
than 36 inches (910 mm) o.c. Install anchors through backup reinforcing plates, channels, or
blocking as required to prevent material distortion, using concealed fasteners.
B. Comply with requirements specified in Division 15 for connecting unit kitchens to [plumbing] [and]
[mechanical] system(s).
C. Comply with requirements specified in Division 16 for connecting unit kitchens to electrical power
system.
3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Test, adjust, and verify operation of each appliance, plumbing fixture, and component of unit
kitchens. Repair or replace items found to be defective or operating below rated capacity.
B. Verify that operating parts work freely and fit neatly, and that clearances are adequate to properly
and freely operate appliances.
C. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware. Adjust doors and latches to operate easily without
binding.[ Verify that locking devices operate properly.]
D. After completing unit kitchen installation, remove protective coverings if any.
E. Repair or replace damaged parts, dents, buckles, abrasions, and other defects affecting appearance
or serviceability. Touch up factory-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.
3.4 UNIT KITCHEN SCHEDULE
A. Unit Kitchen <Insert drawing designation>:

a comparable product by one of the following manufacturers:

a. Acme Kitchenettes Corp.; <Insert product name or designation>.

b. Cervitor Kitchens, Inc.; <Insert product name or designation>.
c. Dwyer Products Corp.; <Insert product name or designation>.
d. <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation.>
4. Cabinets: [Steel, with matching door and drawer fronts] [Steel, with laminate-clad door
and drawer fronts] [Stainless steel] [Framed-style laminate clad] [Frameless-style
laminate clad] [Wood].

a. Wall Cabinets: [Required] [Not required].
1) Wall Shields: [High-pressure decorative laminate] [Stainless steel] on

back[ and sides].
b. Color: [As indicated by manufacturer's designations] [Match Architect's sample]

[As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range].
5. Countertop for Integral Sink: [Stainless steel] [Porcelain-enamel-finished steel] [Solid-

surfacing material].
6. Countertop: [Stainless steel] [High-pressure decorative laminate] [Post-formed, high-
pressure decorative laminate].
a. Drop-in Sink: [Stainless] [Porcelain-enamel] steel.
7. Countertop: Solid-surfacing material.
a. Undercounter Sink: [Stainless] [Porcelain-enamel] steel.

8. Fixtures:
a. Sink Faucet: [Single-lever control; swing spout] [Single-lever control; European

style with pull-out spray] [Separate hot and cold controls, swing spout] [Separate
hot and cold controls, gooseneck spout].
b. Disposer.
c. Hot-water dispenser.
9. Appliances:
a. Refrigerator: [Built-in] [Freestanding].

b. Automatic icemaker.
c. Cooktop: [Electric] [Gas].
d. Built-in Oven: [Electric] [Gas].
e. Freestanding Range: [Electric] [Gas].
f. Microwave Oven: [Freestanding] [Built-in with exhaust hood] [Built-in
microwave/convection with exhaust hood].
g. Exhaust Hood: [Ventilating] [Recirculating, nonventilating] type.
h. Dishwasher.
i. Automatic coffeemaker.
10. Accessories: [Locks] [fluorescent light fixture] [cutlery drawer] [cutting board] [and]
[heat shields].
B. Wet Bar <Insert drawing designation>:

a comparable product by one of the following manufacturers:

a. Acme Kitchenettes Corp.; <Insert product name or designation>.

b. Cervitor Kitchens, Inc.; <Insert product name or designation>.
c. Dwyer Products Corp.; <Insert product name or designation>.

d. <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation.>
4. Cabinets: [Steel, with matching door and drawer fronts] [Steel, with laminate-clad door
and drawer fronts] [Stainless steel] [Framed-style laminate clad] [Frameless-style
laminate clad] [Wood].
a. Wall Cabinets: [Required] [Not required].
1) Wall Shields: [High-pressure decorative laminate] [Stainless steel] on

back[ and sides].

5. Countertop for Integral Sink: [Stainless steel] [Porcelain-enamel-finished steel] [Solid-

surfacing material].
6. Countertop: [Stainless steel] [High-pressure decorative laminate] [Post-formed, high-
pressure decorative laminate].
a. Drop-in Sink: [Stainless] [Porcelain-enamel] steel.
7. Countertop: Solid-surfacing material.
a. Undercounter Sink: [Stainless] [Porcelain-enamel] steel.

8. Fixtures:
a. Sink Faucet: [Single-lever control; swing spout] [Single-lever control; European

style with pull-out spray] [Separate hot and cold controls, swing spout] [Separate
hot and cold controls, gooseneck spout].
b. Disposer.
c. Hot-water dispenser.
9. Appliances:
a. Refrigerator, built-in.
b. Automatic icemaker.
c. Microwave Oven: [Freestanding] [Built-in].
d. Automatic coffeemaker.

SUBJECT: SECTION 11480- GYMNASIUM EQUIPMENT
SECTION 11480
GYMNASIUM EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following gymnasium equipment:
1. Basketball equipment.
2. Volleyball equipment.
3. Badminton equipment.
4. Exercise equipment.
5. Safety pads.
1. Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for [installation of floor insert sleeves]

[oversized recessed voids] to be cast in concrete slabs and footings.
2. Division 11 Section "Gymnasium Dividers."
3. Division 16 Sections for electrical service for motor operators, controls, and other powered
devices for motorized gymnasium equipment.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. FIBA: International Basketball Federation (Federation Internationale de Basketball Amateur).
B. FIVB: International Volleyball Federation (Federation Internationale de Volleyball).
C. IBF: International Badminton Federation.
D. NAGWS: The National Association for Girls and Women in Sport.
E. NCAA: The National Collegiate Athletic Association.
F. NFHS: The National Federation of State High School Associations.
G. USAV: USA Volleyball.
A. Seismic Performance: Provide basketball backboards capable of withstanding the effects of

earthquake motions determined according to [ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings
and Other Structures": Section 9, "Earthquake Loads."] <Insert applicable code
requirement.>
MHA – TECH. SPECIFICATION – 1706 – 04/02/2015 SECTION 11480 – GYMNASIUM EQUIPMENTS 1 / 17

1.5 SUBMITTALS
1. If applicable, include assembly, disassembly, and storage instructions for removable

equipment.
2. Motors: Show nameplate data, ratings, characteristics, and mounting arrangements.
B. Shop Drawings: For gymnasium equipment. Include plans, elevations, sections, details,
attachments to other work, and the following:
1. Method of field assembly for removable equipment, connections, installation details,

mountings, floor inserts, attachments to other work, and operational clearances.
2. Transport and storage accessories for removable equipment.
C. Structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for
their preparation including loads, point reactions, and locations for attachment of gymnasium
equipment to structure.
D. Coordination Drawings: Court layout plans, drawn to scale, and coordinating floor inserts, game
lines, and markers applied to finished flooring.
E. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of gymnasium equipment indicated.
F. Samples for Verification: For the following products:
1. [Basketball] [Volleyball] [Badminton] Net: Full size.

2. [Volleyball] [Badminton] Floor Insert: Full-size unit.
3. [Volleyball] [Badminton] Post Standard: Full-size unit[ with net tensioner].
4. Pad Fabric: Not less than 3 inches (76 mm) square, with specified treatments applied. Mark
face of material.
G. Product Certificates: For each type of gymnasium equipment, signed by product manufacturer.
H. Qualification Data: For [Installer] [professional engineer].
I. Operation and Maintenance Data: For gymnasium equipment to include in emergency, operation,
and maintenance manuals.
J. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.
A. Installer Qualifications: [Fabricator of products] [An employer of workers trained and approved
by manufacturer].
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of gymnasium equipment through one source from a single
manufacturer.
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.

A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install gymnasium equipment until spaces are enclosed and
weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and ambient temperature and humidity
conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.
B. Field Measurements: Verify position and elevation of floor inserts and layout for gymnasium
equipment.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of floor inserts with structural floors and finish flooring installation and with
court layout and game lines and markers on finish flooring.
B. Coordinate layout and installation of overhead-supported gymnasium equipment and suspension

system components with other construction including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-
suppression-system components, and partition assemblies.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace
components of gymnasium equipment that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty
period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Basketball backboard failures including glass breakage.

b. Faulty operation of <Insert components>.
2. Warranty Period: [Five] [10] <Insert number> years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated.
1. Extruded Bars, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M).

2. Cast Aluminum: ASTM B 179.
3. Flat Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M).
B. Steel: Comply with the following:
1. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

2. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500 or ASTM A 513, cold formed.
3. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M.
C. Support Cable: [1/4-inch- (6-mm-) diameter, 7x19] [Manufacturer's standard] galvanized steel
aircraft cable[ with a breaking strength of 7000 lb (3175 kg)]. Provide fittings complying with
cable manufacturer's written instructions for size, number, and method of installation.
D. Support Chain and Fittings: Grade 80 hardened alloy steel chain rated for overhead lifting,
ASTM A 391/A 391M, with commercial-quality, [hot-dip galvanized] [zinc-plated] steel connectors
and hangars.

E. Castings and Hangers: Malleable iron, ASTM A 47/A 47M, grade required for structural loading.
F. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1, exterior.
G. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2[, made with adhesive containing no urea

formaldehyde].
H. Equipment Wall-Mounting Board: Wood, [transparent] [or] [neutral-color painted] finish, size, and
quantity as required to mount gymnasium equipment according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
I. Anchors, Fasteners, Fittings and Hardware: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant or

noncorrodible units; concealed[; tamperproof, vandal- and theft-resistant design].
J. Grout: Nonshrink, nonmetallic, premixed, factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous

grout complying with ASTM C 1107 with minimum strength recommended in writing by gymnasium
equipment manufacturer.
2.2 BASKETBALL EQUIPMENT

C. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide [the product indicated
on Drawings] <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation> or a comparable
product by one of the following:
1. AALCO Manufacturing.
2. Arizona Courtlines, Inc.
3. ADP Lemco Inc.
4. Basketball Products International; a division of American Athletic, Inc.
5. Bison Inc.
6. Douglas Industries, Inc.
7. Draper Inc.
8. Institutional Products Inc.
9. Jaypro Sports, LLC.
10. L. A. Steelcraft.
11. Performance Sports Systems.
12. Porter Athletic Equipment Company.
13. P. W. Athletic Mfg. Co.
D. General: Provide equipment complying with requirements in [FIBA's "FIBA Basketball Rule Book]
[NCAA's "NCAA Basketball Rule Book] [NFHS's "NFHS Basketball Rule Book]."
E. Protruding fasteners or exposed bolt heads on front face of backboards are not permitted.
F. Overhead-Supported[, Wall-Braced] Backboard:
1. Stationary Type: Manufacturer's standard assembly.

2. Folding Type: Provide manufacturer's standard assembly for [forward-folding, front-
braced] [forward-folding, rear-braced] [backward-folding] [side-folding] backboard, with
hardware and fittings to permit folding.
3. Framing: Steel pipe, tubing, and shapes. Design framing to minimize vibration during play.

a. Center-Mast Frame: [Welded] [Welded and bolted or clamped] with side sway
bracing.
b. Dual-Mast Frame: [Welded] [Welded and bolted or clamped] with cross bracing.
c. Finish: Manufacturer's standard [primer for field finishing] [powder-coat finish].
4. Goal Height Adjuster: Adjustable from 8 to 10 feet (2.4 to 3 m) with gear-drive mechanism,
locking in any position within adjustment range, with visible height scale attached to side of
framing.
a. Operation: Manual with detachable crank handle.

b. Operation: Electric with integral gear-drive motor, with limit switches preset to goal
heights, and [one] <Insert number> detachable electric control device(s).
G. Wall-Mounted Backboards: Complete assembly extending from wall, including support framing to
building structure, bracing, cables, chains, pulleys, fittings, hardware, pipe anchors, equipment pads,
and fasteners.
1. Stationary Type: Provide manufacturer's standard assembly for stationary backboard.

2. Folding Type: Provide manufacturer's standard assembly for [upward] [side]-folding
backboard, with hardware and fittings to permit folding.
3. Framing: Steel pipe, tubing, and shapes. Design framing to minimize vibration during play.
a. Finish: Manufacturer's standard [primer for field finishing] [powder-coat finish].
4. Extension: [6 inches (152 mm)] [12 inches (305 mm)] [18 inches (457 mm)] [24 to 48
inches (610 to 1220 mm)] [48 to 120 inches (1220 to 3050 mm)] [As indicated] <Insert
dimension>.
5. Goal Height Adjuster: Adjustable from 8 to 10 feet (2.4 to 3 m) with gear-drive mechanism,
locking in any position within adjustment range, with visible height scale attached to side of
framing.
a. Operation: Manual with detachable crank handle.

b. Operation: Electric with integral gear-drive motor, with limit switches preset to goal
heights, and [one] <Insert number> detachable electric control device(s).
H. Backboard Safety Device: Designed to limit free fall if support cable, support chain, pulleys, fittings,
winch, or related components fail; with mechanical automatic reset; [6000-lb (2722-kg)] <Insert
weight> load capacity; [one per folding backboard] [where indicated].
1. Retractor Device: [Pulley-type] [Spring-activated, reel-type] [Manufacturer's standard]

device designed to retract both support and safety cables, chains, and straps away from play
of the basketball when backboard is in playing position; [one per folding backboard] [where
indicated].
I. Winch: Hoist, consisting of heavy-duty, fully enclosed worm-gear, brake, cable drum, cable, and
fittings, for mounting on [wall with equipment mounting board] <Insert mounting>; designed to
move and hold backboard in any raised or lowered position.
1. Operation: Manual winch with detachable hand crank.

2. Portable Winch Operator: [One] <Insert number> portable electric motor-drive device(s),
including adaptor to fit crank mechanism.
J. Backboard Electric Operator: Provide operating machine of size and capacity recommended by
manufacturer for equipment specified, with electric motor and factory-prewired motor controls,
starter, gear-reduction unit, and remote controls. Coordinate wiring requirements and electrical
characteristics with building electrical system.

1. Operator Type: Cable drum with grooved drum and cable tension device to automatically
take up cable slack and retain cable in grooves.
2. Operator Mounting: [Wall-mounting board] <Insert mounting>.
3. Motor Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, reverse, and operate connected loads at
designated speeds within installed environment and with indicated operating sequence, and
without exceeding nameplate rating or considering service factor. Comply with NEMA MG 1,
and the following:
4. Voltage: [120 V] [208-220 V] [NEMA standard voltage selected to operate on nominal
circuit voltage to which motor is connected] <Insert voltage>.
5. Horsepower: [1/2] [3/4] [1] <Insert number> hp.
6. Enclosure: [Open dripproof] [Totally enclosed] [Manufacturer's standard].
7. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 105 deg F (40 deg C) and at altitude of
3300 feet (1005 m) above sea level.
8. Service Factor: 1.15 for open dripproof motors; 1.0 for totally enclosed motors.
9. Phase: One.
10. Remote-Control Station(s): NEMA ICS 6, Type 1 enclosure for [surface] [recessed or flush]
<Insert mounting> mounting, momentary-contact, three-position switch-operated control with
up, down, and off functions.
a. Group Key Switch Control Stations: One switch per [each backboard] [two
backboards] <Insert option>.
b. Keys: Provide [one key] [two keys] [one set of dual keys] [two sets of dual keys]
[dual keys, one key for up and one for down] per station.
c. Switches, Ganged: Single faceplate with multiple switch cut-outs [for two switches
operating four backboards] [for three switches operating six backboards] [for
four switches operating eight backboards] [for 5 switches operating 10
backboards] [for 6 switches operating 12 backboards] [as indicated].
d. Control Station Enclosure: Provide prime-painted metal enclosure with [integrally
formed padlock hasps] [key access with two sets of keys per enclosure].
e. Radio Controls: Digital system consisting of code-compatible universal coaxial
receiver, one per backboard winch, and [two] <Insert number> portable multiple-
channel transmitters for operating [two] [four] [up to nine] <Insert number>
backboards individually with up and down functions.
11. Limit Switches: Adjustable switches, interlocked with motor controls and set to automatically
stop basketball equipment at fully retracted and fully lowered positions.
K. Basketball Backboard:
1. Shape and Size:
a. Rectangular, [72 by 42 inches (1800 by 1050 mm)] [72 by 48 inches (1800 by 1200
mm)] <Insert dimensions> width by height[, with rounded corners].
b. Fan shaped, 54-inch (1370-mm) maximum width by [35-inch (890-mm)] [39-inch (990-
mm)] maximum height.
2. Backboard Material: With predrilled holes or preset inserts for mounting goals, and as
follows:
a. Fiberglass: Not less than 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) thick composite backboard consisting
of not less than two 3/16-inch- (5-mm-) thick, molded fiberglass panels laminated
together over faces and edges encapsulating a 3/4-inch (19-mm) honeycomb core,
reinforced at goal and backboard mountings, or wood panel product core; with
threaded inserts or embedded anchors for mounting backboard corners to support
framing at standard mounting centers.
b. Glass: Not less than 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) thick, transparent tempered glass. Provide
glass with impact-absorbing resilient rubber or PVC gasket around perimeter in a fully
welded, [painted steel] [brushed-natural-finish, extruded-aluminum] frame, with
steel subframe, reinforcement, and bracing[, including center-strut frame

reinforcement,] and with mounting slots for mounting backboard frame to backboard
support framing.
1) Standard Mount: Provide steel corner reinforcement with mounting slots for
mounting backboard frame to backboard support framing at standard mounting
centers.
2) Direct Mount: Designed for mounting backboard frame to center mast of
backboard framing to maximize relief of stresses on backboard frame and glass.
3) Rim-Restraining Device: Complying with NCAA and NFHS rules and designed
to ensure that basket remains attached if glass backboard breaks.
c. Steel: Single-piece, steel face sheet, not less than [0.1046-inch (2.7-mm)] <Insert
dimension> nominal thickness, with 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) deep, roll-edged perimeter
flange and with steel-reinforced, welded frame welded to back side of backboard; with
mounting slots for mounting backboard frame to backboard support framing at standard
mounting centers.
d. Hardwood or Particleboard: Not less than 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) thick backboard
consisting of not less than 1/32-inch- (0.8-mm-) thick, melamine- or phenolic-resin-
impregnated cellulose and paper laminate over front and back sides of 1-1/2-inch (38-
mm) hardwood or particleboard core; with painted edges and corners and with
threaded inserts or slotted brackets for mounting backboard corners to backboard
support framing at standard mounting centers.
3. Target Area and Border Markings: Permanently etched in white color, marked in [pattern
and stripe width according to referenced rules] [manufacturer's standard pattern and
stripe width].
4. Target Area and Border Markings: Marked in [pattern, stripe width, and color according to
referenced rules] [orange, with manufacturer's standard pattern and stripe width]
[black, with manufacturer's standard pattern and stripe width].
5. Finish: Manufacturer's standard factory-applied, white background.
L. Goal Mounting Assembly: Compatible with goal, backboard, and support framing; with hole pattern
[5 inches (127 mm) o.c. horizontally and vertically] [5 inches (127 mm) o.c. horizontally and 4
inches (102 mm) o.c. vertically] [5 inches (127 mm) o.c. horizontally and 4-1/2 inches (114
mm) o.c. vertically] [that is manufacturer's standard] <Insert dimensions> for goal attachment.
1. Glass Backboard Goal Mounting Assembly: Goal support framing and reinforcement
designed to transmit load from goal to backboard frame and to minimize stresses on glass
backboard.
2. Direct Mount: Designed for mounting goal directly and independently to center mast of
backboard support framing so no force, transmitted by ring, is directly applied to backboard
and rigidity and stability of goal are maximized.
M. Basketball Goals: Complete with flanges, braces, attachment plate, and evenly spaced loops
welded around underside of ring.
1. Single-Rim Basket Ring Competition Goal: Materials, dimensions, and fabrication

[complying with referenced rules] [per manufacturer's standard design].
2. Double-Rim Basket Ring: Fabricated with 2 rims, [each consisting of 5/8-inch- (16-mm-)
diameter] [consisting of one 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) diameter and one 5/8-inch- (16-mm-)
diameter] [manufacturer's standard-diameter] <Insert description> steel rod welded into
18-inch (450-mm) ID rings.
3. Type: Fixed, nonmovable.
4. Type: Movable, breakaway design with manufacturer's standard breakaway mechanism and
rebound characteristics identical to those of fixed, nonmovable ring.
5. Type: Movable, breakaway design with manufacturer's standard breakaway mechanism
including positive-lock, preset pressure release, set to release at [230-lb (105-kg)] [180- and
230-lb (82- and 105-kg)] <Insert release-setting criteria> load, and automatic reset.

Provide movable ring with rebound characteristics identical to those of fixed, nonmovable
ring.
6. Mount: [Front] [Rear].
7. Net Attachment: [Loops for tying net to rim] [No-tie loops for attaching net to rim
without tying] [Tube-tie for attaching net to rim].
8. Finish: [Manufacturer's standard] [Powder-coat] finish.
N. Basketball Nets: 12-loop-mesh net, between 15 and 18 inches (400 to 450 mm) long, sized to fit rim
diameter, and as follows:
1. Cord: Made from white [cotton] [nylon] [plastic].

2. Competition Cord: Antiwhip, made from white nylon cord not less than 120- or more than
144-gm thread.
3. Chain: Nontangle, nonstretch design that will not scratch or impede the ball, made from zinc-
coated steel chain.
O. Backboard Safety Pads: Designed for backboard thickness indicated and extending continuously
along bottom and up sides of backboard and over goal mounting and backboard supports as
[required by referenced rules] [per manufacturer's standard design] [indicated].
1. Attachment: [Peel-and-stick tape] [Adhesive] [Bolt-on] [Manufacturer's standard].

2. Color: [Black] [Gray] [Manufacturer's standard color] [As selected by Architect from
manufacturer's full range].
2.3 VOLLEYBALL EQUIPMENT

2. ADP Lemco Inc.
3. American Athletic, Inc.
5. Bison Inc.
6. Douglas Industries, Inc.
7. Draper Inc.
9. L. A. Steelcraft.
13. Schelde North America.
14. Sports Imports.
D. General: Provide equipment complying with requirements in [FIVB's "Official Volleyball Rules]
[NAGWS's "NAGWS Volleyball Rulebook] [NFHS's "NFHS Volleyball Rule Book] [USAV's
"USA Volleyball Rule Book]."
E. Floor Insert: [Solid-brass] [Chrome-finished steel] [Aluminum] floor plate; and steel pipe sleeve,
concealed by floor plate, with capped bottom end, sized with ID to fit post standards, not less than [9

inches (230 mm) long] [12 inches (300 mm) long] [length required] to securely anchor pipe
sleeve [in structural floor] [below finished floor in concrete footing] [as indicated]; with anchors
designed for securing floor insert to floor substrate indicated; [one per post standard] [quantity as
indicated].
1. Floor Plate: [Self-locking,] [Lockable,] [Manufacturer's standard] hinged access cover,

designed to be flush with adjacent flooring. Provide [one] [two] <Insert number> tool(s) for
unlocking access covers.
2. Floor Plate: [Self-locking,] [Lockable,] [Manufacturer's standard] hinged access cover,
recessed to accept finish flooring matching and designed to be level with adjacent flooring.
Provide [one] [two] <Insert number> tool(s) for unlocking access covers.
3. Floor Plate: Lockable swivel access cover, designed for use with floating wood floors and to
be flush with adjacent flooring. Provide [one] [two] <Insert number> tool(s) for unlocking
access covers.
4. Floor Plate: <Insert requirements.>
F. Post Standards: Removable, paired volleyball post standards[ and center post standard for
multicourt play] as indicated. [Fixed] [Adjustable, telescoping] height. Designed for easy
removal from permanently placed floor insert supports. Fabricated from [steel] [extruded-
aluminum] [combined steel and extruded-aluminum] [manufacturer's standard metal] pipe or
tubing, with nonmarking plastic or rubber end cap or floor bumper to protect permanent flooring.
Finished with manufacturer's standard factory-applied, baked powder-coating finish complying with
finish manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation including pretreatment, application,
baking, and minimum dry film thickness or plated metal finish.
1. Nominal Pipe or Tubing Diameter: [3-inch (75-mm)] [3-1/2-inch (89-mm)] [4-inch (102-mm)]
OD at base.
2. Net Height Adjuster: [Track or rail system and lock mechanism designed for infinite]
[Sliding collar and lock mechanism designed for infinite] [Preset net hooks designed
for incremental] [Manufacturer's standard mechanism for] height adjustment, complete
with fittings; designed for positioning net at heights indicated.
3. Telescopic and Net Height Adjuster System: Provide [infinitely adjustable system
consisting of screw rod, gear, and crank or constant-tension spring and pulley assist
and] [incrementally adjustable system with predrilled holes and pin] [Manufacturer's
standard telescoping system with] locking device, telescopic post, and fittings for holding
net at selected height; designed for height adjustment of post standard to position net at
heights indicated.
a. Net Heights: Between [sitting volleyball net height and boys'/men's volleyball net
height, 36 and 95-5/8 inches (910 and 2430 mm)] [tennis net height and
boys'/men's volleyball net height, 42 and 95-5/8 inches (1066 and 2430 mm)] [for
age 12 and under net height and boys'/men's volleyball net height, 84 and 95-5/8
inches (2130 and 2430 mm)] <Insert net height range> or more.
4. Height Markers: Clearly marked at regulation play heights for [elementary school]
[girls/women] [boys/men] [sitting volleyball] [tennis] <Insert requirements>.
G. Net: 32 feet (9.75 m) long and as follows; [1 per pair of paired post standards] [2 per every
center post standard] <Insert requirements>:
1. Width and Mesh: 36 inches (910 mm) with 4-1/2-inch- (114-mm-) square mesh made of black
polyester string.
a. Hem Band Edges: White, 2-inch- (50-mm-) wide top binding; black, [3/4-inch- (19-
mm-)] [1-inch- (25-mm-)] wide bottom and side bindings; tie offs at top and bottom of
each side end of net; and 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) diameter rope, at least 42 feet (12.8 m)
long, threaded through top hem of binding.

2. Width and Mesh: Competition volleyball net, [36 inches (910 mm)] [39 inches (990 mm)]
with 4-inch- (102-mm-) square[ knotless] mesh made of black nylon string.
a. Hem Band Edges: White, not less than 2-inch- (50-mm-) wide top, bottom, and side
bindings; [tie offs at top, bottom and midpoint of each side end of net] [not less
than 1-inch- (25-mm-) wide tension straps at top, bottom and midpoint of each
side end of net]; end sleeves for dowels; and lines with linkage fittings threaded
through top and bottom hems of binding. Provide lengths of lines and linkage fittings
as required to properly connect to and set up net for post standard spacing indicated
on Drawings.
1) Top Line: Not less than [1/4-inch- (6-mm-) diameter rope] [1/8-inch- (3-mm-)
diameter, galvanized or coated steel cable] <Insert description>.
2) Bottom Line: Not less than [1/4-inch- (6-mm-) diameter rope] [1/8-inch- (3-
mm-) diameter, galvanized or coated steel cable] <Insert description>.
3. Dowels: Not less than 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) diameter fiberglass or 1-inch- (25-mm-) diameter
wood. Provide two dowels per net threaded through each side hem sleeve for straightening
net side edges.
4. Net Antennas: 3/8-inch- (9.5-mm-) diameter, high-tensile-strength, extruded fiberglass or
plastic rods, 72 inches (1800 mm) long, extending above top hem band of net, with alternating
white and red bands according to competition rules. Provide two antennas per net.
a. Clamps: Designed to secure antenna to top and bottom of net.
5. Boundary Tape Markers: 2-inch- (50-mm-) wide white strip[ with sleeve for securing net
antenna], secured to net top and bottom with hook-and-loop attachment. Provide two tape
markers per net for marking court boundaries.
H. Net Tensioning System: Designed to adjust and hold tension of net. Fully enclosed, nonslip [worm-
gear] [rack-and-pinion] [ratchet] [manufacturer's standard]-type winch with cable length and
fittings for connecting to net lines, positive-release mechanism, and [permanently fixed]
[removable] [manufacturer's standard] handle. [Mount net tensioner on post standard at side
away from court. ]Provide end post with post top pulley. Provide opposing post with welded steel
loops, hooks, pins, or other devices for net attachment and post top grooved line guide.
I. Bottom Net Lock Tightener: Provide manufacturer's standard quick-release-type tension strap,
spring-loaded self-locking tensioner, turnbuckle, pulley, or other device and linkage fittings designed
to quickly and easily tighten bottom line or net.
J. Judges' Stands: Provide manufacturer's standard[ adjustable-height] units designed to be

[freestanding, folding for storage] [freestanding, folding for storage with wheels for
transporting] [attached to and supported by post standard]. Fabricate units of welded steel
tubing with finish and color to match post standards.
K. Safety Pads: [Comply with NCAA and NFHS requirements. ]Provide pads consisting of not
less than [1-inch- (25-mm-)] [1-1/4-inch- (32-mm-)] thick, multiple-impact-resistant [polyurethane]
[crosslinked or closed-cell polyethylene] [manufacturer's standard] foam filler covered by
puncture- and tear-resistant[, not less than 14-oz./sq. yd. (475-g/sq. m) PVC-coated polyester,
treated with fungicide for mildew resistance,] [, not less than 14-oz./sq. yd. (475-g/sq. m)
nylon-reinforced PVC] [, molded PVC] [, manufacturer's standard] <Insert other> fabric cover;
with fire-test-response characteristics indicated[, and lined with fire-retardant liner]. Provide pads
with hook-and-loop closure or attachments for the following components:
1. Post Standards: [Wraparound] [3- or 4-sided] style, designed to totally enclose each
standard to a height of not less than [66 inches (1680 mm)] [72 inches (1830 mm)]; 1 per
post.
2. Net Lines: Four per net.

3. Judges' Stands: Designed to totally enclose each unit.

4. Fabric Cover Flame-Resistance Ratings: [Passes NFPA 701] <Insert requirement for fire-
test-response characteristic>.
5. Fabric Color: [Match school colors] [As indicated by manufacturer's designations]
[Match Architect's samples] [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range].
6. Graphics: Custom graphics as indicated.
L. Post Standard Transporter: Manufacturer's standard wheeled unit designed for transporting a single
post.
M. Wall Storage Rack: Manufacturer's standard unit designed for mounting on walls and for storing
post standards in vertical position with retaining arms, fittings for padlock, and mounting hardware;
number of units as required to provide storage for specified equipment.
N. Storage Cart: Manufacturer's standard wheeled unit designed for transporting and storing volleyball
equipment and passing through 36-inch- (910-mm-) wide or wider door openings. Fabricate units of
welded steel tubing with heavy-duty casters, including not less than two swivel casters. Fabricate
wheels from materials that will not damage or mark floors; number of units as required to provide
transport and storage for specified equipment.
2.4 BADMINTON EQUIPMENT

3. Bison Inc.
6. Schelde North America.
7. Sports Imports.
D. General: Provide equipment complying with requirements in IBF's "The Laws of Badminton."
E. Floor Insert: Solid-brass floor plate with[ hinged] access cover and steel pipe sleeve with capped
bottom end; sized with ID to fit post standards, not less than [5-1/4 inches (133 mm) long] [length
required] to securely anchor pipe [in structural floor] [below finished floor in concrete footing]
[as indicated]; [one per post standard] [quantity as indicated].
F. Floor Insert Adaptor: Pipe sleeve adaptor to convert volleyball floor insert sleeve to fit badminton
post standard; [one per badminton post standard] [quantity as indicated].
G. Post Standards: Paired badminton post standards[ and center post standard for multicourt
play]. Designed for easy removal from permanently placed floor insert supports. Fabricated from
steel pipe or tubing, with plastic or rubber end cap or nonmarking floor bumper to protect permanent
flooring. Finished with manufacturer's standard factory-applied, baked powder-coat finish complying
with finish manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation including pretreatment,
application, baking, and minimum dry film thickness.

1. Nominal Pipe or Tubing Diameter: [1-1/2-inch (38-mm)] [2-3/8-inch (60-mm)] OD at base.

2. Net Height Setting: By preset net hooks.
3. Net Height Setting: By groove in post standard top and [cleat] [mechanism to adjust net
tension].
H. Net: Competition badminton net, 20 feet (6.1 m) long and as follows; [1 per pair of paired post
standards] [2 per every center post standard] <Insert requirements>:
1. Width and Mesh: 30 inches (760 mm) with 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) square mesh made of purple,
dark brown, or black nylon string.
a. Hem Band Edges: White, 3-inch- (75-mm-) wide top binding; purple, dark brown, or
black 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) wide bottom and side bindings; [tie offs at top, bottom, and
midpoints] [sleeve with dowel] eliminating gap at each side end of net; and not less
than 1/8-inch- (3-mm-) diameter rope, at least 42 feet (12.8 m) long, threaded through
top hem of binding. Provide lengths of lines and linkage fittings as required to properly
connect to and set up net for post standard spacing indicated on Drawings.
2.5 EXERCISE EQUIPMENT

1. Draper Inc.
D. General: Manufacturer's standard equipment wall-mounting board(s).
E. Pull-up Bar: Wall mounted.
1. Fixed height.
2. Adjustable Height: In 6-inch (150-mm) increments within a range of [18 inches (460 mm)]
[30 inches (760 mm)] <Insert dimension>.
3. Bar Length: Not less than [36 inches (910 mm)] [40 inches (1000 mm)] [As indicated].
4. Bar: Not less than 1-1/16-inch- (27-mm-) diameter, round, plated solid-steel bar.
5. Support Frame: Steel-angle end brackets attached to wood stringers or steel channels or
bars.
6. Bar Installation Height and Wall Clearance: [As indicated] <Insert height> at not less than
12 inches (300 mm) from wall.
F. Stall Bar: Wall mounted in a continuous row; each section with not less than 16 rungs.
1. Size: Each section [96 inches (2400 mm) high by 36 inches (910 mm) wide] [As
indicated].
2. Side Rails: Formed-steel tube uprights not less than 1-1/2 by 5 inches (38 by 125 mm) with
capped ends; nominal sheet thickness not less than 0.0598 inch (1.52 mm).

3. Rungs: Not less than 1-3/8-inch- (35-mm-) diameter, round rungs made from [hardwood]
[maple] firmly fixed to side rails to prevent rotating or other movement. Provide equipment
with top rung extended 6 inches (150 mm) beyond other rungs.
4. Extension Arm: Provide equipment with an extension arm and an additional rung extended
20 inches (500 mm) beyond bottom and intermediate rungs.
5. Number of Sections: [As indicated] <Insert number> modular sections, complete with
intermediate uprights and terminal uprights without rung holes at finished ends.
G. Horizontal Ladder: Wall mounted; with 12 rungs.
1. Size: [12 feet (3.7 m) long by not less than 16 inches (400 mm) wide] [As indicated].
2. Side Rails: Steel tubing not less than 1-1/2 by 4 inches (38 by 102 mm) with capped ends;
tubing wall thickness not less than 0.083 inch (2.1 mm).
3. Rungs: Not less than 1-5/16-inch- (33-mm-) diameter, round rungs made from [hardwood]
[maple] firmly fixed to side rails to prevent rotating or other movement.
4. Support Frame: Not less than 1-5/16-inch- (33-mm-) OD, steel pipe or tubing; with bracing.
5. Ladder Installation Height and Wall Clearance: [As indicated] <Insert height> at 30 inches
(760 mm) from wall.
H. Vertical Ladder: Wall mounted; with five to seven horizontal rungs for hand and foot holds.
1. Size: [60 inches (1500 mm) long by not less than 22 inches (560 mm) wide] [As
indicated].
2. Side Rails: Not less than 1-5/16-inch- (33-mm-) OD, round pipe or tubing with rails sloped 10
degrees from wall for climbing.
3. Rungs: Not less than 1-1/16-inch- (27-mm-) OD, round pipe or tubing rungs firmly welded to
side rails.
4. Ladder Installation Height: [As indicated] <Insert dimension>.
5. Ladder Installation Method: [Fixed to wall] [Removable].
I. Pegged Board Vertical Climber: Wall-mounted board; size as indicated; with [two] <Insert
number> peg hand holds per board.
J. Climbing Rope: 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) diameter rope; with top end securely clamped in fitting
designed for attaching to supporting structure indicated.
1. Description: [Three-strand hemp] [Synthetic polyfiber] [Manufacturer's standard

material].
2. Length: [12 feet (3.7 m)] [16 feet (4.9 m)] [20 feet (6 m)] [24 feet (7.3 m)] [Length as
required to allow 42 inches (1067 mm) of rope to lie on floor] [As indicated].
3. Rope Bottom End: [Tied in a turk knot] [Tied in a turk knot and fitted with leather sheath]
[Fitted with heat-shrink-type PVC tube and coated with PVC coating after fitting]
[Manufacturer's standard].
4. Rubber Balls: Securely fastened every [12 inches (300 mm)] [18 inches (460 mm)] along
length of rope.
5. Tambourine: 24-inch (600-mm) diameter; not less than 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) thick, painted
plywood disk for restricting climbing and for exercise competition.
6. Safety Guard: 3/16-inch (5-mm-) support chain or 1/8-inch- (3-mm-) diameter cable, clamp,
and fittings designed for attaching guard to supporting structure indicated.
7. Pipe Beam: [Ceiling] [Wall and ceiling] mounted; not less than 3-1/2-inch- (89-mm-) OD
steel pipe or tubing beam with not less than 2-3/8-inch- (60-mm-) OD drop pipes, bracing, and
connectors designed for transferring load and securely attaching to supporting structure
indicated.
K. Rope Hoist: Wall attached; consisting of #10 bell cord or 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) diameter, synthetic
polyfiber rope, snap swivel fitting, rope adjuster, rope weight, weight bag, pulley, rope cleat, clear-
finished wood wall equipment pads for pulley and cleat attachment, clamps, and fasteners.

L. Metal Finish: Manufacturer's standard factory-applied, baked powder-coat finish.
M. Wood Finish: Manufacturer's standard transparent or opaque-painted finish.
2.6 SAFETY PADS

2. ADP Lemco Inc.
3. American Athletic, Inc.
4. Draper Inc.
5. Institutional Products Inc.
D. Safety Pad Surface-Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84 by UL or another testing and inspecting

agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction:
1. Flame-Spread Index: [25 or less] [26 to 75] [76 to 200].

2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.
E. Pad Coverings: Provide safety pad fabric covering fabricated from puncture- and tear-resistant, not
less than 14-oz./sq. yd (475-g/sq. m) PVC-coated polyester or nylon-reinforced PVC fabric treated
with fungicide for mildew resistance; with surface-burning characteristics indicated[, and lined with
fire-retardant liner].
F. Wall Safety Pads: Padded wall wainscot panels designed to be attached in a continuous row; each
panel section consisting of fill laminated to backer board with visible surfaces fully covered by
seamless fabric covering, free of sag and wrinkles and firmly attached to back of backer board.
1. Backer Board: Not less than 3/8-inch- (9.5-mm-) thick [plywood, mat formed, or composite
panel] [fire-retardant-treated plywood per AWPA C27, Interior Type A].
2. Fill: Multiple-impact-resistant foam not less than [1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) thick polyurethane,
3.5-lb/cu. ft. (56-kg/cu. m) density] [2-inch- (50-mm-) thick polyurethane, 3.5-lb/cu. ft.
(56-kg/cu. m) density] [1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) thick bonded polyurethane, 6.0-lb/cu. ft. (96-
kg/cu. m) density] [2-inch- (50-mm-) thick bonded polyurethane, 6.0-lb/cu. ft. (96-lb/cu.
ft. (96-kg/cu. m) density] [1-1/4-inch- (32-mm-) thick, closed-cell polyethylene] <Insert
material thickness, material, and density>.
3. Fire-Resistive Fill: Multiple-impact-resistant foam not less than [1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) thick
fire-resistive neoprene, 6.0-lb/cu. ft. (96-kg/cu. m) density] [2-inch- (50-mm-) thick fire-
resistive neoprene, 6.0-lb/cu. ft. (96-kg/cu. m) density].
4. Size: Each panel section, [24 inches (600 mm) wide by not less than 60 inches (1520
mm) long] [24 inches (600 mm) wide by not less than 72 inches (1800 mm) long]
[manufacturer's standard dimensions] [as indicated].
5. Number of Panel Sections: [As indicated] <Insert number> modular panel sections.
6. Installation Method: [Concealed mounting Z-clips] [Concealed mounting Z-clips and 1-
inch (25-mm) bottom fabric attachment flange with exposed fasteners] [1-inch (25-mm)

top and bottom fabric attachment flange with exposed fasteners] [Manufacturer's
standard].
7. Fabric Covering Color(s): [Match school colors] [As indicated by manufacturer's
designations] [Match Architect's samples] [As selected by Architect from
manufacturer's full range] for [one] [two] <Insert number> color(s).
8. Graphics: Custom graphics as indicated.
G. Corner Wall Safety Pads: Wall corner pad consisting of not less than 1-1/4-inch- (32-mm-) thick,
multiple-impact-resistant, closed-cell polyethylene-foam filler, covered on both sides and all edges
by fabric covering with [backer board and manufacturer's standard anchorage to wall] [self-
adhesive, hook-and-loop attachment to exposed face of wall].
1. Length: Each pad [not less than 72 inches (1800 mm)] [in manufacturer's standard
length] [matching length of wall safety pads] [as indicated].
2. Fabric Covering Color(s): [Match color of wall safety pads] [Match school colors] [As
indicated by manufacturer's designations] [Match Architect's samples] [As selected by
Architect from manufacturer's full range] for [one] [two] <Insert number> color(s).
H. Column Safety Pads: Pads covering exposed flange of columns to height indicated, consisting of
not less than 1-1/4-inch- (32-mm-) thick, multiple-impact-resistant, closed-cell polyethylene-foam
filler, covered on both sides and all edges by fabric covering with [backer board and
manufacturer's standard anchorage to column] [self-adhesive, hook-and-loop attachment to
exposed face of column].
length] [matching length of wall safety pads] [as indicated].
I. Round Column Safety Pads: Wraparound pads [fully] [partially] covering exposed round column to
height indicated, consisting of not less than 2-inch- (50-mm-) thick, multiple-impact-resistant, bonded
polyurethane-foam filler, 6.0-lb/cu. ft (96-kg/cu. m) density, covered on both sides and all edges by
fabric covering with [hook-and-loop] [cord lace and grommet] attachment to column.
length] [as indicated].
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements
for play court layout, alignment of mounting substrates, installation tolerances, operational
clearances,[ accurate locations of connections to building electrical system,] and other
conditions affecting performance.
1. Verify critical dimensions.

2. Examine supporting structure and [subgrades, ]subfloors and footings below finished floor.
3. Examine wall assemblies, where reinforced to receive anchors and fasteners, to verify that
locations of concealed reinforcements have been clearly marked. Locate reinforcements and
mark locations.

A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions[ and competition rules
indicated for each type of gymnasium equipment]. Complete equipment field assembly, where
required.
B. Unless otherwise indicated, install gymnasium equipment after other finishing operations, including
painting, have been completed.
C. Permanently Placed Gymnasium Equipment and Components: Rigid, level, plumb, square, and
true; anchored securely to supporting structure; positioned at locations and elevations indicated on
Shop Drawings; in proper relation to adjacent construction; and aligned with court layout.
1. Floor Insert Location: Coordinate location with application of game lines and markers[, and
core drill floor for inserts after game lines have been applied].
2. Floor Insert Elevation: Coordinate installed heights of floor insert with installation[ and field
finishing] of finish flooring and type of floor plate.
3. Operating Gymnasium Equipment: Verify clearances for movable components of gymnasium
equipment throughout entire range of operation and for access to operating components.
D. Floor Insert Setting: Position sleeve in oversized, recessed voids in concrete [slabs] [and]
[footings]. Clean voids of debris. Fill void around sleeves with grout, mixed and placed to comply
with grout manufacturer's written instructions. Protect portion of sleeve above subfloor[ and
footing] from splatter. Verify that sleeves are set plumb, aligned, and at correct height and spacing;
hold in position during placement and finishing operations until grout is sufficiently cured. Set insert
so top surface of completed unit is flush with finished flooring surface.
E. [Wall] [Corner] [Column] Safety Pads: Mount with bottom edge at [4 inches (102 mm)]
[dimension indicated on Drawings] <Insert dimension> above finished floor.
F. Anchoring to In-Place Construction: Use anchors and fasteners where necessary for securing built-
in and permanently placed gymnasium equipment to structural support and for properly transferring
load to in-place construction.
G. Connections: Connect automatic operators to building electrical system.
H. Removable Gymnasium Equipment and Components: Assemble in place to verify that equipment
and components are complete and in proper working order. Instruct Owner's designated personnel
in properly handling, assembling, adjusting, disassembling, transporting, storing, and maintaining
units. Disassemble removable gymnasium equipment after assembled configuration has been
approved by [Architect] [Owner], and store units in location indicated on Drawings.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust movable components of gymnasium equipment to operate safely, smoothly, easily, and
quietly, free from binding, warp, distortion, nonalignment, misplacement, disruption, or malfunction,
throughout entire operational range. Lubricate hardware and moving parts.
3.4 CLEANING
A. After completing gymnasium equipment installation, inspect components. Remove spots, dirt, and
debris and touch up damaged shop-applied finishes according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Replace gymnasium equipment and finishes that cannot be cleaned and repaired, in a manner
approved by Architect, before time of Substantial Completion.

3.5 DEMONSTRATION

adjust, operate, and maintain gymnasium equipment. Refer to Division 1 Section "Demonstration
and Training."

SUBJECT: SECTION 13100- LIGHTNING PROTECTION
SECTION 13100
LIGHTNING PROTECTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes lightning protection for building and elements.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For air terminals and mounting accessories indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail lightning protection system, including air-terminal locations, conductor routing
and connections, and bonding and grounding provisions. Include indications for use of raceway and
data on how concealment requirements will be met.
C. Qualification data.
D. Certification, signed by Contractor, that roof adhesive for air terminals is approved by manufacturers of
both the terminal assembly and the single-ply membrane roofing material.
E. Field inspection reports indicating compliance with specified requirements.
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who is NRTL listed or who is certified by LPI
as a Master Installer/Designer.
B. Listing and Labeling: As defined in NFPA 780, "Definitions" Article.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

1. Furse.
2.2 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM COMPONENTS
A. Comply with UL 96.
B. Roof-Mounting Air Terminals: NFPA Class I, copper, flat, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Ground Rods, Ground Loop Conductors, and Concrete-Encased Electrodes: Comply with Division 16
Section "Grounding and Bonding" and with standards referenced in this Section.
MHA – TECH. SPECIFICATION – 1706 – 04/02/2015 SECTION 13100 – LIGHTNING PROTECTION 1/2
SUBJECT: SECTION 13100- LIGHTNING PROTECTION
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install lightning protection components and systems according to NFPA 780.
B. Install conductors with direct paths from air terminals to ground connections. Avoid sharp bends and
narrow loops.
C. Conceal the following conductors:
1. System conductors.
2. Down conductors.
3. Interior conductors.
4. Conductors within normal view from exterior locations at grade within 200 feet (60 m) of
building.
5. Notify Architect at least 48 hours in advance of inspection before concealing lightning protection
components.
D. Air Terminals on Single-Ply Membrane Roofing: Comply with adhesive manufacturer's written
instructions.
E. Bond extremities of vertical metal bodies exceeding 60 feet (18 m) in length to lightning protection
components.
F. A counterpoise installation based on requirements in Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding"

may be used as a ground loop required by NFPA 780, provided counterpoise conductor meets or
exceeds minimum requirements in NFPA 780.
1. Bond ground terminals to counterpoise conductor.

2. Bond grounded metal bodies on building within 12 feet (3.6 m) of ground to counterpoise
conductor.
G. Bond lightning protection components with intermediate-level interconnection loop conductors to

grounded metal bodies of building at 60-foot (18-m) intervals.
3.2 CORROSION PROTECTION
A. Do not combine materials that can form an electrolytic couple that will accelerate corrosion in the
presence of moisture unless moisture is permanently excluded from junction of such materials.
B. Use conductors with protective coatings where conditions would cause deterioration or corrosion of
conductors.
A. UL Inspection: Provide inspections as required to obtain a UL Master Label for system.
B. Provide an inspection by an inspector certified by LPI to obtain an LPI certification.
MHA – TECH. SPECIFICATION – 1706 – 04/02/2015 SECTION 13100 – LIGHTNING PROTECTION 2/2
SUBJECT: SECTION 14210 – ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS
SECTION 14210
ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes electric traction [passenger] [and] [service] elevators.
1. Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for setting sleeves, inserts, and anchoring devices
in concrete.
2. Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies" for setting sleeves, inserts, and anchoring
devices in masonry and for grouting elevator entrance frames installed in masonry walls.
3. Division 5 Section "Structural Steel" for the following:
a. Attachment plates, angle brackets, and other preparation of structural steel for fastening
guide-rail brackets.
b. Machine beams.
c. Divider beams.
d. Hoist beams.
e. Structural-steel shapes for sub-sills that are part of steel frame.
4. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for the following:
a. Attachment plates and angle brackets for supporting guide-rail brackets.

b. Machine beams.
c. Weld plates for anchoring elevator machine to machine room floor slab.
d. Divider beams.
e. Hoist beams.
f. Structural-steel shapes for sub-sills.
g. Pit ladders.
h. Cants in hoistways made from steel sheet.
5. Division 5 Section "Pipe and Tube Railings" for railings between adjacent elevator pits.
6. Division 5 Section "Ornamental Metal" for combination units that contain hall push-button
stations.
7. Division 9 painting Sections for field painting of hoistway entrance doors and frames.
8. Division 9 Section for finish flooring in elevator cars.
9. Division 10 Section "Wire Mesh Partitions" for guards between adjacent elevators pits.
10. Division 13 Section "Security Access" for security access system equipment used to restrict
elevator use.
MHA-TECH. SPECIFICATIONS- 1706 - 04/02/2015 SECTION 14210 – ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS 1 / 17

11. Division 13 Section "Fire Alarm" for smoke detectors in elevator lobbies to initiate emergency
recall operation [and heat detectors in shafts and machine rooms to disconnect power
from elevator equipment before sprinkler activation] and for connection to elevator
controllers.
12. Division 14 Section "Electric Traction Freight Elevators" for electric traction elevators used
primarily for carrying freight and not accessible to the general public.
13. Division 16 Sections for electrical service for elevators to and including [fused] disconnect
switches at machine room door [and standby power source, transfer switch, and
connection from auxiliary contacts in transfer switch to controller].
14. Division 16 Section "Voice and Data Communication Cabling" for telephone service for
elevators.
C. Allowances: Provide finished passenger [and service] elevator cars under the Elevator Car
Allowance specified in Division 1 Section "Allowances." Allowance includes furnishing and installing
the following:
1. Car wall finishes including trim.

2. Car floor finishes.
3. Car ceiling finishes.
4. Car door finishes.
5. Car door sills.
6. Car light fixtures.
7. Handrails.
8. Cutouts and other provisions for installing elevator signal equipment in cars.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Definitions in ASME A17.1 apply to work of this Section.
B. Defective Elevator Work: Operation or control system failure, including excessive malfunctions;
performances below specified ratings; excessive wear; unusual deterioration or aging of materials or
finishes; unsafe conditions; need for excessive maintenance; abnormal noise or vibration; and similar
unusual, unexpected, and unsatisfactory conditions.
C. Service Elevator: A passenger elevator that is also used to carry freight.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include capacities, sizes, performances, operations, safety features, finishes, and
similar information. Include product data for the following:
1. Car enclosures and hoistway entrances.

2. Operation, control, and signal systems.
B. Shop Drawings: Show plans, elevations, sections, and large-scale details indicating service at each
landing, machine room layout, coordination with building structure, relationships with other
construction, and locations of equipment and signals. Include large-scale layout of car control station
[and standby power operation control panel]. Indicate variations from specified requirements,
maximum dynamic and static loads imposed on building structure at points of support, and maximum
and average power demands.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For finishes involving color selection.
D. Samples for Verification: For exposed finishes of cars, hoistway doors and frames, and signal
equipment; 3-inch- (75-mm-) square Samples of sheet materials; and 4-inch (100-mm) lengths of
running trim members.
E. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by elevator manufacturer certifying that hoistway, pit, and machine
room layout and dimensions, as shown on Drawings, and electrical service, as shown and specified,
are adequate for elevator system being provided.
F. Qualification Data: For Installer.
G. Operation and Maintenance Data: For elevators to include in emergency, operation, and
maintenance manuals.
1. In addition to items specified in Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include
diagnostic and repair information available to manufacturer's and Installer's maintenance
personnel.
H. Inspection and Acceptance Certificates and Operating Permits: As required by authorities having
jurisdiction for normal, unrestricted elevator use.
I. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.
J. Continuing Maintenance Proposal: Service agreement specified in this Section.
A. Installer Qualifications: Elevator manufacturer [or manufacturer's authorized representative who

is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project].
B. Source Limitations: Obtain elevators, [including hydraulic passenger elevators specified in

another Division 14 Section,] through one source from a single manufacturer.
1. Provide major elevator components, including driving machines, controllers, signal fixtures,
door operators, car frames, cabs, and entrances, manufactured by a single manufacturer.
C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with ASME A17.1 [and elevator design requirements for
earthquake loads in ASCE 7].
1. Effective peak velocity acceleration (Av) for Project's location is [less than 0.10 (seismic risk
zones 0 and 1)] [greater than or equal to 0.10, but less than 0.20 (seismic risk zone 2)]
[greater than or equal to 0.20 (seismic risk zones 3 and 4)].
2. Provide earthquake equipment required by ASME A17.1.
3. Design earthquake spectral response acceleration, short period (Sds) for Project is <Insert
value>.
4. Project's seismic design category is [A] [B] [C] [D].
5. Elevator importance factor is [1.5] [1.0].
D. Accessibility Requirements: Comply with Section [4.10 in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation
Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines
for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)."] [407 in ICC A117.1.]

E. Fire-Rated Hoistway Entrance Assemblies: Door and frame assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that
are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at as close to neutral pressure as possible
according to [NFPA 252] [UBC Standard 7-2] [or] [UL 10B].
A. Deliver, store, and handle materials, components, and equipment in manufacturer's protective
packaging.
B. Store materials, components, and equipment off of ground, under cover, and in a dry location. Handle
according to manufacturer's written recommendations to prevent damage, deterioration, or soiling.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of sleeves, block outs, elevator equipment with integral anchors, and other
items that are embedded in concrete or masonry for elevator equipment. Furnish templates, sleeves,
elevator equipment with integral anchors, and installation instructions and deliver to Project site in
time for installation.
B. Coordinate sequence of elevator installation with other work to avoid delaying the Work.
C. Coordinate locations and dimensions of other work relating to electric traction elevators including pit
ladders, sumps, and floor drains in pits; entrance sub-sills; [machine beams]; and electrical service,
electrical outlets, lights, and switches in pits and [machine rooms] [hoistways].
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to

repair, restore, or replace defective elevator work within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: [One year] from date of Substantial Completion.
1.9 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide [one year] full
maintenance service by skilled employees of elevator Installer. Include monthly preventive
maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and
adjusting as required for proper elevator operation at rated speed and capacity. Provide parts and
supplies same as those used in the manufacture and installation of original equipment.
1. Perform maintenance, including emergency callback service, during normal working hours.
2. Include 24-hour-per-day, 7-day-per-week emergency callback service.
a. Response Time: Two hours or less.
B. Continuing Maintenance Proposal: Provide a continuing maintenance proposal from Installer to

Owner, in the form of a standard [one-year] [two-years] [five-years] maintenance agreement,

starting on date initial maintenance service is concluded. State services, obligations, conditions, and
terms for agreement period and for future renewal options.
C. Continuing Maintenance Proposal: Provide a continuing maintenance proposal from Installer to

Owner with terms, conditions, and obligations as set forth in, and in same form as, "Draft of Elevator
Maintenance Agreement" at end of this Section, starting on date initial maintenance service is
concluded.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

1. Fujitec KSA Inc.

2. KONE Inc.
3. Otis Elevator Co.
4. Schindler Elevator Corp.
5. ThyssenKrupp Elevator.
6. Mitsubishi Elevators (Mitsubishi Electric Saudi Ltd.)
2.2 SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard elevator systems. Where components are not otherwise
indicated, provide standard components published by manufacturer as included in standard pre-
engineered elevator systems and as required for complete system.
B. Elevator Machines: [Provide variable-voltage, variable-frequency, ac-type hoisting machines]

[At manufacturer's option, provide either variable-voltage, variable-frequency, ac-type or
variable-voltage, dc-type hoisting machines]. Provide solid-state power converters.
1. Provide [regenerative] [or] [non-regenerative] system.

2. Limit total harmonic distortion of regenerated power to 5 percent per IEEE 519.
3. Provide means for absorbing regenerated power when elevator system is operating on standby
power.
4. Provide line filters or chokes to prevent electrical peaks or spikes from feeding back into
building power system.
C. Fluid for Oil Buffers: If oil buffers are used, use only fire-resistant hydraulic fluid containing
antioxidant, anticorrosive, antifoaming, and metal-passivating additives.
1. Available Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, a product that may be

incorporated into the Work includes, but is not limited to, "Hydro Safe (FR)" by Hydro Safe Oil
Division, Inc.

D. Inserts: Furnish required concrete and masonry inserts and similar anchorage devices for installing
guide rails, machinery, and other components of elevator work where installation of devices is
specified in another Section.
E. Machine Beams: Provide framing to support elevator hoisting machine and deflector sheaves from
the building structure. Comply with Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for materials and
fabrication.
F. Car Frame and Platform: Welded steel units.
G. Guides: Provide roller guides [or polymer-coated, non-lubricated sliding guides] at top and
bottom of car and counterweight frames.
2.3 OPERATION SYSTEMS
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard microprocessor operation system [for each elevator] [for
each group of elevators] as required to provide type of operation system indicated.
B. Group Automatic Operation with Demand-Based Dispatching: Provide [reprogrammable] group

automatic system that assigns cars to hall calls based on a dispatching program designed to minimize
passenger waiting time. System automatically adjusts to changes in demand for different traffic
conditions including heavy incoming, heavy two-way, heavy outgoing, and light off-hours as variations
of normal two-way traffic.

a. Fujitec America, Inc.; Millennium.

b. KONE Inc.; KCM 831.
c. Otis Elevator Co.; Elevonic.
d. Schindler Elevator Corp.; Miconic TX.
e. ThyssenKrupp Elevator; Traflomatic.
f. Mitsubishi Elevators (Mitsubishi Electric Saudi Ltd.)
C. Destination-Based Group Automatic Operation: Provide reprogrammable group automatic system

that assigns elevators leaving the main lobby in the up direction to a selected group of floors and
directs passengers to an elevator serving their destination floor. System dispatches cars in a
regulated sequence for optimum system efficiency; dispatch is based on origin and destination of
calls. System automatically adjusts to changes in demand for different traffic conditions including
heavy incoming, heavy two-way, heavy outgoing, and light off-hours as variations of normal two-way
traffic.

a. Otis Elevator Co.; Elevonic with Channeling Operation.

b. Schindler Elevator Corp.; Miconic 10.
c. ThyssenKrupp Elevator; TAC50 with Destination Dispatch.
d. Mitsubishi Elevators (Mitsubishi Electric Saudi Ltd.)

D. [Single-Car] Auxiliary Operations: In addition to primary operation system features, provide the
following operational features for elevators where indicated:
1. Standby Power Operation: On activation of standby power, car is returned to a designated

floor and parked with doors open. Car can be manually put in service on standby power, either
for return operation or for regular operation, by switches in control panel located at [main
lobby] [fire command station]. Manual operation causes automatic operation to cease.
2. Standby Powered Lowering: On activation of standby power, if car is at a floor, it remains at
that floor, opens its doors, and shuts down. If car is between floors, it is lowered to the next
floor below, opens its doors, and shuts down.
3. Battery-Powered Lowering: If power fails and car is at a floor, it remains at that floor, opens its
doors, and shuts down. If car is between floors, it is lowered to the next floor below, opens its
doors, and shuts down. System includes rechargeable battery and automatic recharging
system.
4. Automatic Dispatching of Loaded Car: When car load exceeds 80 percent of rated capacity,
doors will begin closing.
5. Nuisance Call Cancel: When car calls exceed a preset number while car load is less than a
predetermined weight, all car calls are canceled. Preset number of calls [and predetermined
weight] can be adjusted.
E. Group Auxiliary Operations: In addition to primary operation system features, provide the following
operational features for elevators and elevator groups where indicated:
1. Standby Power Operation: On activation of standby power, cars are returned to a designated
floor and parked with doors open. One car is returned at a time, with priority given to loaded
cars. If a car cannot be returned after two attempts, it is removed from the system. When all
cars have been returned or removed from the system, one car is automatically placed in
service. If car selected for service cannot operate within 60 seconds, the system removes car
from service and places another car in service. Cars can be manually put in service on standby
power, either for return operation or for regular operation, by switches in control panel located
at [main lobby] [fire command station]. Manual operation causes automatic operation to
cease.
2. Standby Power Operation: On activation of standby power, cars are returned, one at a time, to
a designated floor and parked with doors open. If a car cannot be returned, it is removed from
the system. When all cars have been returned or removed from the system, one car can be put
in service on standby power by a selector switch in control panel located at [main lobby] [fire
command station].
3. Battery-Powered Lowering: If power fails, cars that are at a floor remain at that floor, open their
doors, and shut down. Cars that are between floors are lowered one at a time to the next floor
below, open their doors, and shut down. System includes rechargeable battery and automatic
recharging system.
4. Automatic Dispatching of Loaded Car: When car load exceeds 80 percent of rated capacity,
doors will begin closing.
5. Nuisance Call Cancel: When car calls exceed a preset number while the car load is less than a
predetermined weight, all car calls are canceled. Preset number of calls [and predetermined
weight] can be adjusted.
6. [Emergency Hospital] [Priority] Service: Service is initiated by a [keyswitch] [card reader]
[remote switch] at designated floors. One elevator is removed from group operation and
directed to the floor where service was initiated. On arriving at the floor, elevator opens its
doors and parks [and a lighted sign directs passengers to exit elevator]. Car is placed in
operation by selecting a floor and pressing door close button or by operating keyswitch to put
car in independent service. After responding to floor selected or being removed from
independent service, car is returned to group operation. If car is not placed in operation within
a preset time after being called, it is returned to group operation.

7. Independent Service: Keyswitch in car control station removes car from group operation and
allows it to respond only to car calls. Key cannot be removed from keyswitch when car is in
independent service. When in independent service, doors close only in response to door close
button.
8. Loaded-Car Bypass: When car load exceeds 80 percent of rated capacity, car will respond
only to car calls, not to hall calls.
9. Distributed Parking: When cars are not required for response to calls, they are parked with
doors closed, distributed in predetermined zones throughout the building. One zone shall
include the main floor and adjacent floors; remaining floors shall be divided into approximately
equal zones.
F. Security Features: Provide the following security features, where indicated. Security features shall
not affect emergency firefighters' service.
1. Card-Reader Operation: System uses card readers at [car control stations] [and] [hall push-
button stations] to authorize calls. Security system determines which landings and at what
times calls require authorization by card reader. Provide required conductors in traveling cable
and panel in machine room for interconnecting card readers, other security access system
equipment, and elevator controllers. [Allow space as indicated for card reader in car]
[Provide stripe-swipe card reader integral with each car control station].
a. Security access system equipment is specified in Division 13 Section "Security Access."

b. Security access system equipment is not in the Contract.
2. Keyswitch Operation: Push buttons are activated and deactivated by security keyswitches at
[car control stations] [and] [hall push-button stations]. Key is removable only in deactivated
position.
3. Keypad Operation: Allows each landing to be restricted or unrestricted. When a restricted
landing button is pressed, a "Restricted Floor" lamp lights and remains lit until landing access
code has been entered into a keypad or predetermined time period has elapsed. Car calls for
restricted landings do not register until landing access code is entered into keypad within
predetermined time period after landing button is pressed.
a. Access codes are programmed at each car operating panel using a security keyswitch.
Keypad operation can be activated and deactivated by security keyswitch at main
landing.
4. Car-to-Lobby Feature: Feature, activated by keyswitch at main lobby that causes [car] [all cars
in a group] to return immediately to lobby and open doors for inspection. On deactivation by
keyswitch, calls registered before keyswitch activation is completed and normal operation is
resumed.
2.4 DOOR REOPENING DEVICES
A. Infrared Array: Provide door reopening devices with uniform array of 36 or more microprocessor-
controlled, infrared light beams projecting across car entrance. Interruption of one or more of the light
beams shall cause doors to stop and reopen.
B. Nudging Feature: After car doors are prevented from closing for predetermined adjustable time,
through activating door reopening device, a loud buzzer shall sound and doors shall begin to close at
reduced kinetic energy.

2.5 FINISH MATERIALS
A. General: Provide the following materials for exposed parts of elevator car enclosures, car doors,
hoistway entrance doors and frames, and signal equipment as indicated.
B. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, commercial steel, Type B, exposed, matte finish.
C. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, commercial steel, Type B, pickled.
D. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304.
1. Textured Stainless-Steel Sheet: Product with [coined] [embossed] texture rolled into exposed
surface.
a. Available Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, a product that may be

incorporated into the Work includes, but is not limited to, "<Insert product name>" by
<Insert manufacturer's name>.
b. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "<Insert product name>" by
<Insert manufacturer's name>.
c. Metal surface is [satin polished] [satin relieved] [titanium nitride colored] [oxide
colored] [satin polished and titanium nitride colored] [satin relieved and titanium
nitride colored] [satin polished and oxide colored] [satin relieved and oxide
colored] [color coated and satin relieved] [color coated and bright relieved] after
rolling.
E. Stainless-Steel Bars: ASTM A 276, Type 304.
F. Stainless-Steel Tubing: ASTM A 554, Grade MT 304.
G. Bronze Plate and Sheet: ASTM B 36/B 36M, Alloy UNS No. C28000 (muntz metal).
H. Bronze Extrusions: ASTM B 455, Alloy UNS No. C38500 (architectural bronze).
I. Bronze Tubing: ASTM B 135 (ASTM B 135M), Alloy UNS No. C23000 (red brass, 85 percent
copper).
J. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063.
K. Nickel Silver Extrusions: ASTM B 151/B 151M, Alloy UNS No. C74500 or No. C77600.
L. Plastic Laminate: High-pressure type complying with NEMA LD 3, [Type HGS for flat applications]
[Type HGL for flat applications] [Type HGP for post formed applications] [and] [Type BKV for
panel backing].
2.6 CAR ENCLOSURES
A. General: Provide [enameled-steel car enclosures to receive removable] [steel-framed car

enclosures with non-removable] wall panels, with [removable] car roof, access doors, power door
operators, and ventilation.
1. Provide standard railings complying with ASME A17.1 on car tops where required by
ASME A17.1.

2. Provide finished car including materials and finishes specified below.

3. Refer to "Allowances" Paragraph in Part 1 "Summary" Article for items to be provided under the
Elevator Car Allowance. Provide items not included in the Elevator Car Allowance as needed
for finished car [including materials and finishes specified below].
B. Materials and Finishes: Provide manufacturer's standards, but not less than the following:
1. Subfloor: Underlayment grade, exterior plywood, 5/8-inch (16-mm) nominal thickness.

2. Floor Finish: [Specified in a Division 9 Section] [Elevator manufacturer's standard level-
loop nylon carpet; color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range].
3. Enameled-Steel Wall Panels: Flush hollow-metal construction; fabricated from cold-rolled steel
sheet. Provide with factory-applied enamel finish; colors as selected by Architect from
manufacturer's full range.
4. Stainless-Steel Wall Panels: Flush hollow-metal construction; fabricated from stainless-steel
sheet.
5. Bronze Wall Panels: Flush hollow-metal construction; fabricated from bronze sheet.
6. Plastic-Laminate Wall Panels: Plastic laminate adhesively applied to [1/2-inch (13-mm) fire-
retardant-treated particleboard] [manufacturer's standard honeycomb core] with [plastic-
laminate panel backing and] manufacturer's standard protective edge trim. Panels have a
flame-spread index of [25] [75] or less, when tested according to ASTM E 84. Plastic-laminate
color, texture, and pattern as selected by Architect from [plastic-laminate] [elevator]
7. Fabricate car with recesses and cutouts for signal equipment.
8. Fabricate car door frame integrally with front wall of car.
9. Enameled-Steel Doors: Flush hollow-metal construction; fabricated from cold-rolled steel
sheet. Provide with factory-applied enamel finish; colors as selected by Architect from
10. Stainless-Steel Doors: Flush, hollow-metal construction; fabricated [from stainless-steel
sheet] [or] [by laminating stainless-steel sheet to exposed faces and edges of enameled
cold-rolled steel doors using adhesive that fully bonds metal to metal without
telegraphing or oil-canning].
11. Bronze Doors: Flush, hollow-metal construction; fabricated by laminating bronze sheet to
exposed faces and edges of enameled cold-rolled steel doors using adhesive that fully bonds
metal to metal without telegraphing or oil-canning.
12. Plastic-Laminate Doors: Flush, hollow-metal construction; fabricated by laminating plastic
laminate to exposed faces of enameled cold-rolled steel doors and covering edges with
protective edge trim[ matching return panels]. Plastic-laminate color, texture, and pattern as
selected by Architect from [plastic-laminate] [elevator] manufacturer's full range.
13. Sight Guards: Provide sight guards on car doors.
14. Sills: Extruded metal, with grooved surface, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) thick.
15. Luminous Ceiling: Fluorescent light fixtures and ceiling panels of translucent acrylic or other
permanent rigid plastic.
16. [Metal] [Metallic-Finish, Plastic-Laminate] Ceiling: Flush panels, with [incandescent
downlights in the center of] [four low-voltage downlights in] each panel. [Align ceiling
panel joints with joints between wall panels].
17. Handrails: Manufacturer's standard handrails, of shape, metal, and finish indicated.
2.7 HOISTWAY ENTRANCES
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard horizontal-sliding, door-and-frame hoistway entrances

complete with track systems, hardware, sills, and accessories. Provide frame size and profile to
coordinate with hoistway wall construction.

1. Where gypsum board wall construction is indicated, provide self-supporting frames with
reinforced head sections.
B. Materials and Fabrication: Provide manufacturer's standards, but not less than the following:
1. Enameled-Steel Frames: Formed from cold-rolled or hot-rolled steel sheet. Provide with
factory-applied enamel finish; colors as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2. Steel Sub-frames: Formed from cold-rolled or hot-rolled steel sheet with factory-applied
enamel finish or corrosion-inhibiting primer. Fabricate to receive applied finish as indicated.
3. Stainless-Steel Frames: Formed from stainless-steel sheet.
4. Bronze Frames: Formed from cold-rolled or hot-rolled steel sheet, with enamel finish, and with
formed-bronze sheet laminated to steel frames using adhesive that fully bonds metal to metal
without telegraphing or oil-canning.
5. Enameled-Steel Doors [and Transoms]: Flush hollow-metal construction; fabricated from cold-
rolled steel sheet. Provide with factory-applied enamel finish; colors as selected by Architect
from manufacturer's full range.
6. Stainless-Steel Doors [and Transoms]: Flush, hollow-metal construction; fabricated [from
stainless-steel sheet] [or] [by laminating stainless-steel sheet to exposed faces and
edges of enameled cold-rolled steel doors using adhesive that fully bonds metal to metal
without telegraphing or oil-canning].
7. Bronze Doors [and Transoms]: Flush, hollow-metal construction; fabricated by laminating
bronze sheet to exposed faces and edges of enameled cold-rolled steel doors using adhesive
that fully bonds metal to metal without telegraphing or oil-canning.
8. Plastic-Laminate Doors [and Transoms]: Flush, hollow-metal construction; fabricated by
laminating plastic laminate to exposed faces of enameled cold-rolled steel doors and covering
edges with protective edge trim [matching door frames]. Plastic-laminate color, texture, and
pattern as selected by Architect from [plastic-laminate] [elevator] manufacturer's full range.
9. Sight Guards: Provide sight guards on doors matching door edges.
10. Sills: Extruded metal, with grooved surface, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) thick.
11. Non-shrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, non-staining, noncorrosive, nongaseous
grout complying with ASTM C 1107.
2.8 SIGNAL EQUIPMENT
A. General: Provide hall-call and car-call buttons that light when activated and remain lit until call has
been fulfilled. Fabricate lighted elements with [long-life incandescent lamps and acrylic or other
permanent, non-yellowing translucent plastic diffusers] [or] [LEDs].
B. General: Provide signal equipment designed for destination-based system. Fabricate lighted
elements with [long-life incandescent lamps and acrylic or other permanent, non-yellowing
translucent plastic diffusers] [or] [LEDs].
C. Car Control Stations: Provide manufacturer's standard [recessed] [or] [semi-recessed] car control
stations. Mount in return panel adjacent to car door, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Swing-Return Car Control Stations: Provide car control stations mounted on rear of hinged return
panel adjacent to car door and with buttons, switches, controls and indicator lights projecting through
return panel but substantially flush with face of return panel.
1. Mark buttons and switches with standard identification for required use or function that complies
with ASME A17.1. Use both tactile symbols and Braille.
2. Provide "No Smoking" sign matching car control station, either integral with car control station
or mounted adjacent to it, with text and graphics as required by authorities having jurisdiction.

E. Emergency Communication System: Provide system that complies with ASME A17.1 and the U.S.
Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA),
Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)." On activation, system dials
preprogrammed number of monitoring station and identifies elevator location to monitoring station.
System provides two-way voice communication without using a handset and provides visible signals
that indicate when system has been activated and when monitoring station has responded. System is
contained in flush-mounted cabinet, with identification, instructions for use, and battery backup power
supply.
F. Firefighters' Two-Way Telephone Communication Service: Provide [flush-mounted cabinet]

[telephone jack] in each car and required conductors in traveling cable for firefighters' two-way
telephone communication service specified in Division 13 Section "Fire Alarm."
G. Car Position Indicator: Provide [illuminated], digital-type car position indicator, located above car
door or above car control station. Also provide audible signal to indicate to passengers that car is
either stopping at or passing each of the floors served.
1. Include travel direction arrows if not provided in car control station.
H. Hall Push-Button Stations: Provide one hall push-button station at each landing [for each single
elevator or group of elevators, but not less than one station for each four elevators in a group].
I. Hall Push-Button Stations: Provide hall push-button stations at each landing as indicated.
1. Provide manufacturer's standard wall-mounted units.

2. Provide units with flat faceplate for mounting with body of unit recessed in wall.
3. Equip units with buttons for calling elevator and for indicating desired direction of travel.
4. Equip units with [buttons] [or] [touch screen] for calling elevator and for indicating direction of
travel or destination as required by system. Provide a signaling system to verify floor selection,
where destination registration is required, and to direct passengers to appropriate car.
a. Provide a means for passengers to indicate that they have disabilities so control system
can allow extra room in assigned car.
b. Provide for connecting units that require destination registration to building security
access system so a card reader can be used to register calls.
5. Provide telephone jack in each unit for firefighters' two-way telephone communication service
specified in Division 13 Section "Fire Alarm."
J. Hall Lanterns: Units with illuminated arrows; but provide single arrow at terminal landings. Provide
[one of] the following:
1. Manufacturer's standard wall-mounted units, for mounting above entrance frames.

2. Units with flat faceplate for mounting with body of unit recessed in wall and with illuminated
elements projecting from faceplate for ease of angular viewing.
3. Units mounted in both jambs of entrance frame [for each elevator].
4. Units mounted in both car door jambs [may be used only for single elevators or for two-car
groups].
K. Hall Annunciator: With each hall lantern, provide audible signals indicating car arrival and direction of
travel. Signals sound once for up and twice for down.
1. At manufacturer's option, audible signals may be placed on [each] car.

L. Hall Position Indicators: Provide [illuminated,] digital-display-type position indicators, located above
[each] hoistway entrance at ground floor. Provide units with flat faceplate for mounting with body of
unit recessed in wall.
1. Integrate ground-floor hall lanterns with hall position indicators.
M. Standby Power Elevator Selector Switches: Provide switches, as required by ASME A17.1, where
indicated. Adjacent to switches, provide illuminated signal that indicates when normal power supply
has failed. [For each elevator, provide illuminated signals that indicate when they are
operational and when they are at the designated emergency return level with doors open].
N. Fire Command Center Annunciator Panel: Provide panel containing illuminated position indicators for
each elevator, clearly labeled with elevator designation; include illuminated signal that indicates when
elevator is operational and when it is at the designated emergency return level with doors open.
Provide standby power elevator selector switch(es), as required by ASME A17.1, adjacent to position
indicators. Provide illuminated signal that indicates when normal power supply has failed.
O. Corridor Call Station Pictograph Signs: Provide signs matching hall push-button stations, with text
and graphics as required by authorities having jurisdiction, indicating that in case of fire elevators are
out of service and exits should be used instead. Provide one sign at each hall push-button station,
unless otherwise indicated.
2.9 ELEVATORS
A. Elevator Description:
1. Group Number: as shown in the drawings.

2. Elevator Number(s): as shown on Drawings.
3. Service Elevator Number(s): as shown on Drawings.
4. Type: [Geared] [Gearless] traction.
5. Machine Location: [Machine room above hoistway].
6. Rated Load: [2000 lb (908 kg)] [2100 lb (953 kg)] [2500 lb (1135 kg)] [3000 lb (1362 kg)]
[3500 lb (1589 kg)] [4000 lb (1816 kg)] [4500 lb (2043 kg)] [5000 lb (2270 kg)].
7. Freight Loading Class for Service Elevator(s): Class A.
8. Rated Speed: [200 fpm (1.0 m/s)] [350 fpm (1.8 m/s)] [400 fpm (2.0 m/s)] [450 fpm (2.3 m/s)]
[500 fpm (2.5 m/s)] [700 fpm (3.6 m/s)] [800 fpm (4.1 m/s)] [1000 fpm (5.1 m/s)] [1200 fpm
(6.1 m/s)] [1400 fpm (7.1 m/s)].
9. Operation System: [Selective collective automatic operation] [Group automatic operation]
[Group automatic operation with demand-based dispatching] [Destination-based group
automatic operation].
10. Auxiliary Operations:
a. Standby power operation.

b. Standby powered lowering.
c. Battery-powered lowering.
d. Earthquake Emergency Operation: Comply with requirements in ASME A17.1.
e. Automatic dispatching of loaded car.
f. Nuisance call cancels.
g. [Emergency hospital] [Priority] service at [all] floors.
h. Independent service for [service elevator] [all cars in group].
i. Loaded-car bypass.
j. Distributed parking.

11. Security Features: [Card-reader operation] [Keyswitch operation] [Keypad operation] [Car-
to-lobby feature].
12. Dual Car Control Stations: Provide two car control stations [in each elevator]; equip only one
with required keyswitches if any.
13. Car Enclosures:
a. Inside Width: [64 inches (1626 mm)] [68 inches (1727 mm)] [80 inches (2032 mm)]
[92 inches (2337 mm)] from side wall to side wall.
b. Inside Depth: [51 inches (1295 mm)] [53 inches (1346 mm)] [57 inches (1448 mm)]
[65 inches (1651 mm)] [87-1/2 inches (2222 mm)] [90 inches (2286 mm)] [93 inches
(2362 mm)] [93-1/2 inches (2375 mm)] [96 inches (2438 mm)] [101 inches (2565 mm)]
[102 inches (2591 mm)] from back wall to front wall (return panels).
c. Inside Height: [88 inches (2235 mm)] [92 inches (2337 mm)] [94 inches (2388 mm)]
[100 inches (2540 mm)] [104 inches (2642 mm)] [108 inches (2743 mm)] [112 inches
(2845 mm)] to underside of ceiling.
d. Front Walls (Return Panels): [Polished stainless steel, No. 8 finish] [Satin stainless
steel, No. 4 finish] [Polished bronze, lacquered] [Satin bronze, lacquered].
e. Car Fixtures: [Polished stainless steel, No. 8 finish] [Satin stainless steel, No. 4
finish] [Polished bronze, lacquered] [Satin bronze, lacquered].
f. Side and Rear Wall Panels: [Enameled steel] [Plastic laminate] [Satin stainless steel,
No. 4 finish] [Textured stainless steel].
g. Reveals: [Enameled steel] [Polished stainless steel, No. 8 finish] [Satin stainless
steel, No. 4 finish] [Polished bronze, lacquered] [Satin bronze, lacquered].
h. Door Faces (Interior): [Enameled steel] [Polished stainless steel, No. 8 finish] [Satin
stainless steel, No. 4 finish] [Textured stainless steel] [Polished bronze, lacquered]
[Satin bronze, lacquered] [Plastic laminate].
i. Door Sills: [Aluminum, mill finish] [Bronze, polished] [Nickel silver, polished].
j. Ceiling: [Luminous ceiling] [Polished stainless steel, No. 8 finish] [Satin stainless
steel, No. 4 finish] [Polished bronze, lacquered] [Reflective metallic-finish, plastic-
laminate, stainless steel] [Reflective metallic-finish, plastic-laminate, bronze].
k. Handrails: [1-1/2 inches (38 mm) round] [1/2 by 2 inches (13 by 50 mm) rectangular]
[mirror-polished stainless steel, No. 8 finish] [satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish]
[mirror-polished bronze, lacquered] [satin bronze, lacquered], at [sides] [and] [rear]
of car.
l. Floor: Manufacturer's standard carpet.
m. Floor prepared to receive carpet (specified in Division 9 Section "Carpet").
n. Floor prepared to receive resilient tile (specified in Division 9 Section "Resilient Floor
Tile").
o. Floor prepared to receive sheet vinyl (specified in Division 9 Section "Sheet Vinyl Floor
Coverings").
p. Floor recessed and prepared to receive [dimension stone tile (specified in Division 9
Section "Dimension Stone Tile")] [ceramic tile (specified in Division 9 Section
"Ceramic Tile")].
q. Floor Thickness, Including Setting Materials: <Insert thickness> above plywood
subfloor.
14. Hoistway Entrances: As follows:
a. Width: [36 inches (914 mm)] [42 inches (1067 mm)] [48 inches (1219 mm)] [54
inches (1372 mm)].
b. Height: [84 inches (2134 mm)] [96 inches (2438 mm)].
c. Type: [Single-speed side sliding] [Two-speed side sliding] [Single-speed center
opening] [Two-speed center opening].

d. Fire-Protection Rating: [1 hour] [1-1/2 hours] [with 30-minute temperature rise of 450
deg F (250 deg C)].
e. Frames [at First Floor] [at Basement Floors]: [Enameled steel] [Polished stainless
steel, No. 8 finish] [Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish] [Polished bronze, lacquered]
[Satin bronze, lacquered].
f. Frames at Other Floors: [Enameled steel] [Polished stainless steel, No. 8 finish]
[Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish] [Polished bronze, lacquered] [Satin bronze,
lacquered].
g. Doors [and Transoms] [at First Floor] [at Basement Floors]: [Enameled steel]
[Polished stainless steel, No. 8 finish] [Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish] [Textured
stainless steel] [Polished bronze, lacquered] [Satin bronze, lacquered] [Plastic
laminate].
h. Doors [and Transoms] at Other Floors: [Enameled steel] [Polished stainless steel,
No. 8 finish] [Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish] [Textured stainless steel] [Polished
bronze, lacquered] [Satin bronze, lacquered] [Plastic laminate].
i. Sills [at First Floor] [at Basement Floors]: [Aluminum, mill finish] [Bronze, polished]
[Nickel silver, polished].
j. Sills at Other Floors: [Aluminum, mill finish] [Bronze, polished] [Nickel silver,
polished].
15. Hall Fixtures [at First Floor] [at Basement Floors]: [Polished stainless steel, No. 8 finish]
[Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish] [Polished bronze, lacquered] [Satin bronze, lacquered]
[Recessed type with no exposed-metal surfaces].
16. Hall Fixtures at Other Floors: [Polished stainless steel, No. 8 finish] [Satin stainless steel,
No. 4 finish] [Polished bronze, lacquered] [Satin bronze, lacquered] [Recessed type with
no exposed-metal surfaces].
17. Additional Requirements:
a. Provide inspection certificate in each car, mounted under acrylic cover with frame made
from [polished stainless steel, No. 8 finish] [satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish]
[polished bronze, lacquered] [satin bronze, lacquered].
b. Provide blanket hooks [in all cars] and [one] [two] complete set(s) of full-height
protective blankets.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine elevator areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Examine hoistways, hoistway openings, pits,
and machine rooms as constructed; verify critical dimensions; and examine supporting structure and
other conditions under which elevator work is to be installed.
1. For the record, prepare a written report, endorsed by Installer, listing dimensional discrepancies
and conditions detrimental to performance or indicating that dimensions and conditions were
found to be satisfactory.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Welded Construction: Provide welded connections for installing elevator work where bolted
connections are not required for subsequent removal or for normal operation, adjustment, inspection,
maintenance, and replacement of worn parts. Comply with AWS standards for workmanship and for
qualifications of welding operators.
C. Sound Isolation: Mount rotating and vibrating equipment on vibration-isolating mounts designed to
minimize transmission of vibrations to structure and thereby minimize structure-borne noise from
elevator system.
D. Lubricate operating parts of systems, including ropes, as recommended by manufacturers.
E. Alignment: Coordinate installation of hoistway entrances with installation of elevator guide rails for
accurate alignment of entrances with car. Where possible, delay final adjustment of sills and doors
until car is operable in shaft. Reduce clearances to minimum, safe, workable dimension at each
landing.
F. Leveling Tolerance: 1/8 inch (3 mm), up or down, regardless of load and direction of travel.
G. Set sills flush with finished floor surface at landing. Fill space under sill solidly with non-shrink,
nonmetallic grout.
H. Locate hall signal equipment for elevators as follows, unless otherwise indicated:
1. For groups of elevators, locate hall push-button stations between two elevators at center of
group or at location most convenient for approaching passengers.
2. Place hall lanterns either above or beside each hoistway entrance.
3. Mount hall lanterns at a minimum of 72 inches (1829 mm) above finished floor.
A. Acceptance Testing: On completion of elevator installation and before permitting use (either
temporary or permanent) of elevators, perform acceptance tests as required and recommended by
ASME A17.1 and by governing regulations and agencies.
B. Operating Test: Load [elevator] [each elevator] [one elevator of each type, capacity, speed, and
travel distance] to rated capacity and operate continuously for 30 minutes over full travel distance,
stopping at each level and proceeding immediately to the next. Record temperature rise of elevator
machine during 30-minute test period. Record failure to perform as required.
C. Advise Owner, Architect, and authorities having jurisdiction in advance of dates and times tests are to
be performed on elevators.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Temporary Use: [Limit temporary use for construction purposes to one elevator]. Comply with
the following requirements for [each] elevator used for construction purposes:

1. Provide car with temporary enclosure, either within finished car or in place of finished car, to
protect finishes from damage.
2. Provide strippable protective film on entrance and car doors and frames.
3. Provide padded wood bumpers on entrance door frames covering jambs and frame faces.
4. Provide other protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, and procedures as needed to
protect elevator and elevator equipment.
5. Do not load elevators beyond their rated weight capacity.
6. Engage elevator Installer to provide full maintenance service. Include preventive maintenance,
repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as
necessary for proper elevator operation at rated speed and capacity. Provide parts and
supplies same as those used in the manufacture and installation of original equipment.
7. Engage elevator Installer to restore damaged work, if any, so no evidence remains of
correction. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop, make required
repairs and refinish entire unit, or provide new units as required.
3.5 DEMONSTRATION

operate, [adjust and maintain] elevator(s). Refer to Division 1 Section "Demonstration and Training."
B. Check operation of [each] elevator with Owner's personnel present and before date of Substantial
Completion. Determine that operation systems and devices are functioning properly.
C. Check operation of [each] elevator with Owner's personnel present not more than one month before
end of warranty period. Determine that operation systems and devices are functioning properly.

SUBJECT: SECTION 14560 – CHUTES
SECTION 14560
CHUTES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY

1. Laundry chutes.
1. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for metal supporting framework at floor

penetrations.
2. Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for roof vent flashing and
counterflashing.
3. Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories" for roof curbs.
4. Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" for annular spaces at
doors, floors, or roofs.
5. Division 13 Section "Fire-Suppression Piping" for fire sprinklers.
6. Division 15 Sections for water-service connections.
7. Division 16 Sections for electrical-service connections.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
B. Shop Drawings: Detail chute assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, required
clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field
connection.
1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal and control wiring.
C. Product Certificates: For each type of chute, signed by product manufacturer.
D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For chutes to include in emergency, operation, and
maintenance manuals.
1. Include manufacturer's recycling plan guidelines.
A. NFPA Compliance: Provide chutes complying with NFPA 82.
MHA – TECH. SPECIFICATION – 1706 – 04/02/2015 SECTION 14560 – CHUTES 1/5

B. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and
labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for
fire ratings indicated.
1. Test Pressure: Test at atmospheric (neutral) pressure according to NFPA 252 or

UL 10B.
2. Intake Door: Class B labeled; 1 1/2 hour 'UL' labeled, fire rated with 30-minute
temperature rise of 250 deg F (140 deg C).
3. Discharge Door: Class B labeled; 1-hour 'UL' labeled, fire rated with 30-minute
4. Access Door: Class B labeled; 1-1/2 hour 'UL' labeled, fire rated with 30-minute
5. Vent: Full diameter vent extending 3 feet (914mm) above roof with metal safety cap,
in accordance with NFPA Code 82, 2003 edition.
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in

NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and
marked for intended use.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:
1. Midland Metalcraft Co.

2. U.S. Chutes.
3. Valiant Products, Inc.
4. Wilkinson Hi-Rise, LLC.
5. Chutes International
2.2 CHUTES
A. Chute Metal: Aluminum-coated, cold-rolled, commercial steel sheet; ASTM A 463/A 463M,
Type 1 with not less than T1-40 (T1M-120) coating; Type 430 stainless steel,
ASTM A 240/A 240M; Type 304 stainless steel, ASTM A 240/A 240M].
1. Thickness: 0.060 inch (1.6 mm).
B. Size: 24-inch (610-mm) diameter or as indicated on Drawings.
2.3 DOORS
A. Intake Door Assemblies: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304 stainless-steel, self-closing units
with positive latch and latch handle; as required to provide fire-protection and temperature-
rise ratings indicated; and with frame suitable for enclosing chase construction.
1. Door Type: Type as indicated on Drawings.

2. Size: Manufacturer's standard size for door type, chute type, and diameter indicated.
3. Finish: Manufacturer's standard satin or No. 3 directional polish.

4. Locks: Cylinder locks with keys that are removable only when cylinder is locked. For
each chute, key locks alike to master key system. For each door, furnish four (4)
keys.
5. Foot Operators: Hopper-type door operators that unlatch and open door when foot
pedal is depressed.
6. Mechanical Interlocks: Interlock system operated from discharge door to
automatically lock intake doors.
7. Electrical Interlocks: Interlock system that is energized by opening one intake door;
remaining doors automatically lock when system is energized.
B. Discharge-Door Assemblies: Aluminum-coated-steel doors as required to provide fire-

protection and temperature-rise ratings indicated; equipped with fusible links that cause
doors to close in the event of fire.
1. Direct Vertical Discharge: Provide inclined, horizontally rolling, shutter-type unit.

2. Horizontal Discharge: Provide top-hinged, self-closing, hopper door with self-latching
hardware; floor-mounted leg brace designed to absorb impact of material dropping
against chute; and minimum NPS 2 (DN 50) drain pipe connection.
C. Heat and Smoke Detector System: Interlock system with temperature-rise elements that
locks chute doors when temperature in chute reaches a predetermined, adjustable
temperature.
1. Locate smoke detector outside discharge door with solenoid to close discharge door.
D. Access Door Assemblies: Manufacturer's standard ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 302/304
stainless-steel doors; as required to provide fire-protection and temperature-rise ratings
indicated; with frame suitable for enclosing chase construction; and in satin or No. 3
directional polish finish.
E. Manual Control System: Control system with manual switches that lock doors of chute
during shutdown hours and service operations.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Fire Sprinklers: NPS 1/2 (DN 13) fire sprinklers ready for piping connections.
B. Flushing Spray Unit: NPS 3/4 (DN 19) spray head unit located in chute above highest
intake door, ready for hot-water piping connection, and with access for head and piping
maintenance.
C. Sanitizing Unit: NPS 3/4 (DN 19) disinfecting and sanitizing spray head unit located in chute
above highest intake door, including 1-gal. (3.8-L) tank and adjustable proportioning valve
with bypass for manual control of sanitizing and flushing operation, ready for hot-water
piping connection, and with access for head and piping maintenance.
D. Intake Door Baffles: Rubber baffles, 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick.
E. Sound Dampening: Manufacturer's standard exterior mastic coating on chute.
1. Sound and vibration isolator pads at floor supporting frames.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. General: Factory-assemble chutes to greatest extent practical with continuously welded or

lock-seamed joints without bolts, rivets, or clips projecting on chute interior. Include intake-

door assemblies and metal supporting framing at each floor, and chute expansion joints
between each support point.
B. Roof Vent: Fabricate vent unit to extend 3 feet (914mm) above roof with full-diameter,
screened vent and metal safety cap or glass explosion-release cap in accordance with
NFPA Code 82, 2003 edition. Fabricate with roof-deck flange, counter flashing, and
clamping ring of nonferrous metal compatible with chute metal.
C. Fire Sprinklers: Comply with NFPA 13. Locate fire sprinklers at or above the top service
opening of chutes, within the chute at alternate floor levels in buildings more than two
stories tall, and at the lowest service level.
D. Equipment Access: Fabricate chutes with access for maintaining equipment located within
the chute, such as flushing and sanitizing units, fire sprinklers, and plumbing and electrical
connections.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with NFPA 82 requirements and with chute manufacturer's written
instructions. Assemble components with tight, non leaking joints. Anchor securely to
supporting structure to withstand impact and stresses on vent units. Install chute and
components to maintain fire-resistive construction of chute and enclosing chase.
B. Install chutes plumb, without offsets or obstructions that might prevent materials from free
falling within chutes.
C. Anchor roof flanges of chute vents before installing roofing and flashing. Install chute-vent
counter flashing after roofing and roof-penetration flashing are installed.
D. Intake and Discharge Doors: Interface door units with throat sections of chutes for safe,
snag-resistant, sanitary depositing of materials in chutes by users.
1. Coordinate installation of foot-pedal door operator with installation of door and chase.
2. Interconnect sanitizer control with door interlock system.
E. Electrical Interlock System: Comply with applicable NECA 1 recommendations.
F. Test chute components after installation. Operate doors, locks, and interlock systems to
demonstrate that hardware is adjusted and electrical wiring is connected correctly.
Complete test operations before installing chase enclosures.
G. Test fire sprinklers and heat- and smoke-sensing devices for proper operation.
H. Operate sanitizing unit through one complete cycle of chute use and cleanup, and replenish
chemicals or cleaning fluids in unit containers.
3.2 CLEANING
A. After completing chase enclosure, clean exposed surfaces of chute system's components.
Do not remove labels of independent testing and inspecting agencies.

3.3 DEMONSTRATION
A. Demonstrate use of chute and equipment to Owner's personnel.
B. Demonstrate replenishment of sanitizing-unit chemicals or cleaning fluids.

1706 - BF HOTEL - Specs - Architectural - Part 2

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

1706 - BF HOTEL - Specs - Architectural - Part 2

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

1706 - BF HOTEL - Specs - Architectural - Part 2

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

BF HOTEL

Makkah, Saudi Arabia

ARCHITECTURAL/ FINISHING WORKS

DOORS AND WINDOWS SECTION 11150 – PARKING CONTROL EQUIPMENT

SECTION 08810 – GLASS SECTION 11172 – WASTE COMPACTORS

SECTION 08911 – GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN SECTION 11460 – UNIT KITCHENS

SECTION 09300 – TILES CONVEYING SYSTEM

SECTION 09680 – CARPET

SECTION 09900 – PAINTS AND COATINGS

SECTION 10155 – TOILET COMPARTMENTS

SECTION 10260 – HEAVY DUTY RUBBER CORNER

SECTION 10801 – SPECIALTIES

SECTION 11014 – FAÇADE MAINTENANCE

SECTION 11060 – THEATER AND STAGE

SECTION 11110 – COMMERCIAL LAUNDRY

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

1. Glass at Aluminum windows

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Section 08520 - Aluminum Windows.

B. ASTM C 162 – Standard Terminology of Glass and Glass Products.

D. ASTM C 1036 – Standard Specification for Flat Glass.

E. ASTM C 1048 – Standard Specification for Heat-Treated Flat Glass.

F. ASTM C 1172 – Standard Specification for Laminated Architectural Flat Glass.

G. ASTM C 1193 – Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants.

MHA – TECH. SPECIFICATION – 1706 – 04//02/2015 SECTION 08810 – GLASS 1 / 14

N. GANA (GM) – FGMA Glazing Manual; Glass Association of North America.

O. GANA (GM) – FGMA Sealant Manual; Glass Association of North America.

B. Glass Thicknesses: Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters according to

1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

MHA – TECH. SPECIFICATION – 1706 – 04//02/2015 SECTION 08810 – GLASS 2 / 14

A. Submit under provision of Section 01300.

B. Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:

F. Warranty documents Specified herein.

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions and as needed to

MHA – TECH. SPECIFICATION – 1706 – 04//02/2015 SECTION 08810 – GLASS 3 / 14

1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Coated-Glass Products: Manufacturer's standard form,

1. Warranty Period: Ten (10) years from date of Substantial Completion.

1. Warranty Period: Five (5) years from date of Substantial Completion.

1. Warranty Period: Ten (10) years from date of Substantial Completion.

1.11 EXTRA MATERIAL

1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be

MHA – TECH. SPECIFICATION – 1706 – 04//02/2015 SECTION 08810 – GLASS 4 / 14

2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products

C. Substitutions: Not permitted.

A. Clear Uncoated Float Glass:

B. Tinted Uncoated Float Glass:

MHA – TECH. SPECIFICATION – 1706 – 04//02/2015 SECTION 08810 – GLASS 5 / 14

C. Reflective Coated Float Glass

D. Low-Emissivity Coated Float Glass:

MHA – TECH. SPECIFICATION – 1706 – 04//02/2015 SECTION 08810 – GLASS 6 / 14

e. UV Transmittance: As indicated on Drawing.

E. Solar Control Low-Emissivity Coated Float Glass:

MHA – TECH. SPECIFICATION – 1706 – 04//02/2015 SECTION 08810 – GLASS 7 / 14

O. Glazing Clips: Manufacturer's standard type.

P. Sealants: Specified in Section 07900.

MHA – TECH. SPECIFICATION – 1706 – 04//02/2015 SECTION 08810 – GLASS 8 / 14